FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump User Manual

User Manual
FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump
Customer References:
Customer: PT Citra Tubindo
Rig / Hull: N/A
Tag Number: N/A
National Oilwell Varco References:

SO Number / Project Number: 188074
Document Number: D2G1008930-FDD-001
Revision: 01
Volume: 1 of 1
www.nov.com
Document Number:
Revision:
Page:
D2G1008930-FDD-001
01
ii
REVISION HISTORY
01
8/11/2014
For Information
T. Schutt
J. Olson
B. Schumer
Rev
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
Reason for Issue
Prepared
Checked
Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision
01
Change Description
Initial Release
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Document Number:
D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC
Revision:
01
Page:
Vol.
Chapter/
Section
Title
Remarks
General Information
Section Not Applicable
Installation, Operation & Maintenance
2.1
Procedures
2.2
Spare Parts List
Technical Documents & Drawings
3.1
General / Mechanical Drawings
3.2
System / Process Diagrams
3.3
Electrical / Instrument
3.4
Performance Data
Vendor Documentation
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vol.
Chapter/
Section
Title
General Information
Chapter Not Applicable
www.nov.com
Document Number:
D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 1
Revision:
01
Page:
Document Number
Rev.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vol.
Chapter/
Section
Title
Installation, Operation & Maintenance
2.1
Procedures
2.2
Spare Parts List
www.nov.com
Document Number:
D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 2
Revision:
01
Page:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vol.
Chapter/
Section
Title
2.1
Procedures
www.nov.com
Document Number:
D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 2.1
Revision:
01
Page:
Document Number
Rev.
Technical Specification Pre-Shipment And Storage

Preservation For New-Build NOV Triplex Mud Pumps
PS-4030
02
Commissioning Procedure, FB / FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump
EDN-1688
02
Operation Manual Triplex Mud Pump For Models: FD500, FD-800, FD-1000 & FD-1600
EPL-1911
01
Product Information Bulletin Triplex Mud Pump

Supplement for all Pump Manuals
MP.WARNING
02
Product Information Bulletin Triplex Mud Pumps Power

End Lubrication Oil Additive and wear-in Period
01-05-01-MP
06
Procedure The Use of and Application of Safety Wire for

Secondary Retention
ASP00019
Design Specification Design Torque Standard
DS00008
General Lubrication Bulletin General Lubrication Bulletin

for CE Drilling Equipment
CE-538E
06
Technical Specification
Pre-Shipment And Storage Preservation
For New-Build NOV Triplex Mud Pumps
RIG/PLANT
ADDITIONAL CODE
REFERENCE
SDRL CODE
DISCIPLINE
CLIENT PO NUMBER
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER
Client Document Number
www.nov.com
Triplex Mud Pump
TOTAL PGS
REMARKS
MAIN TAG NUMBER
REFERENCE DESCRIPTION
This document contains proprietary and confidential information

which belongs to National-Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or
subsidiaries (all collectively referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is
loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property of NOV.
Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or
distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the
express written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to
NOV upon request and in any event upon completion of the use for
which it was loaned. This document and the information contained
and represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV.
National Oilwell Varco

11000 Corporate Centre Drive
Suite 200
Houston, Texas 77041
U.S.A.
Phone: +1-281-854-0400
Fax: +1-281-854-0607
DOCUMENT NUMBER
REV
PS-4030
02
Document number
Revision
Page
PS-4030
02
2
REVISION HISTORY
02
12.09.2012
For Information
RLP
BTS
GDH
15.08.2006
For Information
GDH
GDH
GDH
07.05.1990
For Information
GDH
GDH
GDH
Rev
Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
Reason for issue
Prepared
Checked
Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision
0
1
02
Change Description
Initial Release
Updated Entire Document
Added NOV Standard Front Cover & Updated Page Formats
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
PS-4030
02
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
SCOPE.............................................................................................................................. 4
MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION PRIOR TO PAINT .................................. 4
MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION AFTER PAINT ........................................ 5
STORAGE AT MANUFACTURING PLANT OR FINAL DESTINATION .......................... 6
STORAGE PREPARATIONS FOR MAIN DRIVE MOTORS. ........................................... 6
6
PRESERVATION PROCEDURE WHEN STORAGE EXCEEDS SIX (6) MONTHS OF
INITIAL PRESERVATION. .......................................................................................................... 6
7
START-UP AFTER STORAGE ........................................................................................ 7
CONTACT DETAILS FOR NOTED CORROSION PREVENTATIVE MATERIALS ......... 7
EXHIBIT 1 ......................................................................................................................... 8
10
EXHIBIT 2 ......................................................................................................................... 9
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
PS-4030
02
4
SCOPE
This specification covers the preservation and storage procedure for shipment of new-build
NOV Triplex Mud Pumps shipped from the manufacturing plant.
This specification is intended to provide preservation of new-build NOV Triplex Mud Pumps
for six (6) months from the shipment of the mud pump from the manufacturing facility. If a
pump is to be stored for a period of time exceeding six (6) months, additional precautions
should be taken as outlined in this specification.
National Oilwell Varco recommends that all pumps are inspected for any signs of corrosion
and for proper preservation at a minimum every three (3) months for pumps stored outside
and every six (6) months for pumps stored indoors.
Sub-tier: National Oilwell PS-3081
MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION PRIOR TO PAINT

Drain all water and clean out liner wash tank. Remove drain plug in bottom of liner wash
pump and drain water then reinstall plug. Remove discharge flange from liner wash pump
and pour one (1) pint of inhibiting oil-based concentrate (Cortec VpCI 329 Vapor Corrosion
Inhibiting oil-based concentrate or equivalent) into liner wash pump. Rotate two (2)
revolutions by hand to distribute the product. Re-install discharge flange.
Drain all oil from pump power end sump and remove crosshead covers and inspection
covers. Clean out oil sump as per National Oilwell PS-3081 (Mud Pump Cleanliness).
Spray all internal machined parts of power end and crosshead area with inhibiting oil-based
concentrate (Cortec VpCI 329 Vapor Corrosion Inhibiting oil-based concentrate or
equivalent). Rotate pump turn and re-spray. Pour quantity of inhibiting oil-based
concentrate specified in the table below into power end sump.
Mud Pump Models
14P, FC 2200
12P, 10P, HD or A1700/1400PT, FB/FC/FD 1600, FB 1300
9P, 8P, B or A850-1100PT, F/FD 1000, F 800
7P, A600PT, FD 500
Quantity of Inhibitor
5 Gallons
3 Gallons
2 Gallons
1 Gallon
For pumps equipped with chain drives, spray internal machined parts inside chain cases
with inhibiting oil-based concentrate (Cortec VpCI 329 Vapor Corrosion Inhibiting oil based
concentrate or equivalent).
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
PS-4030
02
5
Replace all guards and seals as necessary using specified gasket material and sealing
compounds.
Remove fluid end valve covers, seals, valves springs and seats and treat internal cavities
of fluid ends, discharge manifold, discharge strainer block and suction manifold with rust
preventative (CRC SP400 or equivalent). Coat threads with anti-seize (KOPR KOTE
10002 or equivalent) and coat bottom side of valve cover with rust preventative. Reinstall
seals and fluid end valves covers hand tight. Customer liners, pistons, piston rods, valves,
seats, springs and liner retention parts are not used for plant testing. These expendables
are checked for preservation when packed and then shipped with the loose parts.
MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION AFTER PAINT

Remove breather and pack with loose parts for later shipment with pump. Seal breather
hole with a greased solid plug. Affix a warning label near the breather opening (see Exhibit
1).
Spray all external unpainted machined parts of pump with rust preventative (CRC SP400 or
equivalent).
Cover large diameter pipe and other openings with hardboard and protective plastic wrap.
Liner bushing openings shall also be covered and sealed.
Seal all other pipe work (air, water, and electrical) with plastic caps of the correct size and
style. Electrical J-boxes are to be encased in protective plastic wrap. Place two (2) onepound bags of desiccant inside each J-box before sealing with tape. Wrap pressure
gauges with bubble paper and plastic.
Tape or band down loose hinged guards and inspection covers.
Spray all machined unpainted loose parts and expendables to be shipped with pump with
rust preventative (CRC SP400 or equivalent). All parts will be wrapped or boxed to prevent
damage.
Affix one (1) warning label (see Exhibit 2) to the power end pump cover and one (1)
warning label on the fluid end assembly of the pump. Affix warning labels on each loose
part container. In cases where the equipment will be boxed at an offsite export packer, a
sufficient number of warning labels will be supplied with the shipment.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
PS-4030
02
6
STORAGE AT MANUFACTURING PLANT OR FINAL DESTINATION

Indoor storage is preferred whenever possible; but if outside storage is required, ensure
pump is stored away from salt water spray, sand blast or other adverse conditions. It is
highly recommended that ship loose parts be stored indoors to eliminate conditions that
promote condensation and direct sources of moisture.
It is also recommended to store pump on blocks and cover entire pump with plastic
sheeting.
STORAGE PREPARATIONS FOR MAIN DRIVE MOTORS.

For storage preparations for main drive motors, National Oilwell Varco recommends that
the original manufacturers instructions be followed. If space heaters are supplied, the Jbox plastic wrap must be removed and the heaters should be connected throughout the
complete storage period.
PRESERVATION PROCEDURE WHEN STORAGE EXCEEDS SIX (6) MONTHS OF

INITIAL PRESERVATION.
Note: It is recommended that inspections be carried out on six (6) month cycles when
pumps are in indoors and three (3) month cycles when stored outside.
Remove plastic sheeting.
Remove side crosshead covers and top inspection covers and inspect for any internal
corrosion. Correct any adverse conditions.
Replenish rust inhibitor to quantities previously listed.
Rotate pinion shaft five (5) revolutions using supplied tool.
Inspect for condition of external protection (rust preventative and paint).
adverse conditions.
Correct any
Replace plastic sheeting.

Inspect all ship-loose parts for indications of corrosion or damage and recoat with inhibitor.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
PS-4030
02
7
START-UP AFTER STORAGE

Any pump that has been in storage will need a thorough inspection prior to start-up to
insure it has not been damaged in any way and that all parts are properly in place. Failure
to observe the following points can result in serious damage. Before servicing the pump,
the power end sump and chain drives housings will need to be drained of any inhibiting
additive. The Cortec brand products used for preservation are compatible with all
lubricating oils and need not be totally removed when putting equipment into service.
To service the Power End after storage and prior to start-up, remove all covers and
thoroughly clean and inspect all of the parts and finished surfaces. Check all of the
bearings to make certain they are clean and in good condition. Fill the power end with
clean EP oil of the proper viscosity to the proper level. Make sure oil is poured into the oil
distribution trough and is worked into all of the bearings. Replace all covers and install
breather.
To service the Fluid End after storage and prior to start-up, remove covers and thoroughly
clean and inspect inside of the fluid end cylinders. Properly install valves, pistons, liners
and all other fluid end parts. Carefully tighten all bolts, nuts, studs and working
connections to specified torque requirements.
CONTACT DETAILS FOR NOTED CORROSION PREVENTATIVE MATERIALS
Product Name
Cortec VpCI 329
CRC Industries Inc. SP400
KOPR-KOTE
www.nov.com
Company
Gulf Corrosion Control
Fastenal
Drago Supply Co.
Contact Number
(713)681-7500
(713)983-7715
(800)553-2363
Document number
Revision
Page
PS-4030
02
8
EXHIBIT 1
WARNING
REINSTALL BREATHER BEFORE PUTTING
PUMP INTO SERVICE
NOV PN xxxxxxx
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
10
PS-4030
02
9
EXHIBIT 2
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS PROTECTED FOR
SIX MONTHS FROM EX-WORKS DATE OF:
MONTH
DAY
YEAR
ADDITIONAL SERVICING INFORMATION IS

AVAILABLE IN NOV MUD PUMP OPERATIONAL
MANUAL
NOV PN XXXXXX
www.nov.com
ENGINEERING
SUBJECT
COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE, FB/FD-1600

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP
PREPARED BY
B. Schumer
DATE
12 Apr 2012
CHECKED BY
Bryce Brock
DOCUMENT OR DRAWING NO.
PAGE
EDN-1688
1 of
12
APPROVED
REVISED DATE
GDH
REV.
02
DATE
13 Apr 2012
SELLER INFORMATION
COMPANY NAME:
ADDRESS:

Houston, TX 77041
TELEPHONE:
(281) 854-0400
TELEFAX:
(281) 854-0505
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
EDN-1688
DOCUMENT TITLE:
Commissioning Procedure, FB/FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump
PAGE
EDN-1688
2 of
12
ENGINEERING
SUBJECT
PREPARED BY
B. Schumer

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP
DATE
12 Apr 2012
APPROVED
REVISED DATE
GDH
02
CHECKED BY
DATE
Bryce Brock
13 Apr 2012
COMMISSIONING INDEX
SUBJECT
PAGE NO.
Part I. Pre-Commissioning Procedures
Pre-Start Up Requirements.....................................................................................
1. Power End..................................................................................................
2. Main Electric Drive Motors
3. Auxiliary A/C Motors.
4. Instrumentation...........................................................................................
5. Liner Wash System.....................................................................................
6. Fluid End....................................................................................................
7. Suction Dampener/Desurger.......................................................................
8. Pulsation Dampener....................................................................................
9. Pressure Gauge............................................................................................
10. Reset Relief Valve.......................................................................................
11. Discharge Strainer
12. Mud Pump Drive Assembly.
a. Belt Drive Units
b. Chain Drive Units.
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
Part II. Commissioning Procedures

1. Pre-Commission Checks..
2. Commissioning Operational Test.
3. Inspections/Check-Offs during Test Program..
REV.
6
8
9
PAGE
EDN-1688
3 of
12
ENGINEERING
SUBJECT

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP
PREPARED BY
DATE
B. Schumer
12 Apr 2012
APPROVED
REVISED DATE
GDH
CHECKED BY
Bryce Brock
REV.
02
DATE
13 Apr 2012
INITIAL STARTUP PROCEDURES

GENERAL:
The initial startup procedures are written to assist the operator in preparing the pump packages for normal
operation. The startup procedures are separated into two categories: Part I: Pre-Commissioning, and Part
II: Commissioning Procedures. It is suggested that a copy of these pages be made for each pump to be
used as a check-off sheet.
PART I. PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES:

PRE-STARTUP REQUIREMENTS:
1.
Power End of Pump:
a. Drain and flush any moisture or contamination that has accumulated in the power end reservoir.
Fill to the FULL mark on the dipstick with the recommended oil.
Ambient Temperature:
0F to 85F (-18C to 33C) =
30F to 155F (-1C to 68C) =
AGMA No. 4 EP
AGMA No. 6 EP
Reservoir Capacity: 100 US Gallons (379 Liters)

Note: The rust preventative on the internal surfaces of the pump is oil-soluble and is
compatible with the lubricants recommended above. It is not necessary to flush and drain
unless the preservative has become contaminated (water, sand etc.).
b. Oil Filters:
Assure that the oil filters in the power end reservoir and external oil pump system are clean.
2. Main Electric Drive Motors:
Megger test the motors.

Check each motor separately for the correct rotation.
Reconnect if necessary.
Megger test the blower motors.
Check blower motors for correct rotation and quantity of air flow.
PAGE
EDN-1688
4 of
12
ENGINEERING
SUBJECT

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP
PREPARED BY
DATE
B. Schumer
12 Apr 2012
APPROVED
REVISED DATE
GDH
CHECKED BY
Bryce Brock
REV.
02
DATE
13 Apr 2012
3. Auxiliary A/C Electric Motors:
Megger test the motors.

Check motors for correct rotation.
4. Instrumentation (if equipped):
Check to assure that all instrumentation has been properly hooked up. Check the calibration
test sheets for validity and recalibrate if necessary.
5. Liner Wash System:
Clean liner wash tank, if needed, and fill with fresh clean water.
Ensure that supply hoses and spray nipples are installed correctly.
Start pump and adjust regulating valve to maximum flow without splash onto the extension
rods.
6. Fluid End:
Check to assure that all liners, valves, and pistons are installed properly in accordance with
the installation instructions.
Ensure that the liner end covers are installed on the rear end of the liners.
Ensure that the baffle discs are installed on the end of the crosshead extension rods.
Clean grease and paint from the exposed parts of the extension rods, checking for burrs.
Coat rods with a light oil.
7. Suction Dampener/Desurger
If a desurger is used, charge desurger to 10 PSI (0.7 bar) air pressure.
NOTE: When charging the bladder, make sure that the mud pump suction line valve has been
closed and that all pressure has been bled off of the suction manifold surrounding the suction
desurger
If a dampener is used, charge dampener with a hand-operated air pump to 10 PSI (0.7 bar).
Once pump operations have been started, check the operation of the suction dampener by
inspecting the sight glass. Add or release air pressure through the Shraeder valve to keep the
diaphragm between the midpoint and the bottom of the sight glass.
8. Pulsation Dampener:
Refer to manufacturers instructions for charging the dampener.
USE ONLY NITROGEN OR AIR! DO NOT USE OXYGEN.
ENGINEERING
SUBJECT

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP
PREPARED BY
DATE
B. Schumer
12 Apr 2012
CHECKED BY
Bryce Brock
PAGE
EDN-1688
5 of
12
APPROVED
REVISED DATE
GDH
REV.
02
DATE
13 Apr 2012
9. Pressure Gauge:
Check to assure that the gauge is installed and there is no shut-off valve between it and the
discharge system.
10. Reset Relief Valve:
Check the installation and the setting.

NO SHUT-OFF VALVE is to be between the pump discharge and the relief valve.
Ensure that piping from the discharge port goes directly to the mud tank/pit and is securely
tied down, with a minimum downward slope of 1/4 per foot.
Ensure that piping has pressure rating equal to the relief valve highest setting.
11. Discharge Housing with Strainer:
Remove the strainer screen from the housing and assure that it is clean and free from
obstructions.
Check the stud nuts for proper make-up torque.
12. Mud Pump Drive Assembly:

Belt Drive Units:
Check the belt guards to ensure that belts will not drag on the guard.
Check the belt tension as instructed in the maintenance section of the operations manual.
Check the alignment of the drive motors.
Chain Drive Units:
Check the chain guards to ensure that the chains will not drag on the guard.
Check the oil pump to ensure that the relief valve is installed on the suction side.
Start the pump and ensure that the spray nozzles are spraying oil over the full width of the chain.
Adjust the relief valve to 15-25 PSI output with the warm oil.
PAGE
EDN-1688
6 of
12
ENGINEERING
SUBJECT

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP
PREPARED BY
DATE
B. Schumer
12 Apr 2012
APPROVED
REVISED DATE
REV.
GDH
CHECKED BY
Bryce Brock
02
DATE
13 Apr 2012
PART II. COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES:

GENERAL:
The power end and the fluid end have gone through rigorous tests prior to being shipped from the
manufacturing site; therefore, the following recommendations for the commissioning test are made
for the purpose of checking the overall unitization functions, including instrumentation, and to
assure that there are no problems which may have occurred during transportation and storage.
Operation of the pump in parallel to check the SCR-Motor assignments and controls, volumetric
displacement and mudline systems are at the option of the purchaser.
A. PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS:
Prior to starting the unitized pump package, review the previously outlined Pre-Commissioning
Requirements in Part I.
Check the discharge mudline to assure that all necessary valves are open. Ensure that the mud tanks
are full of test fluid (mud/water) prior to startup.
Make the desired assignment of the SCR-Motor Control System to the pump motors, and open the
throttle slightly. Check to ensure that charge pump and liner wash motors have started.
If no immediate problems are encountered, slowly throttle the pump to approximately 60 SPM and
continue operating the mud pump while making the following inspections to assure that all systems
are working properly:
1) Power End Lubrication:
Check oil pressure:
Max. = 60 PSI (4.14 bar) cold oil.

Min. = 5 PSI (0.344 bar) at any speed.
Normal = 7-40 PSI (0.483-2.76 bar)
2) Liner Wash System:
Adjust the regulator valve for proper volume of cooling fluid. 10 US Gallons (38 Liter)
per minute per liner.
Check the coolant temperature. 150F (66C) maximum.
3) Check for oil leaks around the power end covers and seals.
4) Check for interference or dragging in the belt/chain drive assemblies.
ENGINEERING
SUBJECT

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP
PREPARED BY
DATE
B. Schumer
12 Apr 2012
CHECKED BY
Bryce Brock
PAGE
EDN-1688
7 of
12
APPROVED
REVISED DATE
REV.
GDH
02
DATE
13 Apr 2012
5) Visually inspect the mud pump drive assembly for any unusual conditions, i.e. loose bolts,
vibration, noise, etc.
6) Check the performance of the supercharging system:
Pump A/C motor operating properly.

Valves open for the proper volume of drilling fluid.
Gauges/controls functioning properly.
7) Check the relief valve:
Check the valve for proper relief setting. The valve should be set 10% above the
pressure rating for the liner size being used.
Refer to the nameplates on each side of the pump or the pump datasheet to obtain the
operating pressure for that particular size liner.
PAGE
EDN-1688
8 of
12
ENGINEERING
SUBJECT

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP
PREPARED BY
B. Schumer
DATE
12 Apr 2012
APPROVED
REVISED DATE
REV.
GDH
CHECKED BY
02
DATE
Bryce Brock
13 Apr 2012
B. COMMISSIONING OPERATIONAL TEST:

DURATION: EIGHT (8) HOURS TOTAL RUNNING TIME.
The following are basic guidelines for conducting of an eight (8) hour operational test. The pump was
test run under pressure in the manufacturing plant but with different motors and drives.
The discharge pressure can be regulated by temporarily installing an adjustable choke at some point in
the discharge line.
NOTE: There can be short intervals of shut-down time to fix leaks, make adjustments, etc., without
having to restart the test program.
1. LOWER PRESSURE TEST DURATION: TWO (2) HOURS:
TIME
START
STOP
0-500 PSI (0.34-34.5 bar)40 min. @ 40 SPM
_______
_______
500-700 PSI (34.5-48.2 bar)40 min. @ 50 SPM
_______
_______
1000 PSI (68.9 bar)..40 min. @ 60 SPM
_______
_______
2. MEDIUM/HIGH PRESSURE TEST DURATION: SIX (6) HOURS:

1500 PSI (103.4 bar)60 min. @ 80 SPM
_______
_______
2000 PSI (138 bar)...60 min. @ 100 SPM
_______
_______
2500 PSI (172.4 bar)60 min. @ 100 SPM
_______
_______
RATED LINER PRESSURE*...180 min. @ 100 SPM

* Not to exceed pressure rating of fluid end.
_______
_______
PAGE
EDN-1688
9 of
12
ENGINEERING
SUBJECT
APPROVED

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP
PREPARED BY
DATE
B. Schumer
12 Apr 2012
REVISED DATE
GDH
CHECKED BY
REV.
02
DATE
Bryce Brock
13 Apr 2012
C. INSPECTIONS/CHECK-OFFS DURING TEST PROGRAM:

The overall performance of the unitized pump package should be continuously monitored during the
eight hour test program. The following checks should be made and recorded each two hours of
operation.
START
2 HR 4 HR 6 HR 8 HR
1. POWER END LUBRICATION:
PRESSURE..
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
TEMPERATURE.
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
2. LINER WASH SYSTEM:
MOTOR AMPS
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
REGULATING VALVE ADJUST ______
_____ _____ _____ _____
INLET TEMPERATURE.
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
OUTLET TEMPERATURE.
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
3. MAIN DRIVE MOTOR NO. 1:
COOLING AIR TEMP
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
BEARING TEMP
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
BLOWER AIRFLOW.
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
MOTOR AMPS
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
o VOLTS.
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
LOAD SHARE (YES/NO)..
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
ENGINEERING
SUBJECT
DATE
B. Schumer
12 Apr 2012
PAGE
EDN-1688
10 of
12
APPROVED

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP
PREPARED BY
REVISED DATE
GDH
CHECKED BY
02
DATE
Bryce Brock
13 Apr 2012
START
2 HR 4 HR 6 HR 8 HR
4. MAIN DRIVE MOTOR NO. 2:
COOLING AIR TEMP
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
BEARING TEMP
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
BLOWER AIRFLOW.
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
MOTOR AMPS
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
o VOLTS.
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
LOAD SHARE (YES/NO)..
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
REV.
5. LINER/PISTONS (Yes/No):
INDICATIONS OF SCORING..
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
ABNORMAL BREATHING..
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
LINER TEMPERATURE...
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
6. SUPERCHARGING SYSTEM:
MOTOR AMPS
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
SUCTION MANIFOLD PRESS.
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
ENGINEERING
SUBJECT
DATE
B. Schumer
12 Apr 2012
EDN-1688
11 of
12
REVISED DATE
GDH
CHECKED BY
REV.
02
DATE
Bryce Brock
START
PAGE
APPROVED

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP
PREPARED BY
13 Apr 2012
2 HR 4 HR 6 HR 8 HR
7. OVERALL VISUAL EXAMINATION (Yes/No):
OIL LEAKS.
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
GUARDS DRAGGING..
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
LOOSE BOLTS...
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
LOOSE/LEAK OIL LINE..
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
COOLANT LEAKS....
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
8. OTHER:
___________________________
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
___________________________
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
___________________________
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
___________________________
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
___________________________
______
_____ _____ _____ _____
Comments:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
PAGE
EDN-1688
12 of
12
ENGINEERING
SUBJECT

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP
PREPARED BY
DATE
B. Schumer
APPROVED
GDH
CHECKED BY
12 Apr 2012
REVISED DATE
02
DATE
Bryce Brock
13 Apr 2012
COMMISSIONING ACCEPTANCE:
Date Complete:
________________________________
Client _______________________ ______________________

Name
Signature
_____________________
Title
Class _______________________ ______________________ _____________________

Name
Signature
Owner _______________________ ______________________

Name
Signature
National______________________ ______________________
Oilwell Name
Signature
Varco
REV.
Title
_____________________
Title
_____________________
Title
Operation Manual
Triplex Mud Pump
For Models:
FD-500, FD-800, FD-1000 & FD-1600
REFERENCE
RIG/PLANT
ADDITIONAL CODE
SDRL CODE
TOTAL PGS
REMARKS
MAIN TAG NUMBER
DISCIPLINE
CLIENT PO NUMBER
Triplex Mud Pump

which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is loaned for limited
purposes only and remains the property of National Oilwell Varco.
Reproduction, in whole or in part; or use of this design or
express written consent of National Oilwell Varco. This document is
to be returned to National Oilwell Varco upon request and in any
event upon completion of the use for which it was loaned.

1530 W Sam Houston Pkwy. N
Houston, TX 77043
Phone 713-935-8000
Fax 713-935-8382
DOCUMENT NUMBER
REV
EPL-1911
01
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
2
REVISION HISTORY
01
15.08.2006
Rev
Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
New Manual
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision
Change Description
www.nov.com
Reason for issue
TMH
TMH
KS
Prepared
Checked
Approved
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
3
PREFACE
This manual is provided for guidance of those who wish to install, repair, maintain, or adjust the
National Oilwell Varco equipment covered herein. This information has been prepared with a
basic viewpoint to give accurate and concise data needed to perform minor adjustments as well
as major overhauls.
This information is not elementary, as it is intended for operators and servicemen who are familiar
with drilling equipment in general. It is not intended, nor would it be possible in such limited
space, to cover every possible condition which may be encountered. Always use good, sound
mechanical practices and safety precautions.
All specifications are in accordance with Engineering designs and should be adhered to in all
repairs. Operation and maintenance information on equipment other than National Oilwell Varcos
is taken in part from the various manufacturers manuals. If the equipment manufacturers issue
later instructions, or in the event of conflict, the manufacturers information will take precedence
over that shown in this manual, unless specifically stated otherwise.
Refer to the General Lubrication Bulletin for approved lubricants. If any discrepancy exists
between the recommendations in this manual and the General Lubrication Bulletin, those in the
Lubrication Bulletin will take precedence.
The manual sections follow logical divisions in major components, and cover all standard
production unless otherwise specified. Specifications and components covered are for standard
equipment current at the time this manual was approved for printing.
National Oilwell Varco reserves the right to discontinue models at any time, or change
specifications or design of any model without notice and without incurring any obligation.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
4
IN ORDER TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY during performance of any maintenance

or inspection procedures, this equipment must be shut down and not operating. Each
motor and generator is equipped with a motor cutout switch. This switch should be IN,
and the safety bar in place, when any maintenance or inspection procedures are
performed. Employ good mechanical practices when making maintenance repairs,
adjustments, inspections, etc.
When operating all mechanical and electrical equipment, all safety devices must be
engaged, properly adjusted, and in good operating condition, including overtravel devices
for traveling blocks, warning or shutdown devices for engines, etc.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE.................................................................................................................................... 3
1
INSTALLATION OF NEW PUMP ................................................................................... 11
SETTING THE PUMP ..................................................................................................... 11

2.1
SUCTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS........................................................................... 16

3.1
Caution ................................................................................................................. 16
PREPARATION OF POWER END ................................................................................. 17

4.1
Power End Lubrication.......................................................................................... 17
4.2
Installation of Crosshead Extension Rods and Diaphragm Stuffing Box Seals..... 18
PISTON AND LINER COOLING SYSTEM ..................................................................... 19

5.1
Stationary spray (View A, Fig. 6) .......................................................................... 20
5.2
Moving Nozzle ...................................................................................................... 20
ASSEMBLY OF FLUID END PARTS ............................................................................. 23

6.1
Land Installations.................................................................................................. 11
Valves and Seats.................................................................................................. 23
FD-500, FD-800 & FD-1000............................................................................................ 24

7.1
Liners.................................................................................................................... 25
7.2
Piston Rod ............................................................................................................ 25
7.3
Piston Rod Clamps ............................................................................................... 25
7.4
Liner Cage and Lower Valve Guide ...................................................................... 26
7.5
Cylinder head ....................................................................................................... 26
7.6
Discharge Valve Pot Covers ................................................................................. 26
FD-1600 .......................................................................................................................... 27
8.1
Liner...................................................................................................................... 28
8.2
Piston Rod ............................................................................................................ 28
8.3
Piston Rod Clamps ............................................................................................... 29
8.4
Lower Valve Guide and Cylinder Head................................................................. 29
8.5
Discharge Valve Pot Covers ................................................................................. 29
8.6
Discharge Manifold all models .............................................................................. 30
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
6
8.7
Suction Flange...................................................................................................... 30
8.8
Accessory Manifold............................................................................................... 30
LUBRICATION ............................................................................................................... 31
9.1
Minimum Operating Speeds ................................................................................. 32
9.2
Controlled Flow Splash System ............................................................................ 33
9.3
Total Pressure lubrication System ........................................................................ 34
10
MAINTENANCE OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM ...................................................... 36
11
MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 38
12
11.1
Power End ............................................................................................................ 38
11.2
Roller Bearings ..................................................................................................... 39
11.3
Pinion Shaft Assembly.......................................................................................... 41
11.4
Crankshaft Assembly (Fig. 16) ............................................................................ 42
11.5
Installing Crankshaft Assembly in Frame.............................................................. 46
11.6
Installation of Crosshead Guides .......................................................................... 48
11.7
Installation of Crossheads .................................................................................... 49
11.8
Checking crosshead alignment............................................................................. 51
FLUID END MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................... 51

12.1
Fluid Cylinder Blocks ............................................................................................ 52
12.2
Suction Manifold ................................................................................................... 53
12.3
Discharge Manifold ............................................................................................... 53
12.4
Cylinder Head Thread Ring .................................................................................. 54
12.5
Welding and Repairs ............................................................................................ 54
12.6
Welding Procedures ............................................................................................ 58
12.7
Repairs to Valve Pot Cover Bore .......................................................................... 59
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
www.nov.com
EPL- 1911
01
7
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
8
Allow sufficient clearance for removal of these parts.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
9
General Dimensions
FD-500
(mm)
FD-800
( mm )
FD-1000
( mm )
FD-1600
( mm )
3-11-3/8
(1203)
4-8-7/8
(1445)
4-10-5/8
(1489)
5-0-5/8
(1540)
---
---
---
--
----
--
5-7-13/16
(1722)
3-2-15/16
(989)
3-4-1/2
(1029)
3-8-3/8
(1127)
4-0-1/8
(1222)
3-11-3/16
(1198)
---
--
----
--
4-8-1/16
(1424)
12-1/16
(305)
12-7/16
( 316 )
13-3/4
( 349 )
13-3/16
( 335 )
3-1
(939)
---
--
----
--
4-3-3/4
(1315)
3-8-1/2
(1197)
3-11-1/8
(1197)
4-5-1/2
(1359)
4-11-3/4
(1518)
4-9
(1448)
5-1-3/4
(1568)
8-0
92438)
7-10
(2388)
6-9-7/8
(2079)
7-11-3/8
(2423)
8-4-1/4
(2546)
8-11-7/8
(2740)
---
---
4-6-1/4
(1378)
4-6-7/8
(1394)
4-10-1/4
(1480)
5.5
(139)
7.00
(177.8)
7.750
(196.85)
8.500
(215.90)
2 x 1
(50.8 x 25.4)
2 x 1
(50.8 x 25.4)
** K
L (Dia.)
(Keyway) 1-1/4 x 5/8 (31.7 x 15.8) 1-3/4 x 7/8 (44.45 x 22.225)

M
3-11
(1193)
4-3-3/8
(1305)
4-9-3/8
(1457)
5-5-3/4
(1670)
5-0-3/4
(1543)
5-5-1/4
(1657)
5-11-1/8
(1807)
6-10
(2083)
4-3-3/8
(1305)
4-6
(1372)
5-1
(1549)
6-1-3/8
(1864)
12-0
(3658)
13-0
(3962)
13-6
(4115)
16
(4877)
1-3-5/16
(389)
1-3-5/8
( 397 )
1-6-7/8
( 479 )
1-9-3/4
( 553 )
10
(254)
10
( 254 )
12
( 305 )
12-1/4
( 311 )
---
---
1-1
( 330 )
1-1
( 330 )
1-4-1/2
( 419 )
---
---
2-0-1/2
( 622 )
1-2-3/8
( 365 )
1-1-3/4
( 349 )
3-0-3/4
(933)
3-1-1/2
( 953 )
2-2-3/8
( 670 )
2-6-1/4
( 768 )
9-3/4
(250)
10-3/4
( 273 )
10-3/4
( 273 )
12-9/16
( 319 )
1-4-7/8
(422)
---
--
----
--
1-7-1/4
( 489 )
**Required to remove Suction Desurger.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
10
Specifications
FD-500
FD-800
FD-1000
FD-1600
Max. Liner Size 6-3/4 (171.45 mm)

and stroke
7-1/2 (191 mm)
6-3/4 (171.45 mm) 6-3/4 (171.45 mm) 7-1/2 (190.5 mm)

9
(228.6 mm) 10
(254
mm) 12
(304.8 mm)
Nominal HP
Rating
800 HP
@ 150 SPM
Type Gear
Lubrication
500 HP
@ 165 SPM
Herringbone
4.31:1
Herringbone
4.31:1
1000 HP
@ 140 SPM
Herringbone
4.31:1
1600 HP
@ 120 SPM
Double Helical
4.31:1
Pressure and Splash to all Moving Parts
Valve Pots
API No. 6
API No. 6
API No. 6
API No. 7
Approx. Wt.
(Lbs.)
18,657 (8,463 kg)
26,603 (12,067 kg)
33,770 (15,318 kg)
46,820 (21,238 kg)
*FD Max. liner size 7 (177.8 mm)
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
11
INSTALLATION OF NEW PUMP

Your National Oilwell Varco pump has been completely assembled and test operated under
pressure before being shipped to the field. Unless otherwise instructed, the lubrication is
drained from the power end and the expendable parts are removed from the fluid end.
Before putting the pump into service, the following precautions and operations must be
performed or checked.
In order to prevent personal injury during the performance of any maintenance or
inspection procedures, this equipment MUST BE SHUT DOWN AND NOT OPERATING,
and all safety devices on prime movers, drives, etc., MUST BE IN THE SAFE POSITION.
SETTING THE PUMP

The skids under the National Oilwell Varco pumps are suitable for most any type of
installation. It should be noted, however, that the box type construction of the power frame
has high resistance to bending but relatively less resistance against twist. Therefore, the
support under the pump must be level and adequate to support the weight and operating
forces exerted by the pump.
2.1
Land Installations
In land installations, a mat of 3 X 12 (76.20 mm x 304.8 mm) boards laid side crosswise to
the pump skids for the entire length, or at a minimum, at the points indicated in Fig. 2, is
usually sufficient. The boards should be a few feet wider than the width of the pump skid
runners. Wet or marshy locations may require a more stable foundation.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
12
Fig. 2
Suitable means, such as National Oilwell Varco pump spacers as shown in Fig. 3, should
be used to keep the pump anchored and the drive in alignment. National Oilwell Varco
mud pump spacers provide 8-1/2 (215.9mm) adjustment. Any desired length may be
obtained by lengthening the standard pipe spacer, which is made of 3 (76.20mm) extra
strong pipe.
Three types of attaching heads are available with this spacer:
1. The chain type to fit pipe.

2. The hinged flange type for
attachment to flat surfaces.
3. Any combination of the two.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
13
2.1.1 Permanent Installations

On permanent installations such as barge, platform, structural base, or concrete slab,
where pump skids are bolted down, it is essential that the skids be properly shimmed to
prevent possibility of twisting or distorting the power frame. The pump skids must sit solid
on all shim points with bolts loose.
On barge installations, the pump
skids are generally bolted down to
T-beams running parallel and in line
with the pump skids. Install shims at
points shown in Figs. 2 and 4 and
observe caution of proper shimming
to prevent twist or distortion.
The shims on all installations should
extend the full width of the skid
beam flanges and have a minimum
length of 12 (305mm).
On installations where the power unit or electric motor is mounted integrally with the pump
skids, the preferred installation would be to set the pump package on the T-beam skids and
provide retention blocks rather than bolts to hold it in place. This will allow the pump to
float and minimize the transfer of barge deck or platform distortion into the frame.
2.1.2 Installation of the Drive
The drive between the mud pumps and the power source, whether V-belts or multi-width
chains, should be installed with the greatest care to assure maximum operating life with
minimum of unexpected or undesirable shutdowns due to drive failures.
When installing the drive sheave or sprocket, make sure all grease or rust preventative is
removed from the shaft and the bore of the drive. Remove all burrs or rough spots from the
shaft, key, and keyway. Fit key to the keyways in both the shaft and drive and install key
into shaft keyway.
Coat pinion shaft with a light coating of anti-seize compound or light oil and install the drive
sheave or sprocket hub. Tighten hub bolts as indicated below:
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
14
When a wrench or length of pipe is used to increase leverage in tightening draw-up bolts, it
is imperative to adhere to the wrench torque values given in the chart below. This
adherence is important, because in mounting the hub, the tightening force on the bolts is
multiplied many times by the wedging action of the tapered surface. This action
compresses the hub for a snug fit on the shaft. If the bolt tightening forces are extreme,
bursting pressure is created in the hub of the mounted pulley; this pressure may cause the
pulley to crack. The hub bolts should always be tightened alternately and progressively.
QD
Wrench Torque
Wrench Length
Wrench Pull
Hub
Ft. Lb.
Inches
Lbs.
FD-500
540 (62 meter kg)
30 (.76 meters)
180 (82 kg)
FD-800
600 (83 meter kg)
36 (.90 meters)
200 (92.2 kg)
FD-1000
600 (83 meter kg)
36 (.90 meters)
200 (92.2 kg)
FD-1600
600 (83 meter kg)
36 (.90 meters)
200 (92.2 kg)
2.1.2.1 V-Belt Drives

a.
Check sheave groove condition.
Before installing the V-belts, check sheave grooves for wear. Worn or rounded
grooves will destroy V-belts rapidly. The side walls must be straight. Sheave
grooves must be free of dirt, rust or other extrusions which could damage the Vbelts.
b.
Check sheave alignment.

The final alignment of the V-belt sheaves should be checked after the V-belts have
been installed and adjusted to their operating tension. If the sides of the sheaves
are of equal distance from the centerline of the groove, check alignment by
stretching TWO strings (fish line or piano wire preferred) along one side of the two
sheaves, one above and one below the centerline, and moving one of the sheaves
until the strings touch four points on the side of the sheave rims. This will determine
that the centerline of the drives are parallel and the faces of the sheaves are square.
c.
Adjust V-belts for proper tension.

Adjust the belt tension by moving the sheaves apart until all of the sag has just been
eliminated from the tight side of the belt and some of the belts on the slack side.
Then increase the centers approximately (13mm) for each 100 (2540 mm)
center distance. Example: On 150 (3810 mm) center, move pump an additional
(19.5 mm).
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
15
DO NOT OBTAIN BELT TENSION BY PICKING UP END OF PUMP AND

ALLOWING BELTS TO TIGHTEN UNDER WEIGHT OF PUMP AS END IS
BEING LOWERED TO THE GROUND.
2.1.2.2 Chain Drives
a.
Installation
Proper installation and maintenance of the sprocket and chain drives are essential if
good service life is to be obtained. Since many factors, such as chain width, center
distances, speeds, and loads must be considered when determining the allowable
tolerance for sprocket alignment, no good rule of thumb can be applied. The chain
alignment must simply be held as nearly perfect as possible. A more precise
alignment can be made by stretching two steel wires (piano wire) along one face of
the two sprockets, one above and one below the centerline, and moving one of the
sprockets until the wires touch at four points. This will determine that the centerlines
of the drives are parallel and the faces of the sprockets are square.
b.
Drive chain lubrication

The pump drive chain lubrication system on the majority of National Oilwell Varco
pumps is an independent system having its own oil pump, reservoir, and drive. Fill
chain case to the indicated level with a non-detergent oil as follows:
Ambient temperature above 32F (0C) SAE-30
Ambient temperature below 32F (0C) SAE-20
For temperatures below 0F, consult a reputable lubrication dealer for
recommendations.
REFER TO GENERAL LUBRICATION BULLETIN for approved lubricants and
additional specifications. If any discrepancy exists between the recommendations in
this manual and the General Lubrication Bullletin, those in the Lubrication Bulletin
will take precedence.
Since this is an independent system, it will require the same maintenance or service
attention employed on any other piece of machinery, including:
- Daily check of oil level.
- Daily check on condition of oil.
- Frequent check on oil pressure. (5-15 psi) (.352 - 1.06 kg/cm)
- Volume of oil being applied to chain.
- Condition of nozzles in spray tube.
- Condition of oil pump drive (V-belts or chain)
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
16
NOTE: Oil pressure may be adjusted with the pressure relief adjusting screw
on the rear of the pump housing. Pressure drops may also indicate
suction and discharge filter screens need cleaning.
3
SUCTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Individual installation conditions will dictate the design of the suction system. The suction
of the FD-series pumps must have a positive head (pressure) for satisfactory performance.
The optimum suction manifold pressure is 20-30 psi (1.75-2 kg/cm) for maximum
volumetric efficiency and expendable parts life. This head pressure is best supplied by a 5
x 6 centrifugal pump with 40 h.p. 1150 rpm electric motor. This type of drive requires a
device to automatically start and stop the centrifugal pump motor simultaneously with the
triplex pump. On DC electric powered rigs a signal can usually be supplied from the DC
control panel to energize a magnetic starter when the mud pump clutch air line will provide
a set of contacts for energizing the magnetic starter when clutch is engaged.
The charging pump can also be belt driven from the triplex pinion shaft charging type of
drive is not as efficient at slow speeds with viscous fluids.
Under some conditions the FD-Series pumps may be operated without a charging pump,
provided the fluid level in mud pits is higher than the top of the liners, fluid being pumped is
low viscosity and suction line must be short, straight and of at least the same diameter as
suction manifold inlet.
The suction lines should be piped with valve arrangements so the charging pump can be
by-passed so operation can be continued in event of charging pump failure or for
maintenance. Operation without a charging pump can be improved by replacing the
suction valve springs with a weaker spring.
Suction desurgers are a very effective aid for complete filling of the liners and dampening
pulsations in the suction line which results in a smoother flow in the discharge line. If your
pump is equipped with a suction desurger it must be pre-charged with compressed air
before operations are begun. See suction desurger manual for charging instructions.
3.1
Caution
Do not pipe the return line from the shear relief valve back into the suction system as a
relief valve operation will cause a sudden pressure rise in the system vastly greater than
the system pressure ratings, resulting in damage to manifold, suction desurger and
centrifugal pump.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
17
PREPARATION OF POWER END

Your National Oilwell Varco pump has been completely assembled and test operated
before being shipped to the field. Unless otherwise instructed, the lubrication is drained
from the power end, and the expendables are removed from the fluid end for storage
protection. Before operating the pump, the following must be performed or checked:
4.1
Power End Lubrication

Before installing lubricant, open inspection door in cover and check oil reservoir for
possible accumulation of condensation, etc., and drain and flush by removing the pipe
plugs on each side of the pump.
Add the proper type and quantity of lubrication in the power end. Refer to the Lubrication
Section of this manual, or lubrication plate on pump frame for type and quantity required.
Recheck oil level after pump has operated for a period of 15 minutes. Shut pump down
and allow approximately five minutes for the oil level to equalize. Check at oil level gauge,
Item 1, Fig. 1. It is usually necessary for a few more gallons of oil to be added due to a
certain amount being retained in the crosshead area and frame cavities.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
4.2
EPL- 1911
01
18
Installation of Crosshead Extension Rods and Diaphragm Stuffing Box Seals.
With reference to Figure 5, remove the diaphragm stuffing box and plate (1) and rotate
pump so that crosshead is at the front of the stroke. Thoroughly clean the front of the
crosshead and the face of the crosshead extension rod. Insert alignment boss on
crosshead extension rod into the crosshead bore and tighten the retainer bolts (2) to the
following torque. Safety wire bolt heads.
FD-500
50-60 ft. lbs. (7-8 meter kgs)
FD-800 80-100 ft. lbs. (11-14mkgs.)
FD-1000 350-370 ft. lbs. (48-51 meter kgs) FD-1600 350-370 ft. lbs. (48-51mkgs.)
Thoroughly clean face of power frame and diaphragm stuffing box plate at Position A.
Install gasket (3) and capscrews (10). Tighten capscrews as follows:
FD-500 12-14 ft. lbs.
(1.7 - 1.9 meter kgs)
www.nov.com
FD-800
12-18 ft. lbs.
(1.7 - 2.5 meter kgs)
FD-1000 12-18 ft. lbs.
(1.7 - 2.5 meter kgs)
FD-1600 90-120 ft. lbs.

(12 - 17 meter kgs)
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
19
Clean bore and face of diaphragm stuffing box plate. Clean OD and flange of
diaphragm stuffing box. Coat OD of diaphragm stuffing box with light oil and install Oring seal (4). Insert diaphragm stuffing box in plate bore and tighten capscrews to the
following torque:
FD-500 12-14 ft. lbs.
(1.7 - 1.9 meter kgs)
FD-800
12-18 ft. lbs.
(1.7 - 2.5 meter kgs)
FD-1000 12-18 ft. lbs.
(1.7 - 2.5 meter kgs).
FD-1600 90-120 ft. lbs.

(12 - 17 meter kgs)
The diaphragm stuffing box packing assembly consists of a single lip oil seal (6), a
double lip wiper seal (11), a separator spring (7), an O-ring (8), and a lock spring (9).
Install the assembly as follows:
a. Remove pressure spring (5) from single lip oil seal (6) and place seal in the inner
(power end) position on the crosshead extension rod, with lip toward power end.
Replace the pressure spring in the seal lip and slide the seal into position in the
stuffing box. SEE NOTE BELOW.
b. Insert the separator spring (7) over rod and slide it into stuffing box bore.
c. Install the O-ring (8) in groove in stuffing box bore.
d. Remove pressure spring (5) from double lip oil seal (11) and place seal in the
outer position on the crosshead extension rod with main lip toward power end.
Replace the pressure spring in the seal lip and slide the seal into position in the
stuffing box. SEE NOTE BELOW.
CAUTION:
The double lip seal can be used in the inner, or power end, position to
replace the single lip seal, but DO NOT use the single lip seal in the
outer position.
e. Install the lock spring (9).

NOTE: CAUTION must be taken to assure the pressure spring (5) does not slip out
of the groove in the oil seal lip, as severe scoring of the crosshead
extension rod can occur. Coat extension rod with a light oil to facilitate
installation of the packing assembly.
5
PISTON AND LINER COOLING SYSTEM

Proper attention must be paid at all times to assure adequate cooling fluid is being applied
to the piston and liner assembly. Stoppage of the cooling fluid will result in almost instant
failure of the piston rubbers and possibly extensive damage to the liner bore.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
20
Two types of piston and liner cooling systems have been used on National Oilwell Varco
FD-Series Pumps -- the stationary spray type and a moving nozzle type. Ref. Fig. 6. The
manifold (1) for supplying cooling fluid to the piston and liner assemblies is identical on both
systems. Cooling fluid from either a remote source such as a water line, or from a pump
and reservoir system unitized on the pump skids (Ref. Fig. 7) must be piped into the
manifold at the connection located in the pump frame under the crosshead extension rod
section.
CAUTION:
The supply line from a remote system should be equipped with a

strainer to prevent stoppage of the spray nozzles. Water should be
cool and free of abrasive solids. Clean strainer screen or trap once
each day, or as required.
The two types of cooling systems are outlined below:

5.1
Stationary spray (View A, Fig. 6)

The stationary spray cooling system consists of a spray nozzle (2) mounted on a liner
end cover plate (3), which applies cooling fluid in the form of a spray to the piston and
liner area. Adjust cooling water supply to the manifold so that a spray approximately
*12 long is being discharged from each spray nozzle. Inspect spray nozzle operation
VERY OFTEN, making sure the nozzle is pointed directly at the piston.
*(304.8mm)
5.2
Moving Nozzle
The moving nozzle system consists of a spray tube (4) mounted on the extension rod
clamp (5), which applies cooling fluid directly to the back face of the piston. The end of
the spray tube is positioned approximately 1 from the back face of the piston, which
causes the cooling fluid to be deflected so that it constantly floods the piston liner area
throughout the full stroke length.
Inspect spray tube very often to assure that ample cooling fluid is being supplied. At
routine intervals, check condition of the hose (6) which connects the spray tube to the
manifold. This hose travels back and forth with the piston rod assembly, therefore must
be installed so that its movement is not restricted.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
21
See sections 5.1 and 5.2 for call out numbers descriptions shown in figure 6.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
22
A typical rod cooling assembly consisting of fluid pump driven from pinion shaft and fluid
reservoir mounted in the skids is shown in Figure 7.
With reference to Fig. 7, maintain electric motor (1) and centrifugal pump (2) according
to manufacturers specifications. Rotation of the pump should be clockwise when
viewed from the impeller end.
Adjust regulating valve (3) to apply as much water as possible to the liners without
splashing back on the crosshead extension rods and diaphragm stuffing box plate. 10gallons per minute per liner is the preferred flow rate. If water is allowed to splash on
the crosshead extension rods, some of the water may work back into the power end to
contaminate the lubrication oil.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
23
The cooling fluid is returned from the crosshead extension rod compartment to the settling
chamber, and as the fluid overflows through the filter screen between the two sections of
the tank, the solids are allowed to settle out. The filter screen will catch much of the foreign
material floating in the fluid.
Check condition of the cooling fluid at frequent intervals and CLEAN and FLUSH reservoir
as required. Contaminated fluid will cause premature liner and piston wear from abrasion
or stoppage of the spray nozzle or spray tube.
6
ASSEMBLY OF FLUID END PARTS
6.1
Valves and Seats

Remove all three discharge valve pot covers (1), and three cylinder heads and plugs (2),
and thoroughly clean all machined surfaces in the fluid end with a good cleaning solvent.
Make sure all valve seat bores are VERY CLEAN AND DRY (free of dirt, grease, anti-rust
compound, etc.) and remove all burrs or nicks with a fine emery cloth, using circular motion
around seat surfaces.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
24
THOROUGHLY CLEAN AND DRY the valve seats and install suction and discharge valve
seats into the valve pot bores. Drive seats firmly into place with a bar and hammer.
Install valves and springs, etc., by following any special instructions that may have been
outlined by the specific valve and seat manufacturer.
Install fluid baffle (11), fig. 9 and 9B on end of crosshead extension rod.
FD-500, FD-800 & FD-1000

A cross-section through the fluid end is shown in Fig. 9. With reference to Fig.9, clean and
assemble the fluid end parts in the following manner:
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
25
7.1
Liners
Inspect liner bore again to make sure it is clean and free of foreign particles to assure metal
to metal contact between the liner and fluid end. Foreign particles can cause the liner to
make up in a cocked position resulting in premature wear on liners and pistons.
7.2
Piston Rod
Clean piston and piston rod, making sure they are free of nicks and burrs. Install O ring
seal (20) in groove in piston head. Slide piston head on rod while observing that O ring
does not fall out of groove. Tighten piston rod nut (21) to 1200-1600 ft. lbs. (166-121
m/kgs.).
Coat liner I.D. and piston O.D. with grease. Check ends of piston rod and extension rod to
be sure they are clean and free of burrs. Insert piston rod through liner holding piston rod
centered at the rear of the liner. Drive the piston into the liner with a driving tool or a piece
of hardwood and sledge hammer. Use caution as the piston rod approaches the crosshead
extension rod that the dowel on the end of the piston rod is not damaged. The piston rod
must be supported and the dowel guided into the pilot bore.
7.3
Piston Rod Clamps

The piston rod clamps are machined as one piece and then cut in half. The two pieces are
stenciled with matching numbers on each half and have a chain link connecting them
together. The two pieces with the same matching numbers should always be kept together
as a set. Install the clamp around the rod end flanges with the water connection holes at
top dead center. Tighten cap screws to the following torque values.
FD-500-368 ft. lbs.
(51 Meter/kgs.)
FD- 800-100 ft. lbs.
(14 Meter/kgs.)
FD-1000-160 ft. lbs.
(22 Meter/kgs.)
When rods and rod clamps are new a gap in excess of (13 MM) could be present
between the two halves of the clamp. This is satisfactory provided the faces of the rods are
seating metal to metal. As wear occurs, the halves will pull closer together. Clamping
action will be lost when a gap no longer exist. At this time clamps must be replaced.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
26
7.4
Liner Cage and Lower Valve Guide

Install rear liner seal (5) and push into position against liner shoulder. Slide liner cage (6)
into fluid end, align one hole in the cage with lower valve pot bore. Set lower valve guide
(8) over valve stem through lower hole in cage with the wings on the guide turned
crosswise to the pump. Press down on the guide, compressing the valve spring (7) until
the guide can be rotated turn and seat into place underneath the cage. Insert the lower
valve guide locking clip (9) through the pad eyes on the lower valve guide and rotate clip to
the right to lock the valve guide tight against the OD of the liner cage. It may sometimes be
necessary to put more or less bend in the center of the clip to make it retain the guide
tightly while the clip handle snaps into position on the right hand side.
7.5
Cylinder head
Insert the outer seal (5) in the fluid end bore against the liner cage. Slide the cylinder head
plug (10) into fluid end. Apply a liberal coat of grease to both mating thread surfaces of the
cylinder head (2). Screw cylinder head in and tighten with wrench furnished with pump and
sledge hammer.
Fluid leakage through the weep hole will indicate a defective seal or loose cylinder head.
DO NOT plug weep holes as this can result in severe damage to cylinder head threads,
thread rings, etc., in event of a liner seal failure.
7.6
Discharge Valve Pot Covers

Install discharge valve pot gasket (3) into bore, and after liberal application of grease or tool
joint compound to the gasket and thread area, tighten the discharge valve pot covers into
place, using a sledge hammer and bar.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
27
FD-1600
Figure 9B
A cross section through the fluid end is shown in fig. 9B. With reference to fig. 9B
thoroughly clean and assemble the fluid end parts in the following manner:
Note: All of the parts in this fluid end assembly are designed with metal to metal seating
to alleviate friction wear from breathing action encountered in modern high
pressure pump operation. For this reason it is essential that all parts be clean
and free of rust, nicks and burrs before being assembled.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
8.1
EPL- 1911
01
28
Liner
Install wear plate seal (1) in counterbore of fluid end. Slide wear plate (2) over studs until it
seats against fluid end. Slide liner thread ring (3) over studs with the starting thread at the
5 oclock position and tighten nuts to 470-510 ft. lbs. (65-70 m/kgs.) torque.
Note: Placing the starting thread at 5 oclock position makes engaging the liner lock
threads much easier.
Place liner seal (4) in counterbore of wear plate. Apply thin coat of grease to ID of liner
lock (5) and slide over rear of liner (6). Install two-piece liner lock ring (7) in liner groove
and O ring to hold them in position.
Slide liner handling tool over liner up against liner lock ring and tighten set screw to secure
it in place. Hoist liner assembly into position with jib hoist.
Note: FD pumps are factory equipped with jib booms and liner handling tools. If older
pumps are converted to FD fluid ends a jib boom should be added to the pump
frame as considerable weight is involved in handling the liner assembly.
Apply liberal coat of grease to liner lock threads. Align the starting thread of the liner lock
(5) to the 7 oclock position and insert the liner into the liner thread ring (3) screw liner lock
in until liner seats in position . Tighten with sledge hammer on hammer lugs.
8.2
Piston Rod
Clean piston (9) and piston rod (8), making sure they are free of nicks and burrs. Install O
ring seal (10) in groove in piston head. Slide piston head on rod while observing that O
ring does not fall out of groove. Tighten piston rod nut (11) to 1200-1600 ft. lbs. (166-121
m/kgs.).
Coat liner I.D. and piston O.D. with grease. Check ends of piston rod and extension rod to
be sure they are clean and free of burrs. Insert piston rod into liner through cylinder head
opening holding piston rod centered at the rear of the liner. Drive the piston into the liner
with a driving tool or a piece of hardwood and sledge hammer. Use caution as the piston
rod approaches the crosshead extension rod that the dowel on the end of the piston rod is
not damaged. The piston rod must be supported and the dowel guided into the pilot bore.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
8.3
EPL- 1911
01
29
Piston Rod Clamps

The piston rod clamps are machined as one piece and then sawed in half. The two pieces
are stenciled with matching numbers on each half. The two pieces with the same matching
numbers should always be kept together as a set. Install the clamp around the rod end
flanges with the water connection holes at top dead center. Tighten cap screws to the
following torque values:
FD-1600
245 ft. lbs.
(34 m/kgs.)
When rods and rod clamps are new a gap in excess of (13 mm) could be present
between the two halves of the clamp. This is satisfactory provided the faces of the rods are
seating metal to metal. As wear occurs, the halves will pull closer together. Clamping
action will be lost when a gap no longer exists. At this time clamps must be replaced.
Install splash plate on rear of liner.
8.4
Lower Valve Guide and Cylinder Head

Slide the alignment ring (12) into the cylinder head opening engaging the alignment dowel
at the 3 oclock position. Do not drive on this piece as dowel or dowel hole will be
damaged. It will slide easily into place when it is properly aligned.
Insert the lower valve guide (13) through the alignment ring and position the guide over the
valve stem. Start the lock bolt (14) and draw it down, compressing the valve spring and
seating the valve guide in the tapered slot. Tighten lock bolt to 300 to 340 ft. lbs. 41 to 47
m/kg.
Install head seal (15) on cylinder head plug (16). Coat seal and O.D. of plug with light oil.
Screw a 3 ft. (1 M) length of pipe into the threaded opening on the plug. Using the pipe to
balance the plug, slide it straight into the fluid end opening. Apply a liberal coat of grease
to the cylinder head (17) with wrench provided and sledge hammer.
Fluid leakage through the weep hole will indicate a defective seal or loose cylinder head.
DO NOT plug weep hole as this can result in severe damage to cylinder head threads,
thread rings, etc., in event of a liner seal failure.
8.5
Discharge Valve Pot Covers

Install discharge valve pot gasket (18) into bore, and after liberal application of grease or
tool joint compound to the gasket and thread area, tighten the discharge valve pot covers
(19) into place, using a sledge hammer and bar.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
8.6
EPL- 1911
01
30
Discharge Manifold all models

A 5-1500*RTJ flange connection is provided on the discharge manifold. REMOVE flange
and protect gasket area before welding (customers option) to the discharge piping.
(*127mm)
Tighten discharge flange connection bolts to *1200-1600 ft. lbs. torque. To insure uniform
make-up of the ring joint connection, tighten flange bolt nuts in a crisscross order. (*166121 meter kgs.)
If a blind flange is installed on the opposite end of the discharge manifold, check flange
bolts and tighten to same specification as noted above.
8.7
Suction Flange
The suction flange has a 12 (305mm) standard pipe thread connection and is custom
made to match the companion flange on the pump suction manifold. The flange connection
is sealed off by an O-ring seal (14 OD x 13-1/2 ID x ), (356mm OD x 343mm I.D. x
6.35mm Dia.)
NOTE: Thoroughly clean O-ring groove and face of flanges before making up connection.
Flanges must make up metal to metal to insure proper seal. Tighten flange bolts to 360490 ft. lbs. (50-68 meter kgs.) torque.
CAUTION: If suction pipe is welded to suction flange, remove O-ring prior to welding.
8.8
Accessory Manifold
Fig. 10 is not the standard
discharge arrangement on the
model FD-1600 pump, which uses
the strainer cross configuration.
An accessory manifold, Fig.10, is
available for installation on the
discharge manifold opposite the
discharge end. The manifold will
accommodate a discharge
pulsation dampener (1) and
provides two 3-6000 PSI*side
outlet connections for such items as
a pressure gauge (2) and a shear
relief valve (3).
When manifold is used, install and
maintain as follows:
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
31
The flange on the accessory manifold is a 5-1500 *RTJ. Thoroughly clean ring joint
groove, install ring (4) and tighten the flange bolts (5) to 1200 ft. lbs. torque. To assure
uniform make-up of the ring joint connection, tighten the nuts in a criss-cross order.
The shear relief valve (3) is installed on the discharge manifold for the purpose of
protecting the pump from excessively high pressure overloads.
The relief valve must be installed so that it will be directly exposed to the mud. DO NOT
PUT ANY TYPE OF SHUT OFF VALVE between the relief valve and the manifold. Pipe
the discharge side of the relief valve directly into the mud pit with as few turns in the line as
possible. IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED for the discharge side of the valve to be piped into
the suction line of the pump.
* 5 -
= 127mm
3 - 6000 PSI = two 76.2mm - 422 kg/cm

The relief valve setting should be just above the maximum pressure rating of the particular
liner size being used. CHANGE SETTINGS with each liner size change. DO NOT USE
ALLEN WRENCHES, WELDING RODS, or material other than that called for by the
manufacturer of the relief valve, as this will affect the rating of the relief valve.
The mounting for the dischage pulsation dampener (1) is a RTJ flange with R-39 ring
gasket. Before installing dampener, thoroughly clean ring groove and ring, and after setting
dampener into place, tighten the 1-1/4*nut (6) to 750 ft.lbs*. torque. To insure uniform
make-up, tighten nuts in a criss-cross order.
Precharge dampener before starting up pump. Precharge pressure should not be more
than 2/3 of the pump discharge pressure, or a maximum of 650 PSI. (46 kg/cm)
CAUTION: USE ONLY COMPRESSED NITROGEN OR AIR. DO NOT CHARGE WITH
OXYGEN.
* 1-1/4 = 32mm
750 ft. lbs. = 104 meter kgs
9
LUBRICATION
Proper lubrication of the moving parts in any piece of machinery is the most important
single factor affecting its ultimate life. To obtain maximum trouble-free service life from the
power end of the National Oilwell Varco pump, it is necessary to perform routine
maintenance care and inspections to insure the proper amount of CLEAN lubricant is being
provided.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
32
The FD-Series pumps utilize the controlled flow oil bath splash and pressure system to
lubricate the entire power end. The type of pressure system provided in each individual
pump will govern the minimum SPM at which the pump can be operated, i.e. pumps which
have pressure lubrication only to the main and pinion bearings, have a minimum rated
speed of 40 SPM. Pumps in which pressure lubrication is provided to the main, pinion, and
crosshead bearings and crosshead compartments may be operated at a minimum speed of
25 SPM, provided there is a minimum of 5 PSI oil pressure. (352 grams/cm)
9.1
Minimum Operating Speeds

The minimum speed for all pumps is 40 SPM.
CAUTION: The pressure lubricating system can be provided with an externally mounted oil
pump driven through V-belts or electric AC motor; or an internally mounted oil pump driven
from the main gear. When an internally mounted oil pump is used, the direction of rotation
of the pinion shaft must be as shown in Fig. 11.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
9.2
EPL- 1911
01
33
Controlled Flow Splash System

The controlled flow splash lubrication system is the same for all FD-Series pumps,
regardless of the type of oil pump drive provided for the pressure system. In the controlled
flow splash system, the main gear picks oil up from the reservoir, and when the teeth mesh
with the pinion, the oil is displaced into various troughs and compartments in the frame.
With reference to Figure 13, the oil thrown into trough (7) is directed through the oil tube (8)
to the two pinion bearings.
Oil passage from the top of the crosshead guide compartment to the crosshead bearing is
shown in Figure 12. Oil accumulates in the compartment over the crossheads. The oil
runs through the nipple (6) into the crosshead retainer to the oil passages (5) and on to the
crosshead pin bearing. As noted, the duplicate set of passageways (5) in the crosshead
pin permits the crosshead pins to be rotated without having to give attention to hole
alignment. This permits the installation of crosshead pins from either direction.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
9.3
EPL- 1911
01
34
Total Pressure lubrication System

The total pressure lubrication system, incorporating the internally mounted oil pump for the
FD-series pumps, is shown in Figure 13.
In this system, filtered oil is supplied to the pump through the suction filter (1) and is
discharged from the pump into the manifold block (2). Oil is distributed from the manifold
block to the pinion shaft bearing oil line (3) and spray nozzle (3A); and to the main bearing
oil line (4) and the crosshead compartment manifold block (4A) located above the
crosshead compartment. The crosshead compartment manifold block (4A) distributes oil to
the crosshead, crosshead bearings, and extension rods. Pumps which do not have the
crosshead compartment manifold block (4A) do not have the total pressure lubrication
system, and therefore have a minimum rated speed of 40 SPM.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
35
A pressure gauge (5) is mounted on the back wall of the frame to show oil pressure being
maintained in the manifold block. The oil pressure will, of course, vary with the speed of
the main pump, however if a sudden pressure drop or increase occurs, refer to the section
on maintenance of lubrication system for possible cause.
A pressure relief valve (6) is mounted to the manifold block to keep excess pressure form
damaging oil pump and drive. The relief valve is preset at 40 PSI and must not be
tampered with.
NOTE: If specified, the oil pump for the pressure lubrication system can be independently
powered by an electric motor or some other type of prime mover. When the
independently driven oil pump is used, some type of alarm device or power
interlock must be installed to assure the oil pump is operating when the main pump
is put into service.
When installing the internally mounted oil pump (9, Fig. 13), position pump so that the back
face of the drive gear is flush and parallel with the edge of the main gear, and gear teeth
have*.010-.015 backlash. Remove inspection plate on power end cover for access to the
internally mounted oil pump and filter screen. (* .25 - .38mm)
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
36
A typical layout for the pinion shaft driven oil pump is shown in Fig. 14. The oil pump (1) is
piped into the oil system through the suction and pressure connections on the bottom
inside wall of the power frame. Ref. Item 10, Fig. 13. The V-belt drive (2) is adjusted by
moving pump up or down on the mounting bracket.
Adjust the V-belt drive (2) to a point where the two halves of the belt can almost be
pinched together between the thumb and fingers at the center of the drive.
Overtightening can cause premature failure of the pump.
When link type belting is used, caution should be exercised in predetermining belt
elongation. Link type belting in A, B and C widths will elongate approximately 1 per foot
(25mm per 305mm). When installing a drive, subtract 1 per foot from actual required
length (132 required - install 121) and stretch to fit. (Subtract 25mm/305mm)
To prevent possible injury, always install guard (3, Fig. 14) over V-belts before putting
pump into service.
10
MAINTENANCE OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM

Adequate lubrication of the moving parts is, as stated, the most important single factor
affecting the ultimate service life of the pump. CARE AND MAINTENANCE of the system
is the sole responsibility of the operator or crew to which it has been assigned, and the
extent to which this is applied will determine the amount of trouble-free service life that will
be obtained.
The lubricant recommendations shown below, on the name plate on the side of the pump,
or in the General Lubrication Bulletin included with this manual, are the result of extensive
field tests. Substitutions should be made only in extreme emergencies.
REFER TO GENERAL LUBRICATION BULLETIN for approved lubricants and additional
specifications. If any discrepancy exists between the recommendations in this manual and
the General Lubrication Bulletin, those in the Lubrication Bulletin will take precedence.
Lubrication Specifications:
Use extreme pressure, non-corrosive, anti-foaming gear lubricant as follows:
Temperatures +30F to 155F (-1C to 68C) AGMA No. 6 EP
Temperatures
0F to 85F (-18C to 33C) AGMA No. 4 EP
(Consult lubrication manual)
Oil reservoir capacity:
FD-500
FD-1000
www.nov.com
65 U.S. Gal. (246 liters)

FD-800
FD-1600

Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
37
ONCE EACH TOUR, check and maintain oil level at the FULL mark on the bayonet gauge.
PUMP MUST BE SHUT DOWN and allowed to stand idle for approximately five minutes to
allow oil level to equalize.
ONCE EACH SIX MONTHS, or more often if oil becomes contaminated with abrasive
particles or corrosive compounds, drain and flush the oil reservoir and refill with new
lubricant. Oil drains are located on either side of the pump frame.
During the flushing procedure, thoroughly clean the oil troughs and the compartment in top
of the crosshead guide. Also clean or replace the filter element in the air breather cap and
clean suction screen. Remove covers from settling chamber and purge out contaminants
before adding new oil.
Routine inspection on condition of oil should be made as condensation of moisture in the
air, intrusion of mud, water or dirt, can necessitate a more frequent oil change.
A settling chamber is located in the forward area of the power end floor. Contamination in
the oil splashed into this area is allowed to settle out and should be drained out of the pump
through the clean out covers located on the frame wall underneath the crosshead
inspection doors.
Once each month, remove clean out covers on both sides of pump to drain contaminated
oil from settling chamber. Approximately 15-gallons of oil will be lost; replenish the main
reservoir to compensate for the amount drained out.
Once each week, remove one of the lower capscrews that secure the clean out cover to
the frame to drain off water condensate.
ONCE EACH TOUR, check oil level in main reservoir. Maintain at full mark on dipstick to
the manifold block. If loss of pressure occurs, check for:
- Clogged suction screen
- Low oil level
- Slipping V-belt drive
- Broken or loose connections
- Damaged or worn oil pump
- Defective Relief Valve
For an abnormal increase in oil pressure, check for:
- Plugged oil lines
- Contamination causing oil to be viscous
- Relief valve inoperative
- Defective gauge
- Other conditions
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
38
11
MAINTENANCE
11.1
Power End
Routine inspection of the power end is the most important form of preventive maintenance
and will result in considerable savings by detecting any major trouble that might be
developing and allowing the necessary repairs to be made on a planned or normal rig-down
time.
1. Check tightness of the main bearing bolts. Bolts must be tightened to the following
torque:
FD-500
FD-1000
3000 ft. lbs. (415 meter kgs.)

8800 ft. lbs. (1217 meter kgs.)
FD-800
FD-1600
6360 ft. lbs. (880mkg.)

9750 ft. lbs. (1349mkg.)
2. Safety wires Check safety wires on all bolts including the main bearing hold-down bolts, eccentric
bearing retainer bolts, and gear retainer bolts. Replace any broken wires after
retightening the bolts. Refer to crankshaft assembly section for bolt torque
requirements.
3. Oil lines Check all oil lines to insure they are intact and free of obstructions. Check oil pump
suction hose for damage or flat areas.
4. Suction filter Check condition of suction filter. Clean and replace as required.
5. Main bearing cover Remove the main bearing cover and check tightness of main bearing retainer bolts,
condition of the bearing rollers, etc. Clean and remove any sludge or foreign substance
that might have accumulated at the bottom of the bearing area.
6. Main gear and pinion teeth Inspect the condition of the main gear teeth and pinion gear teeth for any indications of
abnormal wear. During the initial break-in period there will be some pitting on the face
of the gear teeth. This is referred to as initial pitting and is not harmful to the life of the
gear. However, if routine inspection indicates the degree of pitting continues to
increase, immediately contact the local representative of the pump manufacturer for a
more thorough inspection of the gear.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
39
7. Crosshead pin bolts and crosshead guides Remove cover and check condition of the crosshead pin bolts and safety wires. (Center
crosshead pin bolts can be reached by removing back cover and placing eccentric on
outer top dead center.) Tighten crosshead bolts (Item 4, Fig.19) to the following torque:
FD-500
FD-800
90-100 ft. lbs.

140-150 ft. lbs. (11 - 12 meter kgs)
FD-1000 165-175 ft. lbs. (23 - 24 meter kgs)

FD-1600 165-175 ft. lbs. (23 - 24 meter kgs)
DO NOT EXCEED THESE VALUES. USE TORQUE WRENCH
If the crosshead or guide shows abnormal wear or scoring, replace immediately as the
metal particles can cause damage to the bearings, etc. Excess wear can also cause
rapid wear to the piston and liners.
8. Oil and oil reservoir Check condition of the oil and cleanliness of the oil reservoir. Service oil system as
described in the Lubrication Section of this manual.
11.2
Roller Bearings
Although the basic construction of the various sizes of National Oilwell Varco pumps varies
somewhat, they all have one very important detail in common -- roller bearings. A roller
bearing is a precisely built machine within itself; therefore, careful handling is required in
order to obtain the long service life and high load carrying characteristics associated with
anti-friction bearings.
The main bearings are self-aligning spherical roller bearings. The pinion shaft is mounted
on straight roller bearings. The eccentric bearings are straight roller with thrust plates on
each side to keep the eccentric straps in line, and the crosshead pin bearings are straight
needle roller bearings.
None of the bearings require special adjustments.
All inner and outer races are assembled by means of very accurate fits. This accuracy is
necessary; therefore, if the bearings are to be used again, the inner and outer races and
the roller assemblies of each bearing must be kept together, and reinstalled exactly as they
came off.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
40
It is always necessary to completely replace any roller bearing that fails, even though only
one part of the bearing shows damage. Since the running clearances of these bearings are
extremely small, excessive clearances, worn or grooved raceways, and any pitting or
flaking of the parts is indicative of failure and the entire bearing should be changed as soon
as possible.
All roller bearings are assembled to their shafts by means of shrink fits. (Ref. bearing fit
data under each shaft assembly.) Damaged or worn bearings and raceways can be
removed by driving them off the shaft with a bar and hammer. They can be cut off the shaft
with a burning torch, but care must be taken not to burn into the shaft. Bearings should
always be heated in an oil bath, the temperature of which should not exceed 300F
(149C). Be certain that both the oil and the container are very clean. If the oil container is
in direct contact with the fire, place a rack into the container so that the bearings will not
rest on the bottom. Do not leave the bearings in the oil bath longer than three minutes.
Do not heat the bearings with a torch unless it is the only possible means available. When
it is necessary to use a torch, it should be used only by an experienced welder or
mechanic. Hold the torch at least 6 inches (150mm) away from the bearing and keep the
torch moving at all times. Heat the bearing only until it is hot to the touch. Use a Tempil
stick. DO NOT OVERHEAT THE BEARING. Overheating draws the temper of the metal
and makes the bearing soft.
Once the heated bearing is in place on the shaft, hold it in place until it cools. NEVER USE
WATER OR ANY OTHER LIQUID TO COOL A HOT BEARING. Rapid cooling will cause
the surfaces of the races and rollers to check or crack and the bearing will fail
immediately.
Never strike a roller bearing with a steel hammer. If the bearing must be driven into
position, use wood or a soft hammer and strike lightly.
Always lubricate the shaft or housing before installing the bearing. Clean white lead, or an
anti-seize compound, is the best lubricant for this purpose.
Do not remove a new bearing from the box or wrapping until it is to be installed. Protect it
from dirt and other foreign matter at all times. If a bearing must be cleaned, use clean
kerosene or other solvent.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
11.3
EPL- 1911
01
41
Pinion Shaft Assembly
Chart I
Inches
DESCRIPTION
POSITION
FD-500
FD-800
FD-1000
FD-1600
Inner Race to Shaft
T.0012-T.0022 T.0014-T.0024
T.002 -T.0042
T.0016-T.0038
Outer Race to Bore
L.0015-T.0005 L.0004-L.0024
L.0042-L.0006
L.0004-L.0040
Carrier to Frame Bore
L.003 -L.008
L.003 -L.005
L.003 -L.008
L.003 -L.008
Millimeters
Inner Race to Shaft
T.03 -T.06
T.036 -T.061
T.051 -T.107
T.041 -T.097
Outer Race to Bore
L.04 -T.01
L.010 -L.061
L.107 -L.015
L.010 -L.102
L.08 -L.21
L.076 - L.203
L.076 - L.203
L.076 -L.127
The pinion is an integral part of the shaft, leaving only the installation of the bearings and oil
seal spacer to complete the assembly.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
42
The running clearances of the bearings are predetermined by their precision fit to the shaft
and the bearing carrier. When performing maintenance or overhaul, make sure the fits
shown in Chart I are obtained.
When installing the pinion shaft assembly in the pump, observe the following precautions:
a. Insure pinion bearing carrier gasket (1) and oil seal carrier gasket (2) are in place
and in good condition.
b. The pinion bearing carrier (3) and the oil seal carrier (4) have the word TOP cast in
the face of the flange. MAKE SURE THE CARRIERS ARE INSTALLED WITH THIS
MARK AT THE TOP to correctly position oil troughs and align drain holes.
c. Remove burrs, dents or gouges from the OD of the oil seal spacer (5) before sliding
oil seal carrier (4) into place. Exercise care when sliding lip of seal over end of shaft
to prevent it from being damaged by the sharp edge of the keyway. Also pay
particular attention to insure oil seal lip IS NOT TURNED UNDER by edge of spacer
when sliding seal onto the spacer.
d. Tighten pinion bearing carrier bolts (6) to the approximate torque shown below:
FD-500 100-125 ft. lbs. (14-17 m/kgs.)
FD-1000 80-160 ft. lbs. (11-22 m/kgs.)
FD-800
FD-1600
60-100 ft. lbs. (8-14 m/kgs.)

80-160 ft. lbs. (11-22 m/kgs.)
e. Check condition of the pinion bearing inner and outer race and rollers. If there is any
indication of galling, flaking or grooving, or if diametral clearance exceeds .008.010, it is recommended the entire bearing be replaced. (.20 - .25mm)
11.4
Crankshaft Assembly (Fig. 16)

The crankshaft assembly consists of the crankshaft, eccentric ring gear, eccentric strap
with bearings, and the main bearings.
The running clearances of the bearings are predetermined by their precision fit to the shaft
and their respective bores. When performing any maintenance or overhaul, make sure the
fits shown in Chart II are obtained.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
43
Chart II
Inches
DESCRIPTION
POSI-
FD-500
FD-800
FD-1000
FD-1600
TION
Inner Race to Shaft
T.002-T.003
Outer Race to Bore
L.015 - T.0003
L.002 - .000
L.0034-T.0004
L.0038- .000
Inner Race to Shaft
T.003 -T.007
T.005 -T.007
T.005 -T.009
T.0060-T.0100
Outer Race to Bore
.000 -T.004
T.002 -T.004
.000 -T.004
.000 -T.0040
Gear to Flange
L.001 -L.005
L.001 -L.005
L.001 -L.005
L.001 -L.005
L.001 -T.005
L.002 -T.002
L.002 -T.002
L.002 -T.002
Outer Race to Bore
T.001-T.0034
T.0022-T.003
.000 -T.003
T.0008-T.004
Inner Race to Pin
.000 -T.001
T.001 -T.002
T.001 -T.003
T.001 -T.0032
www.nov.com
T.0022-T.0032 T.0024-T.0048 T.0020-T.0044
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
44
Millimeters
Inner Race to Shaft
T.043 -T.069
T.056 -T.081
T.061 -T.122
T.051 -T.112
Outer Race to Bore
L.049 - T.010
L.051 - .000
L.086 -T.010
L.096 - .000
Inner Race to Shaft
T.076 -T.173
T.127 -T.178
T.127 -T.229
T.152 -T.254
Outer Race to Bore
.000 T.102
T.127 -T.102
.000 -T.102
.000 -T.102
Gear to Flange
L.025 -L.127
L.025 -L.127
L.025 -L.127
L.025 -L.127
Carrier to Fr. Bore
L.025 -L.127
L.051 -T.051
L.051 -T.051
L.051 -T.051
Outer Race to Bore
T.025 -T.076
T.056 -T.086
.00 -T.076
T.02 -T.10
Inner Race to Pin
.000 -T.025
T.025 -T.051
T.025 -T.076
T.025 -T.081
Assemble the crankshaft in the following manner:
(Refer to Fig. 16)
a. Mount gear on flange

Thoroughly clean mating faces of ring gear and flange and bolt flange into position.
Tighten flange bolts (2) to the following torque:
FD-500 160-240 ft. lbs. (22-33 meter kgs)
FD-1000 800-1200 ft. lbs.
FD-800 800-1200 ft. lbs. (110-166 meter kgs)

FD-1600
800-1200 ft. lbs.
Set crankshaft on a set of rollers (at main bearing position) and check runout on face of
gear with a dial indicator. If total indicator runout exceeds .006, remove gear and
determine cause of misalignment. (.15mm)
NOTE: If runout on face of gear is checked while crankshaft is mounted in the pump
frame, the running clearance in main bearings will require that a simultaneous set of dial
indicator readings be taken at the end of the shaft and the face of the gear; the actual
face runout at any point being the difference between these readings.
b. Install the outer races of the eccentric bearings (13) and the outer race retainer ring (3)
in the three eccentric straps. Outer race retainer ring must be positioned so that oil
scoop is at the bottom when pump is at mid-stroke. Tighten retainer bolts (4) to the
following torque; safety wire heads.
FD-500
FD-1000
60-90 ft. lbs. (8-12 meter kgs)

90-120 ft. lbs.
FD-800
FD-1600
90-120 ft. lbs. (12-17 meter kgs.)

90-120 ft. lbs.
NOTE: The inner and outer races of the eccentric bearings are matched and must not
be intermixed.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
45
c. Install the outer race of the crosshead bearings (19) in the three eccentric straps. It is
preferred that the outer race assembly be pressed into position or frozen in dry ice or
a deep freeze until it can be inserted into the bore. Under emergency circumstances,
the outer race assembly can be installed by using a large torch and heating the eye of
the eccentric strap. DO NOT EXCEED 300F (149C) (USE Tempil-Stik) and DO NOT
USE WATER to cool the strap.
NOTE: The inner and outer races of the crosshead bearings are matched and should
not be intermixed.
d. Install the inner race of the crosshead bearing on the crosshead pin and mark according
to their respective eccentric strap positions. Remove all nicks and burrs before
shrinking race into place. Refer to bearing fit Position H, Chart II.
e. Install inner race of the center eccentric bearing on the shaft. Slide center strap into
position and install inner race clamp (5). Tighten socket head screws (8A) in clamp to
the following torque:
FD-500
FD-1000
60-90 ft. lbs.(8-12 meter kgs.)

30-60 ft. lbs.
FD-800 30-60 ft. lbs. (4-8 meter kgs.)

FD-1600
30-60 ft. lbs.
f. Install snap ring (7) in the groove on RH eccentric and shrink inner race of eccentric
bearing on shaft. After sliding the RH eccentric strap into position, install inner bearing
retainer (14).
Tighten inner race retainer bolts (8) to the following torque and safety wire:
FD-500
FD-1000

30-60 ft. lbs.

FD-1600
30-60 ft. lbs.
g. Install the LH eccentric bearing (other than for snap ring) and eccentric strap under the
same procedure outlined in step (f) above.
h. Place main bearings (9) in the main bearing carriers (10 RH and 11 LH) and install
outer race retainer (12) and retainer bolts (15). Tighten bolts to the following torque and
safety wire:
FD-500
FD-1000

30-60 ft. lbs.

FD-1600
30-60 ft. lbs.
NOTE: Even though the main bearing carriers (10 RH and 11 LH) have different
configurations on the OD, they are interchangeable and will fit into the pump frame on
either side. The purpose of the shoulders on the OD of one of the carriers is to locate
and retain the crankshaft in its respective position in the frame.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
46
i. After installing the two main bearing spacers (16), shrink main bearings (9) on each end
of the shaft. Install inner race retainers (17) and retainer bolts (18). Tighten retainer
bolts to the following torque and safety wire:
FD-500
FD-1000
11.5

30-60 ft. lbs.

FD-1600
30-60 ft. lbs.
Installing Crankshaft Assembly in Frame

In order to obtain a more precise fit between the main bearing housing and the frame bore
on F-Series pumps, the installation procedures outlined below are to be followed: (Refer to
Fig. 17)
1. Place piece of wood between eye of eccentric strap and crosshead guide (as shown in
Fig. 18) to protect guide from scoring or gouging as the straps are sliding into position.
2. Rotate the main bearing carrier so that the two flat spots (180 apart) are parallel with
the main bearing bolt holes, and slowly lower the crankshaft into position. (The flat spot
provides clearance for the main bearing bolts.)
3. After placing crankshaft in the frame, and before installing the main bearing caps, check
the rollers in the main bearings to assure that each row of rollers in each bearing is
equally loaded. Equal loading is obtained by positioning the floating bearing carrier so
that the same number of inner and outer rollers supporting the weight of the crankshaft
in each bearing are tight. Because of tolerances, etc., the total number of tight rollers
could vary slightly between individual bearings.
4. Install and shim main bearing caps to obtain .003 (.076 mm) clamp or preload on the
main bearing carrier. This preload is obtained by placing the correct amount of shims
under the main bearing cap. The required amount of shims is determined as follows:
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
47
a. Install .020 (.51 mm) shims under both ends of the main bearing cap.
b. Place a piece of lead wire (approximately 1/32 diameter) (.79mm ) or Plastigage
between OD of bearing carrier and ID of bearing cap, as near center of bearing cap
as can be determined, and tighten main bearing cap bolts to torque values shown in
Chart III.
c. Remove main bearing cap and determine clearance between bore of cap and OD of
bearing carrier by either mikeing thickness of lead or measuring compressed
dimension of Plastigage.
d. Using this dimension, calculate the required thickness of shims as follows:
Subtract thickness of compressed lead or
Plastigage from the original .020 (.51mm) shim
thickness. Then subtract .003 (.076mm) for preload.
The result is the correct shim thickness required.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
Example:
.020
.004
.016
.003
.013
Less
Less
EPL- 1911
01
48
Original shims
Lead Thickness
(0.51mm)
Less (0.102mm)
(.408mm)
Clamp Fit
Less (.076mm)
Correct Shim Thickness (.332mm)
NOTE: Machining tolerances make it necessary to determine individual shim

requirements for each (right hand and left hand) main bearing cap.
e. Install main bearing caps with the correct amount of shims as determined above,
and tighten main bearing bolts to torque values shown in Chart III.
f. Again check inner and outer row of rollers on each bearing as previously outlined to
assure equal loading is still present on each bearing.
Chart III
11.6
Ft. Lbs.
Wrench
Thread
Torque
Wrench
Thread
Torque
Size
Size
Meter Kg.
Size
Size
FD-500
3000
1-1/4
1-3/4 - 8
609
31.75 mm
44.4
FD-800
6360
2-1/4-8
880
76.2mm
57.2 - 8/25.4mm
FD-1000
8800
3-1/4
2-1/2-8
1217
82.5mm
57.2 - 8/25.4mm
FD-1600
9750
3-5/8
3-8
1348
92.0mm
76.2 - 8/25.4mm
Installation of Crosshead Guides

When installing crosshead guides observe the following procedures and precautions:
1. Thoroughly clean all dirt or contamination and remove all burrs or rough edges from
both sides of the guides and the frame bore where the guides fit.
2. If old guides are to be reused, inspect the wearing surfaces for wear and scoring
streaks. Pumps with serial numbers below those shown have identical upper and lower
crosshead guides which may be reversed to provide a smooth surface for the lower
guide. Worn guides may be used at the top as forces on the crosshead are always
downward.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
49
The upper and lower crosshead guides are NOT interchangeable. The guides are
machined so that the lower guide places the crosshead frame centerline, and upper
guides are machined to afford proper crosshead to guide clearance. The guides are
marked UPPER and LOWER.
3. Install upper and lower guides. Torque guide screws to 150 - 200 ft. lbs. (20.84 - 27.60
meter kgs.) Install lock pins by bending in the middle until the ends of lock pin fit into
counterbore. Align ends of lock pin with pin holes in guide and straighten pin guiding
the ends into the holes.
4. Check between frame and guide at points A, Fig. 19, with .002 (.051mm) feeler gauge
to make sure guides fit into frame bore. NO gap should be present.
11.7
Installation of Crossheads
The crossheads in the pumps can be installed through the front (fluid end) or back end of
the crosshead guide. Reference Fig. 19. When installing crossheads, observe the following
precautions:
1. Thoroughly clean all dirt or

contamination and remove all
burrs or rough edges from OD of
the crosshead, crosshead pin
bores, and inner bore of
crosshead guide. Dry crosshead
pin bore so that taper bore
connection will make up metal to
metal. *See Note
2. Position eye of eccentric strap at the opening in the side of the crosshead guide.
Block eccentric strap so that crosshead will clear the eye as it is sliding into position to
where the crosshead pin holes are in alignment.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
50
3. Install the left hand crosshead first. Rotate eccentric assembly to move eye into
center crosshead and right hand eccentric strap eye back, affording clearance to
install center pin through right hand crosshead inspection door. Remove diaphragm
stuffing box plate (1, Fig. 19) and install right hand crosshead through this bore. Slide
into place and install crosshead pin.
* NOTE: If old crossheads are to be reused, inspect the sliding surfaces for wear or
scoring. If necessary, the crossheads may be switched to opposite sides of the
pump and rotated 180 to provide a smooth surface for the bottom of the
crosshead. The center crosshead can be rotated 180 and the crosshead pin
installed from the opposite side of pump.
Slide crosshead pin into bore but do not seat on taper until the crosshead pin retainer
(2) has been installed.
4. Install crosshead pin retainer (2) and retainer bolts (3) and rotate pin until the four
crosshead retainer to crosshead bolt holes (4) are in alignment. Install the crosshead
retainer to crosshead bolts (4) and make up hand tight.
Referring back to fig.12, page B-2, crosshead pin (4) can be installed without regard to
oil holes (5). Two holes are provided so the pin can be rotated 180 in relation to pin to
retainer plate screws (3).
Seat crosshead pin in tapered bore by bumping large end with a light blow. Tighten
retainer bolts (3 and 4, Fig. 19) to the following torque and safety wire:
FD-500
FD-1000
90-100 ft. lbs. (12.4-13.8 mkg)

165-175 ft. lbs. (23-24 mkg)
FD-800
FD-1600
165-175 ft. lbs. (23-24 mkg)

165-175 ft. lbs. (23-24 mkg)
DO NOT EXCEED THESE VALUES. USE TORQUE WRENCH.

NOTE: To pull the crosshead pin, remove the four crosshead retainer to crosshead
bolts (4) and screw two of the bolts into the jack screw holes (5). Tighten the two jack
screw bolts until the pin breaks loose. Complete removal of the crosshead pin retainer
plate (2) and slide pin out of bore.
5. Check running clearance of crosshead by sliding long feeler gauges between top of
crosshead and crosshead guide bore.
The clearance should not be less than .020 (.508mm). Check with long feeler gauge
over entire surface of crosshead.
Check crosshead alignment as instructed in the next section of this manual.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
51
NOTE: Less running clearance at center of crosshead can be cause by swelling from
overtightening the crosshead pin retainer bolts (4). If present, loosen pin and retighten
into place by using the make-up torques shown in paragraph 4.
11.8
Checking crosshead alignment

To obtain optimum service life from the pistons and liners, the horizontal centerline of the
crosshead extension rod must be positioned as near as possible to the center of the liner.
To check and adjust the crosshead alignment, proceed as follows;
1. Remove diaphragm stuffing box from the diaphragm plate, (fig. 19). Do not remove the
plate.
2. Position crosshead at mid point of stroke. With inside calipers or telescoping gauges
and a micrometer, accurately measure the distance from the diaphragm plate bore to
the crosshead extension rod at the top and bottom. Compare the two measurements to
determine the position of the rod relative to the centerline of the bore.
3. If the top reading is more than .030 (.76mm) greater than the bottom measurement,
shims should be inserted under the lower crosshead guide to bring the extension rod
back to center, provided there is ample clearance between the top of crosshead and
upper guide. Cut shims from steel shim stock long enough to reach completely across
the guides. Cut tabs on the sides to bend down over frame supports to hold shims in
place. Refer to items 3 and 4 under Installation of Crosshead guides.
4. Some older pumps were manufactured with large crosshead clearance which will cause
a loud knocking noise under poor suction conditions. Specifications have been revised
to .020 - .030 (.51 - .76 mm) clearance. After proper alignment has been obtained, the
top guide should be shimmed down to provide the specified clearance.
12
FLUID END MAINTENANCE

For many years, the fluid end of a pump was considered a non-wearing part which did not
cause any concern other than possible infrequent repairs or replacements resulting from
fluid cuts or washouts. However, the higher pressures of the present-day drilling
requirements have resulted in higher stresses being imposed on the fluid end which , when
combined with the corrosive characteristics of the drilling fluid, have resulted in the demand
that more and better maintenance be given to the fluid end parts and pieces if a reasonable
operating life is to be obtained.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
52
A few of the obvious points are as follows:

a. Make sure all valves on the discharge side of pump are opened before pump is put
into operation. Kicking pump in against a closed valve can often be the start of a
fatigue crack. An open crack may not necessarily occur at the precise moment,
however a small crack could occur and start the process of corrosion fatigue
failure.
b. Do not engage pump clutch when prime mover is running at a high rate of speed.
To do so can cause undesirable shock loads against both power end and fluid end.
c. Properly maintain pressure relief valve to assure it is set for the pressure rating on
the liner size being used.
d. Do not operate the pump for an extended period of time if a severe fluid knock is
present. The additional stress cycle, although of a lesser magnitude than normal
operating loads, must be added to the total number of cycles when considering the
fatigue life of the equipment.
e. Properly prepare fluid end for storage. When pump is to be shut down or not
operated for a period of ten days or more, it is recommended that the fluid end parts
such as liners, pistons, rods, etc., be removed from the pump and the fluid end
flushed out completely with fresh water. After a thorough flushing, apply grease or a
rust preventative to all of the machined surfaces such as valve pot cover threads,
valve pot cover gasket surfaces, valve seats, liner bores, etc. The parts removed
from the pump including liners, piston rods, etc., should of course be protected from
the elements. This will not only extend the life of the fluid end through resistance to
corrosion, but will also protect the usable life still left in the expendable parts and
maintain them in good condition for installation in the pump at the next start-up
period.
Maintenance and repairs should be made on the fluid end assembly by observing the
following precautions. Refer to Figure 20.
The fluid end assembly for these triplex pumps consists of three forged cylinder blocks,
complete with valve pot covers and cylinder heads, a suction manifold, and a discharge
manifold.
12.1
Fluid Cylinder Blocks

The three separate fluid cylinder blocks (1) bolt metal-to-metal to the power end frame
through retainer studs (2). Alignment with the power end frame bores is obtained through
the pilot boss on fluid end.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
53
However, to obtain accurate alignment, all nicks or burrs must be removed from pilot boss
and frame bore and all dirt and foreign matter cleaned form the mating surfaces; otherwise
cylinder blocks could make up in a cocked or misaligned position.
The fit between pilot boss and frame bore (Position A) is as follows:
Pilot Boss to Frame
(L.05mm) (L.20mm)
L.002 - L.008
Install the three cylinder block nuts to the torque values shown in Chart V.
12.2
Suction Manifold
The suction manifold (3) bolts to each cylinder block and is sealed through the O-ring (4) in
the connection flange. Thoroughly clean O-ring groove, the O-ring sealing surface on
bottom of the cylinder block, and replace O-ring seal before bolting manifold into position.
The flange connection MUST make up metal-to-metal to retain the O-ring seal, therefore
any nicks, grooves or washouts on the sealing surface must be repaired before installation.
Ref. Welding and Repair Section in this manual for repair procedures.
Start all suction manifold bolts (5) in the three cylinder blocks before tightening. Tighten to
torque values shown in Chart V.
12.3
Discharge Manifold
The discharge manifold (6) bolts to each cylinder block and is sealed through the O-ring in
the connection flange.
Thoroughly clean the O-ring groove, the O-ring sealing surface on face of the cylinder block
before bolting the manifold back into position. The flange connection MUST make up
metal-to-metal to retain the O-ring seal, therefore any nicks, grooves, or washouts on this
sealing surface must be repaired before installation. Ref. Welding and Repair Section in
this manual for repair procedures.
Start all discharge manifold bolts (8) in the three cylinder blocks before tightening. Tighten
to torque values shown in Chart V. Tighten cylinder block to power frame stud nuts to
torque values shown in Chart V.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
12.4
EPL- 1911
01
54
Cylinder Head Thread Ring

A replaceable cylinder head thread ring (9) is bolted on to the face of the cylinder blocks.
The thread ring must make up metal-to-metal with face of cylinder blocks in order for the
axis of the threads to be perfectly square with the cylinder block bore. Therefore, make
sure all burrs, extrusions, or foreign matter is removed from the mating faces before making
installation.
NOTE: Install thread ring so that the bleed hole is in the down position. Tighten the
cylinder head thread ring stud nuts (10) to the torque values shown in Chart V.
12.5
Welding and Repairs

On occasion where washouts or normal wear cause repairs to be made to the fluid end
bores, the following welding procedures and precautions should be closely followed.
Machine bore all dimensions to those shown in applicable chart, and in all cases maintain
the shoulders (where liner, covers, etc., seat) 90 to the axis of the bore.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
55
Chart V
POSITION
ITEM
FD-500
TORQUE
FT-LBS.
FD-800 & FD-1000

TORQUE FT. LBS.
FD-500
TORQUE
METER-KG
FD-800 & FD-1000

TORQUE METER-KG
Cyl. Block to Power End
1600
1600
221
221
Suction Manifold
150
240
21
33
Discharge Manifold
710
1000
98
138
Thread Ring
10
710
1360
98
188
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
56
Chart VI
POSITION
Inches
FD-500
Millimeters
FD-800
FD-500
FD-1000
www.nov.com
FD-800
FD-1000
8.505-8.510
8.755-8.760
216.02-216.15 222.38-222.50
7.505-7.508
7.766-7.758
190.63-190.70 196.98-197.05
12-1/2
13-3/8
6.125-6.130
6.775-6.780
155.58-155.70 172.08-172.21
5.375-5.380
6.010-6.015
136.53-136.65 152.65-152.78
4.995-5.000
5.622-5.627
126.87-127.00 142.80-142.93
50.8
101.6
2-1/2
4-1/2
63.5
114.3
317.5
339.7
Document number
Revision
Page
FD-1600
www.nov.com
EPL- 1911
01
57
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
58
Chart VIII
Inches
Millimeters
8.250-8.255
209.55-209.68
7.125-7.130
180.97-181.10
8.252-8.255
209.60-209.68
14.499-14.501
368.27-368.32
x 45
6.35 x 45
2.995-3.000
76.07-76.20
.625-.630
15.87-16.00
1.120-1.130
28.45-28.70
5.870-5.880
149.10-149.35
6.247-6.252
158.67-158.80
6.630-6.635
168.40-168.53
7.375-7.380
187.32-187.45
.495-.505
12.57-12.83
12.6
2 Taper per ft. on dia. 50.80 Taper per ft. on dia.
Welding Procedures
Weld repairs can usually be separated into two categories:
(1) Washes, and (2) Cracks. Listed below is the basic information for the repairs:
Washout:
- Weld as 30 Carbon Steel.

- Clean area by grinding or Arc-air.
- Before starting any welding procedure, make sure the electrodes are dry of
moisture, and if necessary, put in oven and bring up to temperature required
to drive out moisture.
- Spot heat area to 250 - 350F (120 - 180C) out in all directions for a
minimum of 3. (75mm)
- Use AWS-ASTM E-60-7018 low hydrogen rods. Example - Adam-Arc 7018.
- Temperatures should be brought back to 250 - 350F (120 - 180C) after
each pass and maintained throughout the welding. After welding is
completed and area cleaned, heat to 250 - 350F (120 - 180C) and allow
to cool.
Cracks:
- Grind out all of crack. Any attempt to burn out a crack will only result in the
crack progressing faster than the material can be burned.
- Follow the same welding procedure as above.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
59
Preheating: - The purpose of preheating is to expand the area being repaired so that as
the cooling process takes place, the welded area and the preheated area will
cool more uniformly. Preheating also prevents hard spots from forming
between the base metal and the welding by eliminating a thermal shock as
the weld is being applied. This hard spot will, of course, be a good place for
fatigue cracks to occur.
12.7
Repairs to Valve Pot Cover Bore

When making repairs to washouts in the valve pot cover bore, it is extremely important that
the surface where the valve cover seats is either machined or ground perfectly flat and
90 to the axis of the threads. A shown in Fig. 21, the valve pot cover gasket (1) seats into
the counterbore at top of valve cover deck, and as the cover makes up metal to metal to
the valve deck, the gasket is confined within its counterbore. Obviously, any high spots on
the valve cover deck from weld repairs, or any low spot from over-grinding of the repairs
can result in a gap between top of the valve cover deck and bottom of the valve cover,
through which the valve cover gasket can be extruded under pressure.
The high or low spot can also cause valve covers to make up in a cocked position and
result in severe thread damage (cracks) due to the axis of the two mating threads being out
of square.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
EPL- 1911
01
60
Approximate Weights of Pump Assemblies
FD-500
lbs.
Pinion Shaft
FD-800
kgs.
lbs.
FD-1000
kgs.
lbs
kgs.
2,373
1,077
4,744 15,179
6,885
326
1,630
5,185
2,352
7,458
119
54
258
117
363
165
431
196
33
15
123
56
177
80
201
91
Gear Case Cover
341
155
262
119
340
154
379
172
Suction Manifold
258
117
429
195
704
319
704
319
Discharge Manifold
390
177
696
316
717
325
740
336
One-third Fluid end

section-studded
1,527
693
1,140
517
1,140
517
1,865
846
Crosshead
Crosshead Pin & Retainer
www.nov.com
1,709
kgs.
718
Crankshaft Assy.
740
lbs.
FD-1600
3,383 10,479
775
Product Information Bulletin

Triplex Mud Pump
Supplement for all Pump Manuals
REFERENCE
RIG/PLANT
ADDITIONAL CODE
SDRL CODE
DISCIPLINE
CLIENT PO NUMBER
www.nov.com
Triplex Mud Pump
TOTAL PGS
REMARKS
MAIN TAG NUMBER
This document contains proprietary and confidential information which is the

property of National Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively
referred to hereinafter as NOV). It is loaned for limited purposes only and
remains the property of NOV. Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this
design or distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the
written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to NOV upon request or
upon completion of the use for which it was loaned. This document and the
information contained and represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV.
National Oilwell Varco, L.P.

1530 W Sam Houston Pkwy. N
Houston, TX 77043
Phone 713-935-8000
Fax 713-935-8382
DOCUMENT NUMBER
REV
MP.WARNING
02
Document number
Revision
Page
MP.WARNING
02
2
REVISION HISTORY
02
08.03.2005
Rev
Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
Updated to new template

Reason for issue
PG
Prepared
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision
02
Change Description
Updated to electronic format from pdf to ms word in new template
www.nov.com
Checked
Approved
Document number
Revision
Page
MP.WARNING
02
3
PRESSURE
RELIEF
VALVES
! Notice !
Our Technical Publications relative to reciprocating pumps, state that pressure relief valves
must be installed in the discharge systems from these units. This supplement is issued to
emphasize the importance of relieving the discharge system of all pressure which exceeds
the rated working pressure applied by the manufacturer to the specific pistons and liners (
or plungers and packing) in any particular unit.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
MP.WARNING
02
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
WARNING......................................................................................................................... 5
1.1
The Pressure Relief Valve ...................................................................................... 5
1.2
Rupture Disc or Burst Disc ..................................................................................... 5
1.3
Location of the Relief Valve .................................................................................... 6
1.4
The Relief Valve Discharge Line............................................................................. 6
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
MP.WARNING
02
5
WARNING
For the protection of persons and properly the discharge system form each Reciprocating
Pump must be equipped with a device which relives the system of all pressures which
exceed the pressure rating applied by the manufacturer to each particular piston or plunger
diameter. Allowances will be made for pressure surges which are inherent with the
reciprocating action of piston and plunger pumps. The percentage of pressure allowance
appears later in this publication and the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute (13th Edition)
The relieving device must provide for instantaneous pressure relief, it may be a valve
designed for automatic or manual resetting; however, if preferred, rupture discs or burst
may be installed.
Failure to comply with the procedures outlined in the Warning may result in damage to the
pump and related equipment and more importantly may cause serious bodily injury or
death!
1.1
1.2
The Pressure Relief Valve

1.
The valve must be a full opening type.
2.
It must have a working pressure rating, equal to or greater than, the maximum
working pressure of the pump.
3.
The through capacity of the valve, when fully opened, must be sufficient to relieve
the full capacity of the pump without excessive overpressure.
Rupture Disc or Burst Disc

1.
These discs must have a diameter which is not less than the pipe size of the
pressure relief flange.
2.
These discs must have a rupture of burst pressure rating consistent with the
specifications tabulated later in this publication.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
1.3
1.4
MP.WARNING
02
6
Location of the Relief Valve

1.
The relief valve must be placed in the discharge line as close as possible to the
pump fluid end or it may be mounted on the pump discharge manifold.
2.
The relief valve must be on the pump side of any discharge strainer.
3.
The relief valve must be between the pump fluid end and any valve in the discharge
system.
4.
There must be no restricting device(s) between the relief valve and the pump fluid
end.
The Relief Valve Discharge Line

1.
The relief valve discharge line should not terminate in the pump suction line.
2.
The line should terminate in the supply tank, if possible.
3.
The line must be securely anchored.
4.
The line must be the same pipe size as, or may be larger than, the discharge
connection on the relief valve.
5.
If the line is of great length, this must be taken into consideration in sizing the relief
valve.
6.
There must be no restrictions or valves in the relief valve discharge line.
Note: Follow the foregoing instructions if rupture discs or burst discs are installed.
SUGGESTED SET PRESSURES FOR PUMP RELIEF VALVES
Pump Type
Operating Pump Pressure
Double Acting Duplex
Piston Pressure Rating Plus 25%
Double Acting Triplex
Double Acting Quintuplex
Single Acting Triplex
Single Acting Simplex
Plunger Pressure Rating Plus 25%
Single Acting Duplex
Single Acting Triplex
Single Acting Quintuplex
Single Acting Septuplex
Note: The above set pressures are to be observed when installing rupture discs or burst
discs.
www.nov.com
Page 1 of 3
Product Information Bulletin No. 01-05-01-MP

TRIPLEX MUD PUMPS
Date: July 12, 2013
Rev. 06
Subject:
Power End Lubrication Oil Additive and wear-in Period
Product:
All Triplex Mud Pumps
Affected
Assemblies:
P-Series & F-Series Mud Pumps
Objective:
Recommended power end lube oil additive to reduce corrective pitting

found on mud pump gears. Provide wear-in period information.
Issue:
During the initial mud pump wear-in period, it is common to see initial
pitting on the tooth faces of Triplex Mud Pump gears.
Solution:
It is National Oilwell Varcos recommendation to use a Molybdenum Disulfide

oil additive with the Mud Pump Gear Oil during initial running and when signs
of corrective (also known as initial) pitting are observed on Mud Pump gears.
The oil additive will help to polish the gear tooth surfaces and in some cases,
if used in the initial Mud Pump wear-in period, can reduce the amount of
initial pitting common on Mud Pump gears.
Moly oil additives such as Dow-Corning Molykote M Gear Guard (mixture
5% by volume) or TS-90 Moly Gear Concentrate have been used in this
application with good results. The oil additive would need to be compatible
with the mud pump seals and not adversely affect the oil filtration system.
Using gear oil with Moly already included in the gear oil, like the Schaeffer
209A Gear Lube, would assure the amount suspended in the oil is correct
and it is thoroughly mixed. It is also extremely important to follow the National
Oilwell Varco gear oil recommendations as seen in Table 1. The
recommended gear oils have the film strength necessary to withstand the
Page 2 of 3
impact loading encountered in oilfield drilling operations. The results of not
using the recommended gear oil may permit metal-to-metal contact of the
gear teeth, which will be noticeable in the form of excessive pitting and wear
on the load side of the gear teeth. Excessive pitting and wear can result in an
increased risk of mud pump damage. National Oilwell Varco recommends
that an ISO viscosity grade 460 oil be used during the wear-in period
for all P-Series Mud Pumps. The duration of the wear-in period is
considered the first 2000 hours of use but can vary depending on usage.
After the wear-in period has been accomplished, the lubricating oil
should be selected from the appropriate temperature range in Table 1
below:
PSERIESMUDPUMPS
AGMAINDUSTRIALEPGEAROIL
TEMPERATURE
50Fto155F(10Cto68C)
AGMA#7EPorASTM/ISOVGGrade460
Viscosity414506CST@100F(38C)
20Fto100F(7Cto38C)
20Fto60F(29Cto16C)
TEMPERATURE
FSERIESMUDPUMPS
AGMAINDUSTRIALEPGEAROIL
30Fto155F(1Cto68C)
0Fto85F(18Cto33C)
Table 1. Mud Pump Lube Oils

The Mud Pump bull gears may develop corrective pitting during the early
stages of the product life. This corrective pitting process can be exaggerated
by operating a Mud Pump for extended periods at high load, especially if the
lube oil temperature exceeds 140F (60C). As a result of the corrective
pitting process, small metal particles will be present in the lubrication oil.
These metal particles normally accumulate on the power end magnets, in the
lube oil filter, in the settling chamber and in the main sump. National Oilwell
Varco recommends that the magnets, filter and sumps be checked regularly
and maintained/cleaned as needed.
It is further recommended that all commissioning and endurance tests be
designed such that the pump speed and discharge pressure is gradually
increased from the lower speeds and pressures to the higher ones. This is to
allow the gears to wear in gradually and reduce the occurrence of excessive
gear pitting.
Page 3 of 3
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE RECOMMENDATIONS COULD RESULT IN

CATASTROPHIC FAILURE OF THE PUMP WHICH MAY RESULT IN DEATH,
BODILY INJURY AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
PROCEDURE
THE USE OF AND APPLICATION OF
SAFETY WIRE FOR SECONDARY
RETENTION
RIG/PLANT
ADDITIONAL CODE
SDRL CODE
TOTAL PGS
REMARKS
MAIN TAG NUMBER
DISCIPLINE
CLIENT PO NUMBER

purposes only and remains the property of National Oilwell.

Rig Solutions
11000 Corporate Centre Dr.
Houston TX 77041 USA
Phone +1 (281) 854-0647
Fax +1 (281) 854-0508
DOCUMENT NUMBER
REV
ASP00019
Document number
Revision
Page
ASP00019
A
2
REVISION HISTORY
A
Rev
15/04/2011
10/03/1995
Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
SEE ECN
First Issue
Reason for issue
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision
A
Change Description
First Issue
SEE ECN
C. SILVA
KTK
Prepared
T. GORMSEN
K DAW
Checked
T. GORMSEN
JES
Approved
Document number
Revision
Page
ASP00019
A
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
SCOPE.............................................................................................................................. 3
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................... 4
REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................. 4
3.1 MATERIAL AND SIZE ............................................................................................ 4
3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. 5
3.3 LOCK-WIRING METHODS .................................................................................... 6
3.4 OTHER APPLICATIONS ........................................................................................ 7
3.5 ILLUSTRATION OF TYPICAL LOCK-WIRE APPLICATION .................................. 8
QA PROVISIONS.............................................................................................................. 9
NOTES .............................................................................................................................. 9
SCOPE
Document number
Revision
Page
ASP00019
A
4
This procedure establishes the method for the selection and application of safety wire.
Lock wiring is the application of wire to prevent relative movement of structure or other
critical components subject to vibration, tension, torque, etc.
This procedure is intended to help eliminate the risk of dropped objects in
components or parts manufactured.
Bolts, Nuts and Screws are the common type of fasteners used on NOV
equipment. They need to be locked (secondary retention) against loss of torque / pretension.
Use of safety wire to prevent rotation of fasteners is a safe and primarily
recommended secondary retention method for fasteners. It is the most preferred
method because it not only prevents fasteners from loosening but also keeps them from
falling in case of primary retention failure (bolt head Breaks off) and effectively prevents
dropped objects.
Note that the secondary retention will work only if the primary retention method is
properly in place, i.e. bolts and screws are tightened and torqued as per specifications,
and there is no play between the mating elements. Secondary retention methods aim in
preventing any compromise in primary retention, loss of pre-tension in assembled
fasteners, loosening and backing out.
Definitions:
Secondary Retention The means of effectively retaining a fastener/joining component
such that the operating loads do not compromise the integrity of the primary fastening
component.
2
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
DS00008-DES
DESIGN TORQUE STANDARDS
Machinerys Handbook 27th Edition
3
3.1
REQUIREMENTS
MATERIAL AND SIZE

3.1.1 Material
Lock wire must be aircraft quality stainless steel 302/304 condition A.
3.1.2 Lock-wire sizes
Document number
Revision
Page
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.2
ASP00019
A
5
0.5080 mm (0.020 inch) diameter

0.8128 mm (0.032 inch) diameter NOV P/N Z6000.8
1.1938 mm (0.047 inch) diameter NOV P/N Z6000.9
1.2950 mm (0.051 inch) diameter NOV P/N Z6001
3.1750 mm (0.125 inch) diameter NOV P/N Z6002
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.2.1 Safety wire shall be new upon each application.
3.2.2 Parts shall be lockwired in such a manner that the lockwire shall be put in tension
when the part tends to loosen.
3.2.3 The lockwire should always be installed and twisted so that the loop around the
head stays down and does not tend to come up over bolt head and leave a slack loop.
3.2.4 Care shall be exercised when installing lockwire to ensure that it is tight but not
over stressed.
3.2.5 Properly twisted lockwire will have 7-12 twists per inch for .032 wire and 6-8 turns
for .052 wire. More twists will over stress the wire and cause fatigue and breakage.
3.2.6 A pigtail should be to 5/8 in length (4-8 twists) at the end of the wiring. This
pigtail shall be bent back or under to prevent it from becoming a snag.
3.2.7 As per the Machinerys Handbook 27th edition the following rules apply:
a) No more than three (3) bolts may be tied together.
b) Bolt heads may be tied as shown only when the female thread receiver is
captive.(see figure 1)
c) Lockwire must fill a minimum of 50% of the drilled hole provided for the
use of lockwire.
d) Diameter of lockwire is determined by the thread size of the fastener to be
lockwired.
1) Thread sizes of 6 mm (0.25 inch) and smaller use 0.508mm (0.020
inch) wire.
2) Thread sizes of 6 mm (0.25 inch) to 12 mm (0.5 inch) use 0.8128 mm
(0.032 inch) wire.
3) Thread sizes > 12 mm (0.5 inch) use 1.1938 mm (0.047 inch) OR
1.295mm (0.051) wire.
The larger wire may be used in smaller bolts in cases of convenience, but smaller
wire must not be used in larger fastener sizes.
Document number
Revision
Page
ASP00019
A
6
Figure 1: Safety Wire / Lock Wire
3.3
LOCK-WIRING METHODS
3.3.1 The method involves threading a wire through holes in the fastener to lock it
against being rotated loose. The wire is twisted before being threaded and is locked to
next bolt. Safety wire should be placed in and around bolt head to maintain the pre-load.
The use of safety wire ties is illustrated in figure 1 above. The illustrations assume the
use of right-hand threaded fasteners.
3.3.2 The double-twist method:
The double-twist method of lock-wiring shall be used as the common method of
lock-wiring.
CAUTION: screws in closely spaced geometric which secure hydraulic or air seals, hold
hydraulic pressure, or used in critical areas of clutch mechanism should use double twist
method of lock-wiring. Make sure that the wire is so installed that it can easily be broken
when required in an emergency situation.
3.3.3 Lock-wiring widely spaced multiple groups by the double twist method.
a) When the multiple fasteners are from 4-6 inches apart, three (3) fasteners
shall be the maximum number in a series that can be safety wired
together.
b) When the multiple fasteners are spaced more than 6 inches apart, the
multiple fastener application specified in Figure 1 shall not be used unless
tie points are provided on adjacent parts to shorten the span of the wire to
less than 6 inches.
c) One end of the safety wire shall be inserted through one set of lockwire
holes in the head of the bolt. The other end of the safety wire shall be
looped around the bolt head in the tightening direction.
Document number
Revision
Page
ASP00019
A
7
d) The strands, while taut, shall be twisted until the twisted part is just short of
the nearest hole in the next bolt. The twisted portion shall be within 1/8 of
the holes in each bolt as shown in figure 1 above.
e) After wiring the last bolt, the wire shall be twisted to form a pigtail of 2-4
twists. The excess wire shall be cut off. The pigtail shall be bent back or
under the part to prevent it from becoming a snag.
3.3.4 Single wire method:
The single wire method may be used in a closely spaced, closed geometrical
pattern (triangle, square, circle, etc.) on parts in an electrical system, and in places that
would make the single-method more advisable as shown in figure 2 below. Closely
spaced shall be considered a maximum of two inches between centers. Maximum length
of wire shall not exceed 24 in total length.
Figure 2: Safety Wire / Lock Wire Single
3.4
OTHER APPLICATIONS
Document number
Revision
Page
ASP00019
A
8
3.4.1 Hollow head bolts are safety wired in the manner prescribed for regular bolts.
3.4.2 Drain plugs and cocks may be wired to a bolt, nut, or other part having a free lock
hole in accordance with the general instructions contained herein.
3.4.3 External snap rings may be locked if necessary in accordance with the general
locking principles contained herein.
3.4.4 Internal snap rings shall never be lockwired.
3.4.5 Bolts and hardware may be wired using SAFE-T-Cable. Follow procedure
D744000087-PRO-001.
Safe-T-Cable can be used similar to Safety/Lock wire to secure Fasteners. The safety
cable installation procedure is shown in Figure. The safety cable comes in pre-cut
lengths with stubs on one end. After sewing through the holes in the fasteners they are
tightened and crimped using a ferrule cartridge and crimping tool.
They are more convenient to use and take only a fraction of the time to secure fasteners
as compared to safety wire as no wire twisting is required. However additional tools like
ferrule cartridge and crimping tool are required. For additional information refer Safe-TCable (website http://www.dmctools.com/Catalog/safe_t_cable.htm).
Figure 3: Safety Cable Installation Procedure
3.5
ILLUSTRATION OF TYPICAL LOCK-WIRE APPLICATION
Document number
Revision
Page
QA PROVISIONS
NOTES
ASP00019
A
9
DS00008
Design Specification
Design Torque Standard
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS

TO NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE
PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR USE OF
THIS DESIGN OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITHOUT
THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE
RETURNED TO NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. UPON REQUEST AND IN ANY EVENT UPON COMPLETION
OF THE USE FOR WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED
AND REPRESENTED IS THE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.
CURRENT
DRAWN
TITLE
Design Torque Standard
INITIAL
D.TRUONG
A. Vargas
CHECKED
B.RICE
B. Levay
APPVD
B.RICE
JB
DATE
7/25/11
11.13.1992
SIZE
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
1
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
NOTES
1. Unless noted, all values are based on light machine oil or anti seize lubricated bolts (not high
pressure lubes)
2. NOV does not recommend assembling bolts dry
3. Proof Strength is 92% of minimum yield strength
4. Torque values given represent 70% to 80% of proof strength
5. Clamp force is based on 75% of proof strength
6. These torque values are to be followed unless otherwise specified
7. If torqueing into aluminum, contact engineering for appropriate torque value.
8. After proper torque has been established in accordance with specification, fasteners shall be
immediately identified as being torqued by either:
a) Being safety wired in accordance with ASP00019 and/or
b) Marked with an X using either a red or yellow paint marker.
SIZE
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
2
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
TORQUE VALUES FOR LIGHT MACHINE OIL LUBRICATED BOLTS
GRADE 2
T.S. = 74,000 PSI to DIA
PROOF STRENGTH = 55,000 PSI
T.S. = 60,000 PSI 7/8 to 1-1/2 DIA
COARSE THREAD SERIES - UNC
Max.
Clamp
Dia-Threads
Min. Torque
Torque
Force
(ft-lbf)
Per Inch
(ft-lbf)
(lb)
1/4 20
5.7
6.3
1,320
5/16 18
10.5
11.6
2,160
3/8 16
19
21
3,200
7/16 14
29
32
4,380
1/2 13
48
53
5,840
9/16 12
67
74
7,500
5/8 11
95
105
9,300
3/4 10
166
184
13,800
7/8 9
157
173
11,400
18
238
263
15,000
1 1/8 7
333
368
18,900
1 1/4 7
475
525
24,000
1 3/8 6
627
639
28,600
1 1/2 6
827
914
34,800
1/4 28
5/16 24
3/8 24
7/16 20
1/2 20
9/16 18
5/8 18
3/4 16
7/8 14
14
1 1/8 12
1 1/4 12
1 3/8 12
1 1/2 12
FINE THREAD SERIES UNF

5.7
6.3
11.4
12.6
22
24
33
37
52
58
76
84
105
116
185
205
176
194
257
284
380
420
523
578
703
777
931
1,029
1,500
2,400
3,620
4,900
6,600
8,400
10,600
15,400
12,600
16,400
21,200
26,600
32,500
39,100
SIZE
GRADE 5
T.S. = 120,000 PSI to 1 DIA
T.S. = 105,000 PSI 1-1/8 to 1-1/2 DIA
Min.
Torque
(ft-lbf)
7.6
16
29
48
71
105
143
247
409
608
760
1,064
1,387
1,843
Max.
Torque
(ft-lbf)
8.4
18
32
53
79
116
158
273
452
672
840
1,176
1,533
2,037
9.5
18
33
52
86
114
162
285
447
665
836
1,178
1,596
2,090
10.5
20
37
58
95
126
179
315
494
735
924
1,302
1,764
2,310
2,320
3,700
5,600
7,550
10,700
12,950
16,300
23,800
32,400
42,200
47,500
59,600
73,000
87,700
DWG NO
DS00008
NONE
7
7
7
7
REV
A
SCALE
Clamp
Force
(lb)
2,020
3,340
4,940
6,800
9,050
11,600
14,400
21,300
29,400
38,600
42,300
53,800 7
64,100 7
78,000 7
WT LBS
SHEET
F
3
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
GRADE 8
TENSILE STRENGTH = 150,000 PSI

Max.
Clamp
Dia-Threads
Min. Torque
Torque
Force
(ft-lbf)
Per Inch
(ft-lbf)
(lb)
1/4 20
11.4
12.6
2,860
5/16 18
24
26
3,720
3/8 16
43
47
7,000
7/16 14
67
74
9,550
1/2 13
105
116
12,750
9/16 12
143
158
16,100
5/8 11
209
231
20,350
3/4 10
361
399
30,100
7/8 9
570
630
41,600
18
855
945
54,500
1 1/8 7
1,216
1,344
68,700
1 1/4 7
1,729
1,911
87,200
1 3/8 6
2,261
2,499
104,000
1 1/2 6
3,002
3,318
126,500
1/4 28
5/16 24
3/8 24
7/16 20
1/2 20
9/16 18
5/8 18
3/4 16
7/8 14
14
1 1/8 12
1 1/4 12
1 3/8 12
1 1/2 12

13.3
17.7
3,280
24
26
5,220
48
53
7,900
75
84
10,700
114
126
14,400
162
179
18,250
228
252
23,000
399
441
33,600
627
693
45,800
950
1,050
59,700
1,368
1,512
77,000
1,900
2,100
96,600
2,584
2,856
118,400
3,382
3,738
142,200
SIZE
HOLO-KROME
7
7
7
7
7
Min.
Torque
(ft-lbf)
12
26
47
75
114
163
226
404
651
969
1,349
1,967
2,565
3,411
Max.
Torque
(ft-lbf)
14
28
51
83
126
181
250
446
719
1,071
1,491
2,174
2,835
3,770
7
7
7
7
7
7
14
29
52
84
124
183
258
451
718
1,064
1,511
2,180
2,926
4,769
16
32
58
92
137
203
286
499
794
1,176
1,670
2,410
3,234
5,271
7
7
7
7
7
3,750
5,920
8,050
12,150
16,250
20,700
26,200
38,000
51,900
67,600
87,000
109,400
134,000
201,000
7
7
7
7
7
7
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
Clamp
Force
(lb)
3,240
5,340
7,920
10,850
14,450
18,500
23,000
34,000
47,000
61,700
77,800
98,700
117,800
143,200
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
4
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
STAINLESS ASTM F593G & F593H

T.S. = 100,000 PSI to 5/8 DIA
T.S. = 85,000 PSI 3/4 to 1-1/2 DIA
Max.
Clamp
Dia-Threads
Min. Torque
Torque
Force
(ft-lbf)
Per Inch
(ft-lbf)
(lb)
1/4 20
5.7
6.3
1,407
5/16 18
11.4
12.6
2,319
3/8 16
20.0
22.1
3,429
7/16 14
32
36
4,704
1/2 13
49
55
6,279
9/16 12
72
80
8,054
5/8 11
99
109
10,001
3/4 10
122
134
10,271
7/8 9
197
217
14,207
18
295
327
18,635
1 1/8 7
418
462
23,462
1 1/4 7
590
652
29,797
1 3/8 6
773
855
35,516
1 1/2 6
1,026
1,134
43,204
1/4 28
5/16 24
3/8 24
7/16 20
1/2 20
9/16 18
5/8 18
3/4 16
7/8 14
14
1 1/8 12
1 1/4 12
1 3/8 12
1 1/2 12

6.7
7.4
12.4
13.7
22.8
25.2
36
40
56
62
80
88
112
124
136
150
217
239
323
357
469
519
653
721
881
973
1,154
1,276
1,611
2,567
3,885
5,252
7,076
8,983
11,328
11,470
15,652
20,387
26,322
32,995
10,436
49,616
STAINLESS ASTM F593U

Min.
Torque
(ft-lbf)
8.6
18.1
33.3
52
80
116
160
282
456
684
968
1,366
1,792
2,378
Max.
Torque
(ft-lbf)
9.5
20.0
36.8
58
88
128
176
312
504
756
1,070
1,510
1,980
2,628
10.5
20.9
37
59
90
129
181
315
503
748
1,087
1,513
2,040
2,675
11.6
23.1
41
65
100
143
200
349
555
826
1,201
1,973
2,254
2,957
Clamp
Force
(lb)
2,266
3,734
5,522
7,574
10,110
12,968
16,103
23,798
32,918
43,179
54,364
69,041
82,294
100,106
7
7
7
7
2,594
4,133
6,256
8,457
11,393
14,464
18,240
26,576
36,266
47,239
60,900
76,451
93,694
122,646
7
7
7
7
7
F593
U
F593
G or H
SIZE
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
5
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
TORQUE VALUES FOR BOLTS LUBRICATED WITH AN ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND
GRADE 2
T.S. = 74,000 PSI to DIA
T.S. = 60,000 PSI 7/8 to 1-1/2 DIA
Max.
Clamp
Dia-Threads
Min. Torque
Torque
Force
(ft-lbf)
Per Inch
(ft-lbf)
(lb)
1/4 20
4.3
4.7
1,320
5/16 18
7.8
8.7
2,160
3/8 16
14.3
15.8
3,200
7/16 14
21.4
23.6
4,380
1/2 13
36
39
5,840
9/16 12
50
55
7,500
5/8 11
71
79
9,300
3/4 10
125
138
13,800
7/8 9
118
130
11,400
18
178
197
15,000
1 1/8 7
249
276
18,900
1 1/4 7
356
394
24,000
1 3/8 6
470
520
28,600
1 1/2 6
620
685
34,800
1/4 28
5/16 24
3/8 24
7/16 20
1/2 20
9/16 18
5/8 18
3/4 16
7/8 14
14
1 1/8 12
1 1/4 12
1 3/8 12
1 1/2 12

4.3
4.7
8.6
9.5
16.4
18.1
25
28
39
43
57
63
78
87
139
154
132
146
192
213
285
315
392
433
527
583
698
772
1,500
2,400
3,620
4,900
6,600
8,400
10,600
15,400
12,600
16,400
21,200
26,600
32,500
39,100
SIZE
GRADE 5
T.S. = 120,000 PSI to 1 DIA
T.S. = 105,000 PSI 1-1/8 to 1-1/2 DIA
Min.
Torque
(ft-lbf)
5.7
12.1
21.4
36
53
78
107
185
306
456
570
798
1,040
1,382
Max.
Torque
(ft-lbf)
6.3
13.4
23.6
39
59
87
118
205
339
504
630
882
1,150
1,528
7.1
13.5
25
39
64
86
121
214
335
499
627
884
1,197
1,568
7.9
15
28
43
71
95
134
236
370
551
693
977
1,323
1,733
2,320
3,700
5,600
7,550
10,700
12,950
16,300
23,800
32,400
42,200
47,500
59,600
73,000
87,700
DWG NO
DS00008
NONE
7
7
7
7
REV
A
SCALE
Clamp
Force
(lb)
2,020
3,340
4,940
6,800
9,050
11,600
14,400
21,300
29,400
38,600
42,300
53,800 7
64,100 7
78,000 7
WT LBS
SHEET
F
6
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
GRADE 8

Max.
Clamp
Dia-Threads
Min. Torque
Torque
Force
(ft-lbf)
Per Inch
(ft-lbf)
(lb)
1/4 20
8.6
9.5
2,860
5/16 18
17.8
19.7
3,720
3/8 16
32
35
7,000
7/16 14
50
55
9,550
1/2 13
78
87
12,750
9/16 12
107
118
16,100
5/8 11
157
173
20,350
3/4 10
271
299
30,100
7/8 9
428
473
41,600
18
641
709
54,500
1 1/8 7
912
1,008
68,700
1 1/4 7
1,297
1,433
87,200
1 3/8 6
1,696
1,874
104,000
1 1/2 6
2,252
2,489
126,500
1/4 28
5/16 24
3/8 24
7/16 20
1/2 20
9/16 18
5/8 18
3/4 16
7/8 14
14
1 1/8 12
1 1/4 12
1 3/8 12
1 1/2 12

10
11
3,280
17.8
19.7
5,220
36
39
7,900
57
63
10,700
86
95
14,400
121
134
18,250
171
189
23,000
299
331
33,600
470
520
45,800
713
788
59,700
1,026
1,134
77,000
1,425
1,575
96,600
1,938
2,142
11,840
2,537
2,804
142,200
SIZE
HOLO-KROME
7
7
7
7
7
Min.
Torque
(ft-lbf)
9.3
19
35
56
86
123
170
303
488
727
1,012
1,475
1,924
2,558
Max.
Torque
(ft-lbf)
10.2
21
39
62
95
135
187
335
539
803
1,118
1,630
2,126
2,827
7
7
7
7
7
7
10.7
21
39
63
93
138
194
338
539
798
1,133
1,635
2,195
3,577
11.8
24
43
69
102
152
214
374
595
882
1,252
1,807
2,426
3,953
7
7
7
7
7
7
3,750
5,920
8,050
12,150
16,250
20,700
26,200
38,000
51,900
67,600
87,000
109,400
134,000
201,000
7
7
7
7
7
7
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
Clamp
Force
(lb)
3,240
5,340
7,920
10,850
14,450
18,500
23,000
34,000
47,000
61,700
77,800
98,700
117,800
143,200
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
7
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
STAINLESS ASTM F593G & F593H

T.S. = 100,000 PSI to 5/8 DIA
T.S. = 85,000 PSI 3/4 to 1-1/2 DIA
Max.
Clamp
Dia-Threads
Min. Torque
Torque
Force
(ft-lbf)
Per Inch
(ft-lbf)
(lb)
1/4 20
4.3
4.7
1,407
5/16 18
8.6
9.5
2,319
3/8 16
15
16.5
3,429
7/16 14
24
27
4,704
1/2 13
37
41
6,279
9/16 12
54
60
8,054
5/8 11
74
82
10,001
3/4 10
91
101
10,271
7/8 9
147
163
14,207
18
222
245
18,635
1 1/8 7
314
347
23,462
1 1/4 7
442
489
29,797
1 3/8 6
580
641
35,516
1 1/2 6
770
851
43,204
1/4 28
5/16 24
3/8 24
7/16 20
1/2 20
9/16 18
5/8 18
3/4 16
7/8 14
14
1 1/8 12
1 1/4 12
1 3/8 12
1 1/2 12

5.0
5.5
9.3
10.2
17.1
18.9
27
30
42
46
60
66
84
93
102
113
162
180
242
268
352
389
489
541
660
730
866
957
1,611
2,567
3,885
5,252
7,076
8,983
11,328
11,470
15,652
20,387
26,322
32,995
40,436
48,616
STAINLESS ASTM F593U

Min.
Torque
(ft-lbf)
6.4
13.5
24.9
39
60
87
120
212
342
513
726
1,025
1,344
1,783
Max.
Torque
(ft-lbf)
7.1
15
27.6
43
66
96
132
234
378
567
802
1,132
1,485
1,971
7.8
15.7
28
44
68
97
135
237
377
561
815
1,135
1,530
2,006
8.7
17.3
31
49
75
107
150
261
417
620
901
1,254
1,691
2,218
F593
G or H
Clamp
Force
(lb)
2,266
3,734
5,522
7,574
10,110
12,968
16,103
23,798
32,918
43,179
54,364
69,041
82,294
100,106
7
7
7
7
2,594
4,133
6,256
8,457
11,393
14,464
18,240
26,576
36,266
47,239
60,990
76,451
93,694
112,646
7
7
7
7
7
F593
U
SIZE
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
8
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
CLASS 4.6
T.S. = 400 MPa
PROOF STRENGTH = 225 MPa
T.S. is for all dia.
CLASS 8.8
T.S. = 830 MPa
T.S. is for all dia
*Metric socket head screws*
METRIC SERIES
Diameter - pitch
Min. Torque
(ft-Ibf)
M3 - .5
M3.5 - .6
M4 - .7
M5 - .8
M6 - 1
M8 - 1.25
M10 - 1.5
M12 - 1.75
M14 - 2
M16 - 2
M18 2.5
M20 2.5
M22 2.5
M24 - 3
M27 3
M30 - 3.5
M33 3.5
M36 3.5
M39 - 4
M42 - 4.5
M48 - 5
M56 - 5.5
.4
.6
.9
1.7
2.9
6.9
14
24
38
57
81
112
151
193
280
381
514
656
852
1,059
1,586
2,535
Max.
Torque
(ft-Ibf)
.5
.73
1.1
2.1
3.7
8.9
17
31
48
74
104
145
196
251
365
496
670
857
1112
1380
2069
3310
Clamp
Force
(Ib)
183
247
320
516
732
1,331
2,106
3,055
4,177
5,664
6,975
8,851
10,940
12,746
16,570
20,216
24,961
29,422
35,122
40,363
53,038 7
73,007 7
Min.
Torque
(ft-Ibf)
.9
1.5
2.1
4.3
7.2
17
33
57
91
141
195
274
372
472
690
934
1,267
1,627
2,102
2,599
3,899
6,253
4.6
Max.
Torque
(ft-Ibf)
1.2
1.9
2.9
5.8
9.9
23
47
81
129
199
278
388
524
671
974
1,325
1,787
2,285
2,966
3,681
5,518
8,828
Clamp
Force
(lb)
489
659
854
1,378
1,954
3,550
5,617
8,148
11,141
15,106
18,600
23,604
29,174
33,989
44,186
53,911
66,563
78,460
93,661
107,634
141,435
194,686
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8.8
SIZE
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
9
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
CLASS 10.9
T.S. = 1040 MPa
T.S. is for all dia
Diameter - pitch
Min. Torque
(ft-Ibf)
M3 - .5
M3.5 - .6
M4 - .7
M5 - .8
M6 - 1
M8 - 1.25
M10 - 1.5
M12 - 1.75
M14 - 2
M16 - 2
M18 2.5
M20 2.5
M22 2.5
M24 3
M27 3
M30 - 3.5
M33 3.5
M36 4
M39 4
M42 - 4.5
M48 - 5
M56 5.5
1.3
2.1
3.1
6.2
10.6
25
50
87
138
212
297
414
557
715
1,034
1,408
1,896
2,421
3,145
3,907
5,853
9,352
Max.
Torque
(ft-Ibf)
1.7
2.7
4.0
8.0
13.7
33
65
112
179
275
384
537
726
929
1,347
1,833
2,473
3,161
4,103
5,093
7,633
12,212
Clamp
Force
(Ib)
676
911
1,182
1,906
2,703
4,910
7,771
11,271
15,411
20,897
25,730
53,911
40,358
47,019
61,125
74,577
92,079
108,536
129,564
148,894
195,652
269,316
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
CLASS 12.9
T.S. = 1220 MPa
* Metric socket head screws*
Min.
Max.
Clamp
Torque
Torque
Force
(ft-Ibf)
(ft-Ibf)
(lb)
1.5
2.0
790
2.5
3.1
1,065
3.7
4.7
1,381
7.3
9.4
2,228
12
16
3,159
29
38
5,739
58
76
9,082
101
131
13,172
162
210
18,011
247
321
24,422
347
449
30,070
483
628
38,159
651
848
47,165
836
1,086
54,950
1,209
1,574
71,435
1,646
2,142
87,157
2,216
2,890
107,611
2,829
3,695
126,843
3,675
4,795
151,418
4,566
5,952
174,009
6,840
8,921
228,654
10,930
14,272
314,743
10.9
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
12.9
SIZE
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
10
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
TORQUE VALUES FOR BOLTS WITH AN ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND
CLASS 4.6
T.S. = 400 MPa
CLASS 8.8
T.S. = 830 MPa
T.S. is for all dia
*Metric socket head screws*
METRIC SERIES
Diameter - pitch
Min. Torque
(ft-Ibf)
M3 - .5
M3.5 - .6
M4 - .7
M5 - .8
M6 - 1
M8 - 1.25
M10 - 1.5
M12 - 1.75
M14 - 2
M16 - 2
M18 2.5
M20 2.5
M22 2.5
M24 - 3
M27 3
M30 - 3.5
M33 3.5
M36 3.5
M39 - 4
M42 - 4.5
M48 - 5
M56 - 5.5
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.3
2.2
5
11
18
29
43
61
84
113
145
210
286
386
492
639
794
1190
1901
Max.
Torque
(ft-Ibf)
0.4
0.6
0.9
1.7
2.8
7
14
23
37
56
79
109
147
188
273
371
501
640
831
1033
1546
2472
Clamp
Force
(Ib)
183
247
320
516
732
1,331
2,106
3,055
4,177
5,664
6,975
8,851
10,940
12,746
16,570
20,216
24,961
29,422
35,122
40,363
53,038 7
73,007 7
Min.
Torque
(ft-Ibf)
0.7
1.1
1.6
3.2
5.4
13
25
43
68
106
146
206
279
354
518
701
950
1220
1577
1949
2924
4690
4.6
Max.
Torque
(ft-Ibf)
0.9
1.5
2.0
4.2
7.0
17
32
56
89
137
190
267
363
460
673
911
1235
1586
2049
2534
3802
6097
Clamp
Force
(lb)
489
659
854
1,378
1,954
3,550
5,617
8,148
11,141
15,106
18,600
23,604
29,174
33,989
44,186
53,911
66,563
78,460
93,661
107,634
141,435
194,686
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8.8
SIZE
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
11
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
TORQUE VALUES FOR BOLTS WITH AN ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND
CLASS 10.9
T.S. = 1040 MPa
T.S. is for all dia
Diameter - pitch
Min. Torque
(ft-Ibf)
M3 - .5
M3.5 - .6
M4 - .7
M5 - .8
M6 - 1
M8 - 1.25
M10 - 1.5
M12 - 1.75
M14 - 2
M16 - 2
M18 2.5
M20 2.5
M22 2.5
M24 3
M27 3
M30 - 3.5
M33 3.5
M36 4
M39 4
M42 - 4.5
M48 - 5
M56 5.5
1.0
1.6
2.3
4.7
8.0
19
38
65
104
159
223
311
418
536
776
1056
1422
1816
2359
2930
4390
7014
Max.
Torque
(ft-Ibf)
1.3
2.0
3.0
6.0
10.3
24
49
85
135
207
290
404
543
697
1008
1373
1849
2360
3066
3809
5707
9118
Clamp
Force
(Ib)
676
911
1,182
1,906
2,703
4,910
7,771
11,271
15,411
20,897
25,730
32,652
40,358
47,019
61,125
74,577
92,079
108,536
129,564
148,894
195,652
269,316
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
CLASS 12.9
T.S. = 1220 MPa
* Metric socket head screws*
Min.
Max.
Clamp
Torque
Torque
Force
(ft-Ibf)
(ft-Ibf)
(lb)
1.1
1.5
790
1.9
2.4
1,065
2.8
3.6
1,381
5.5
7.1
2,228
9.0
11.7
3,159
22
28
5,739
44
57
9,082
76
98
13,172
122
158
18,011
185
241
24,422
260
338
30,070
362
471
38,159
488
635
47,165
627
815
54,950
907
1179
71,435
1235
1605
87,157
1662
2161
107,611
2122
2758
126,843
2756
3583
151,418
3425
4452
174,009
5130
6669
228,654
8198
10657
314,743
10.9
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
12.9
The following tables specify torque values for fasteners used

with Nord-Lock washers.
SIZE
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
12
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
NORD-LOCK Delta Protekt Washers with Zinc Plated Bolt 8.8

Oil
Washer Size
Bolt Size
Pitch
(mm)
NL3
NL4
NL5
NL6
NL8
NL10
NL12
NL14
NL16
NL18
NL20
NL22
NL24
NL27
NL30
NL33
NL36
NL39
NL42
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M14
M16
M18
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
M33
M36
M39
M42
.5
.7
.8
1.0
1.25
1.5
1.75
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
4.0
4.0
4.5
Torque
(ft-lbf)
Clamp
(lb)
1.2
3.0
5.8
10
24
47
82
129
197
276
385
525
664
968
1,322
1,779
2,295
2,960
3,663
540
944
1,529
2,181
4,047
6,295
8,992
12,364
16,861
20,682
26,527
32,822
37,993
49,683
60,474
74,861
88,125
105,211
120,947
Graphite
Torque
Clamp
(ft-lbf)
(lb)
1.2
2.7
5.2
9.1
22
43
74
117
177
249
348
474
599
873
1,192
1,600
2,067
2,663
3,297
540
944
1,529
2,181
4,047
6,295
8,992
12,364
16,861
20,682
26,527
32,822
37,993
49,683
60,474
74,861
88,125
105,211
120,947

Oil
Washer
Size
NL3
NL4
NL5
NL6
NL8
NL10
NL12
NL14
NL16
NL18
NL20
NL22
NL24
NL27
NL30
NL33
NL36
NL39
NL42
Bolt Size
Pitch
(mm)
Torque
(ft-lbf)
Clamp
(lb)
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M14
M16
M18
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
M33
M36
M39
M42
.5
.7
.8
1.0
1.25
1.5
1.75
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
4.0
4.0
4.5
1.7
3.9
7.8
14
33
64
110
175
268
375
524
714
903
1,318
1,798
2,422
3,125
4,030
4,988
719
1,259
2,046
2,900
5,171
8,318
12,140
16,636
22,481
27,651
35,070
43,613
50,582
66,094
80,482
99,590
117,350
140,281
160,963
SIZE
1.5
3.5
6.7
12
29
56
95
151
230
323
451
613
776
1,128
1,542
2,068
2,673
3,440
4,262
764
1,326
2,158
3,057
5,620
8,768
12,814
17,535
23,830
29,225
37,093
46,086
53,505
69,691
84,978
105,211
123,870
148,149
170,180
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
Graphite
Torque
Clamp
(ft-lbf)
(lb)
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
13
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)

Oil
Washer
Size
NL3
NL4
NL5
NL6
NL8
NL10
NL12
NL14
NL16
NL18
NL20
NL22
NL24
NL27
NL30
NL33
NL36
NL39
NL42
Bolt Size
Pitch
(mm)
Torque
(ft-lbf)
Clamp
(lb)
Torque
(ft-lbf)
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M14
M16
M18
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
M33
M36
M39
M42
.5
.7
.8
1.0
1.25
1.5
1.75
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
4.0
4.0
4.5
1.9
4.4
8.7
15
36
72
123
196
298
419
585
797
1,009
1,470
2,005
2,699
3,483
4,490
5,560
877
1,506
2,450
3,462
6,295
9,892
14,613
20,008
26,977
33,272
42,264
52,380
60,698
79,133
96,668
119,598
140,730
168,157
193,336
1.6
3.8
7.4
13
31
61
105
167
252
355
494
670
850
1,235
1,688
2,265
2,927
3,763
4,666
Graphite
Clamp
(lb)
922
1,596
2,585
3,664
6,744
10,566
15,287
21,132
28,551
35,070
44,512
55,303
64,295
83,629
102,063
126,343
148,823
177,599
204,126
NORD-LOCK Stainless Steel with Stainless Steel Bolt A4

Washer
Size
Bolt Size
Pitch
(mm)
NL3
NL4
NL5
NL6
NL8
NL10
NL12
NL14
NL16
NL18
NL20
NL22
NL24
NL27
NL30
NL33
NL36
NL39
NL42
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M14
M16
M18
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
M33
M36
M39
M42
.5
.7
.8
1.0
1.25
1.5
1.75
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
4.0
4.0
4.5
A4-70 w/ Graphite Lube

Torque
Clamp
(ft-lbf)
(lb)
0.9
1.9
3.7
7
16
32
54
85
130
183
256
349
441
643
877
1,182
1,525
1,968
2,435
SIZE
337
585
922
1,326
2,473
3,822
5,620
7,644
10,341
12,589
16,186
20,008
23,155
30,124
36,869
45,636
53,729
64,071
73,737
1.2
2.6
5.1
9
21
41
72
114
174
244
341
465
588
858
1,170
1,576
2,034
2,624
3,247
450
764
1,236
1,754
3,147
5,171
7,419
10,116
13,713
16,861
21,357
26,527
30,799
40,241
49,233
60,698
71,714
85,652
98,241
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
A4-80 w/ Graphite Lube

Torque
Clamp
(ft-lbf)
(lb)
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
14
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
NORD-LOCK Delta Protekt Washers with Zinc Plated Bolt Grade 5

Oil
Graphite
Washer
Size
Bolt
Size
Pitch
(TPI)
Torque
(ft-lbf)
Clamp
(lb)
Torque
(ft-lbf)
Clamp
(lb)
NL3
NL3.5
NL4
NL5
NL1/4
NL8
NL3/8
NL11
NL1/2
NL14
NL16
NL3/4
NL22
NL 1
NL30
NL33
NL36
NL39
#5
#6
#8
#10
5/16
3/8
7/16
9/16
5/8
7/8
1
1 1/8
1
1 3/8
1
40
32
32
24
20
18
16
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
7
6
6
1.1
1.4
2.7
3.9
9.1
18
30
47
73
104
145
254
408
617
771
1075
1410
1860
550
630
970
1,200
2,200
3,600
5,400
7,300
9,800
12,600
15,600
23,100
31,900
41,800
46,400
58,900
70,200
85,500
1.0
1.3
2.4
3.5
8.3
16
28
42
66
94
131
230
369
557
697
969
1,270
1,670
550
630
970
1,200
2,200
3,600
5,400
7,300
9,800
12,600
15,600
23,100
31,900
41,800
46,400
58,900
70,200
85,500
NORD-LOCK Delta Protekt Washers with Zinc Plated Bolt Grade 8

Oil
Washer Size
Bolt Size
Pitch
(TPI)
Torque
(ft-lbf)
Clamp
(lb)
NL3
NL3.5
NL4
NL5
NL1/4
NL8
NL3/8
NL11
NL1/2
NL14
NL16
NL3/4
NL22
NL 1
NL30
NL33
NL36
NL39
#5
#6
#8
#10
5/16
3/8
7/16
9/16
5/8
7/8
1
1 1/8
1
1 3/8
1
40
32
32
24
20
18
16
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
7
6
6
1.5
1.9
3.5
5.1
12
24
41
64
99
138
197
346
556
840
1,190
1,660
2,180
2,870
740
840
1,300
1,600
2,900
4,900
7,200
9,800
13,100
16,800
20,900
30,900
42,700
56,000
70,600
89,600
107,000
130,000
SIZE
1.3
1.7
3.1
4.6
11
21
36
56
86
122
171
299
479
724
1,030
1,430
1,880
2,470
780
890
1,400
1,700
3,100
5,100
7,600
10,400
13,900
17,800
22,100
32,700
45,100
59,200
74,500
94,600
113,000
137,000
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
Graphite
Torque
Clamp
(ft-lbf)
(lb)
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
15
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
NORD-LOCK Stainless Steel with ASTM A574 Bolt

Oil
Washer Size
Bolt Size
Pitch
(TPI)
NL3
NL3.5
NL4
NL5
NL1/4
NL8
NL3/8
NL11
NL1/2
NL14
NL16
NL3/4
NL22
NL 1
NL30
NL33
NL36
NL39
#5
#6
#8
#10
5/16
3/8
7/16
9/16
5/8
7/8
1
1 1/8
1
1 3/8
1
40
32
32
24
20
18
16
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
7
6
6
Torque
(ft-lbf)
Clamp
(lb)
1.7
2.2
3.8
5.8
13
26
45
70
109
148
216
378
607
916
1,300
1,810
2,380
3,140
870
990
1,500
1,900
3,400
5,700
8,400
11,500
15,400
19,800
24,600
36,400
50,200
65,900
83,000
105,000
126,000
153,000
Graphite
Torque
Clamp
(ft-lbf)
(lb)
1.6
2.0
3.7
5.5
12
23
39
60
93
141
184
321
514
776
1100
1530
2020
2640
910
1,050
1,600
2,000
3,700
6,000
8,900
12,200
16,300
20,900
26,000
38,400
53,000
69,600
87,700
111,000
133,000
161,000
NORD-LOCK Stainless Steel with ASTM F593 Bolt

Oil
Washer Size
Bolt Size
Pitch
(TPI)
NL3
NL3.5
NL4
NL5
NL1/4
NL8
NL3/8
NL11
NL1/2
NL14
NL16
NL3/4
NL22
NL 1
NL30
NL33
NL36
NL39
#5
#6
#8
#10
5/16
3/8
7/16
9/16
5/8
7/8
1
1 1/8
1
1 3/8
1
40
32
32
24
20
18
16
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
7
6
6
Torque
(ftlb)
Clamp
(lb)
5.2
10.3
18
28
43
61
85
104
166
251
356
497
653
859
1,300
2,200
3,300
4,500
6,000
7,700
9,500
9,800
13,500
17,700
22,300
28,300
33,800
41,100
SIZE
5.2
10.3
18
28
43
61
85
104
166
251
356
497
653
859
1,300
2,200
3,300
4,500
6,000
7,700
9,500
9,800
13,500
17,700
22,300
28,300
33,800
41,100
DWG NO
REV
A
SCALE
Graphite
Torque
Clamp
(ftlb)
(lb)
DS00008
NONE
WT LBS
SHEET
F
16
OF
16
DCF0045 (REV B)
General Lubrication Bulletin
General Lubrication Bulletin for

CE Drilling Equipment
REFERENCE
RIG/PLANT
ADDITIONAL CODE
SDRL CODE
TOTAL PGS
REMARKS
MAIN TAG NUMBER
DISCIPLINE
CLIENT PO NUMBER
www.nov.com

which is the property of National Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or
NOV upon request or upon completion of the use for which it was
loaned. This document and the information contained and
represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV.

RIG SOLUTIONS
Houston, TX 77041
DOCUMENT NUMBER
REV
CE-538E
06
Document number
Revision
Page
CE-538E
06
2
REVISION HISTORY
06
14.02.2012
Engineering Requested Change
TMH
05
07.12.2011
Spelling Corrected
TMH
04
06.12.2011
Spelling Corrected
TMH
03
24.03.2005
Updated Logo
02
28.02.2005
Updated to new template
Rev
Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
Reason for issue
GDH
GDH
Checked
Approved
BKF
PG
Prepared
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision
02
03
04
05
06
Change Description
Updated to electronic format from pdf to ms word in new template
Updated Logo
Spelling changed from Overrruning to Overruning.
Spelling changed from Overrruning to Overrunning.
Removed Recommended Lubrication Product Chart from the document.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
CE-538E
06
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
GENERAL LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINENTAL EMSCO

PRODUCTS DRILLING EQUIPMENT .............................................................................. 4
1.1
Crown and Traveling Blocks: .................................................................................. 4
1.2
Swivels: .................................................................................................................. 4
1.3
Rotary Machines and Unitized Rotary Chain Coupling: .......................................... 4
1.4
GB & GBH CATHEADS: ......................................................................................... 5
1.5
Drawworks, Compound Transmissions, Unitized Rotary Transmissions,

ECR Units & Pump Drives: ..................................................................................... 5
1.6
Electrohoist II Gear Box .......................................................................................... 5
1.7
Electrohoist II, IV & V Gear Box .............................................................................. 5
1.8
Airline Lubricators: .................................................................................................. 5
1.9
Duplex & Triplex MUD & Slurry Pumps: ................................................................. 5
1.10 Overrunning Clutch: ................................................................................................ 6

1.11 Caution: .................................................................................................................. 6
2
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS FOR TRIPLEX MUD PUMP TRANSMISSION

LUBE OIL ......................................................................................................................... 6
GENERAL LUBRICATION BULLETIN ............................................................................ 7
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
CE-538E
06
4
GENERAL LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINENTAL EMSCO PRODUCTS

DRILLING EQUIPMENT
Using the right kind of oil or grease on a regular basis extends the service life of machinery.
Where and how to lubricate is described in each Maintenance Manual for the particular
piece of equipment.
The following information lists the recommended type of lubricant to use. The equipment
user must insure that the lubricant selected meets or exceeds the specifications provided.
1.1
Crown and Traveling Blocks:
1.1.1 Grease - Use a multipurpose lithium base grease.

Ambient temperatures
0F to 125F (-18C to 52C) NLGI #2
-20F to 40F (-29C to 4C) NLGI #0
1.2
Swivels:
1.2.1 Main reservoir Use an extreme pressure, non-corrosive, anti-foaming gear lubricant.
0F to 155F (-18C to 68C) AGMA #6EP
-20F to 40F (-29C to 4C) AGMA #4EP
1.2.2 Wash pipe packing, oil seals and bail pins Use a multipurpose lithium bas grease.
0F to 125F (-18C to 52C) NLGI #2
-20F to 40F (-29C to 4C) NLGI #0
1.3
Rotary Machines and Unitized Rotary Chain Coupling:
1.3.1 Main Reservoir Use an extreme pressure, non-corrosive, anti-foaming gear lubricant.
1.3.2 Pinion Cartridge Use a multipurpose lithium base grease
0F to 125F (-18C to 52C) NLGI #2
-20F to 40F (-29C to 4C) NLGI #0
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
1.4
1.5
GB & GBH CATHEADS:

Use a multipurpose lithium base grease.
CE-538E
06
5
0F to 125F (-18C to 52C) NLGI #2

-20F to 40F (-29C to 4C) NLGI #0
Drawworks, Compound Transmissions, Unitized Rotary Transmissions, ECR Units &

Pump Drives:
Grease lubricated bearings, drum brake centralized lubrication system, and all
miscellaneous grease fittings Use a multipurpose lithium base grease.
0F to 125F (-18C to 52C) NLGI #2

-20F to 40F (-29C to 4C) NLGI #0
Motor couplings require a multipurpose lithium base NLGI #1 grease.

Electrohoist III, IV & V gear couplings require Texaco Crater Compound #0 or equivalent.
Oil lubricated bearings and roller chains Use a non-detergent machine oil as follows;
80F to 125F (27C to 52C) SAE 40
32F to 100F (0C to 38C) SAE 30
0F to 40F (-18C to 4C) SAE 20
1.6
Electrohoist II Gear Box

Use an extreme pressure, non-corrosive, anti-foaming gear lubricant.
1.7
Electrohoist II, IV & V Gear Box

Use an extreme pressure, non-corrosive, anti-foaming, mineral base gear lubricant.
Below 40F* to 80F (4C to 26C) AGMA #3EP
80F to 120F (27C to 49C) AGMA #6EP
*Heaters are required to bring oil to 40F (4C) for starting.
1.8
Airline Lubricators:
Use SAE 10 Wt. Motor Oil.
1.9
Duplex & Triplex MUD & Slurry Pumps:

Use a extreme pressure, non-corrosive, anti-foaming gear lubricant.
Note: See Section 2 for initial filling of triplex pumps.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
CE-538E
06
6
1.10
Overrunning Clutch:
Use SAE 50 Wt. Non-detergent machine oil.
Equipment not manufactured by National Oilwell should be lubricated as specified by the
manufacturer.
1.11
Caution:
Do not mix greases with different bases. Always clean reservoirs thoroughly when
changing to grease with a different base.
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS FOR TRIPLEX MUD PUMP TRANSMISSION

LUBE OIL
National Oilwell has recently made a change in the design and material of the gears used
in our triplex mud pump line. The new gears will be made from a harder material which will
ultimately provide better performance and longer life but they do require some special
treatment during the break-in period. Effective immediately National Oilwell will begin using
specially designed gear oil, for the test runs in our manufacturing facilities, which is highly
saturated with liquid soluble molybdenum disulfide, and other extreme pressure and
corrosion resistant additives.
This oil will help to polish the gear tooth surfaces to prevent initial pitting which is common
on mud pump gears. This is especially important on the new harder gears as they are
more susceptible to cold welding and scoring during the break-in period. The product will
also provide rust prevention during storage periods. It is strongly recommended that the
End User also use this product for at least the initial filling of the pumps. At the first oil
change it would be at the users discretion whether to continue its use or change to another
AGMA EP gear oil that meets the general specifications.
A manufacturer of the above product is made by:
Schaeffer Oil & Grease Mfg. C.O.

Phone (800) 325-9962
Fax (314) 865-4107
Website: www.schaefferoil.com
If the operator chooses not to use this oil for the initial filling, then a 5% by volume of a
good Moly product, such as Dow Corning M Gear Guard, should be added to the approved
AGMA EP gear oil.
Implementation of the above recommendations will be well worth the extra cost of the
products by extending the life of the equipment and power savings due to reduction of
friction.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
CE-538E
06
7
GENERAL LUBRICATION BULLETIN
Oil Capacities for Continental Emsco Equipment
C-1 Type II
C-1 Type III
C-2 Type II
C-2 Type III
C-3 Type I
C-3 Type II
C-3 Type III
D-1
D-2
D-3
EH-II
EH-III, IV & V
Type AU= Catworks
W/Right Angle Drive
CT-5
CT-7
CT-9
D-221 W/Separate Lube System
D-232 W/Separate Lube System
F-350
F-500
F-650
F-750
F-800
F-1000
F, FA, FB & FC-1300
F, FA, FB & FC-1600
FC-2200
Unitized Pump Drive for
Electric Motor, Per Guard
F-350
F-500
F-650
F-800
F-1000
www.nov.com
Drawworks
105 U.S. Gal.
400 Liters
105 U.S. Gal.
400 Liters
110 U.S. Gal.
420 Liters
110 U.S. Gal.
420 Liters
60 U.S. Gal,
230 Liters
60 U.S. Gal.
230 Liters
60 U.S. Gal.
230 Liters
78 U.S. Gal.
296 Liters
115 U.S. Gal.
436 Liters
85 U.S. Gal.
332 Liters
41 U.S. Gal.
155 Liters
See Operation & Maintenance Manual
45 U.S. Gal.
170 Liters
50 U.S. Gal.
190 Liters
Compounds
130 U.S. Gal.
493 Liters
130 U.S. Gal.
493 Liters
148 U.S. Gal.
560 Liters
80 U.S. Gal.
303 Liters
80 U.S. Gal.
303 Liters
F-Series Triplex Pump
40 U.S. Gal.
152 Liters
65 U.S. Gal.
246 Liters
55 U.S. Gal.
208 Liters
55 U.S. Gal.
208 Liters
65 U.S. Gal.
246 Liters
75 U.S. Gal.
284 Liters
100 U.S. Gal.
380 Liters
100 U.S. Gal.
380 Liters
120 U.S. Gal.
454 Liters
20 U.S. Gal
76 Liters
Type F Unitized Pump Chain Drive
15 U.S. Gal.
57 Liters
30 U.S. Gal
15 Liters
30 U.S. Gal.
115 Liters
30 U.S. Gal.
115 Liters
30 U.S. Gal.
115 Liters
Document number
Revision
Page
D-225
D-375
DB-550
DC-700
DC-1350
DC-1650
T-1750 (S/N 181 Only)
T-1750 (S/N 182-253)
T-1750 (S/N 254-268)
T-1750 (S/N 269 & up)
T-2050 (S/N 31 Only)
T-2050 (S/N 111 & up)
T-2750 (S/N 89-94)
T-2750 (S/N 95-228)
T-2750 (S/N 229 & up)
T-3750
T-4950
T-6050
RT-3A Vertical
RT-3A Horizontal
Chain Coupling
LB-140
LA, LB-200
LA, LB-300
LA, LB-400
LB-500
L, LB & LC-650
www.nov.com
Duplex Pumps
25 U.S. Gal.
53 U.S. Gal.
58 U.S. Gal.
65 U.S. Gal.
100 U.S. Gal.
100 U.S. Gal.
Rotaries
6 U.S. Gal.
12 U.S. Gal.
8 U.S. Gal.
10 U.S. Gal.
5 U.S. Gal.
6 U.S. Gal.
9 U.S. Gal.
13 U.S. Gal.
10 U.S. Gal.
15 U.S. Gal.
15 U.S. Gal.
25 U.S. Gal.
Rotary Transmissions
21 U.S. Gal.
28 U.S. Gal.
1 U.S. Gal.
Swivels
3-3/4 U.S. Gal.
4-3/4 U.S. Gal.
6-3/4 U.S. Gal
10 U.S. Gal
15 U.S. Gal
19-1/2 U.S. Gal
CE-538E
06
8
95 Liters
201 Liters
220 Liters
246 Liters
379 Liters
379 Liters
23 Liters
46 Liters
31 Liters
38 Liters
19 Liters
23 Liters
34 Liters
50 Liters
38 Liters
57 Liters
57 Liters
95 Liters
80 Liters
106 Liters
4 Liters
14 Liters
18 Liters
26 Liters
38 Liters
57 Liters
74 Liters
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vol.
Chapter/
Section
Title
2.2
Spare Parts List

Recommended Spare Parts FD-1600
www.nov.com
Document Number:
D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 2.2
Revision:
01
Page:
Document Number
Rev.
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001
01
Recommended Spare Parts

FD-1600
RIG/PLANT
ADDITIONAL CODE
REFERENCE
SDRL CODE
TOTAL PGS
REMARKS
MAIN TAG NUMBER
DISCIPLINE
CLIENT PO NUMBER
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01

which is the property of National Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or
NOV upon request or upon completion of the use for which it was
loaned. This document and the information contained and
represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV.

RIG SOLUTIONS
12950 West Little York
Houston, TX 77041

DOCUMENT NUMBER
REV
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001
01
Document number
Revision
Page
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001
01
2
REVISION HISTORY
01
14.05.2008
Rev
Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
First Issue
Reason for issue
BTS
RLP
GDH
Prepared
Checked
Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision
01
Change Description
First issue
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Document number
Revision
Page
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001
01
3
SPARE PARTS LIST

This document provides a list of recommended spares. The list is presented by assemblies, and the
recommended spare pages are arranged in numerical order.
DEFINITIONS
This section provides definitions for accessibility of spare parts and recommendations of spare parts.
2.1
Spare Parts Accessibility
2.2
Spares
Category
Definition
Area 1
Area 2
Equipment operating within easy access to a National Oilwell Varco store or customers own
regional warehouse and expendable parts anticipated for operation of one year.
Equipment operating in remote areas.
Group I
Spares for one unit per year.
Group II
Spares to support up to two units operating in the area per year.
Recommendations
Operations
Recommendations
Equipment in
accessible
Area 1
Equipment in
accessible
Area 2
1 Lot of Spares for each unit.
2-3 years
operations
1 Lot of Group I Spares for each unit per year,

OR
1 Lot of Group II Spares for approximately each 2 units
Multiply Class A spares by 2.
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Document number
Revision
Page
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001
01
4
This page intentionally left blank.
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Document number
Revision
Page
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001
01
5
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
This document provides a list of recommended spare parts for the FD-1600 mud pump. The parts
are grouped to the sub-assemblies in which they are used.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Part No.
0-6316-0028-00
0-6316-0047-00
0-6397-0546-00
0-7501-1269-00
0-7502-0103-00
0-7602-1610-22
0-7602-1600-39
0-7602-2131-47
0-7602-2132-76
0-7602-0212-67
0-7502-0840-00
0-7502-0841-00
0-7602-2131-18
0-7602-0212-68
0-7602-0201-37
0-6316-0127-00
0-7602-1610-22
0-6316-0081-00
0-6301-0038-00
7817600438
0-6397-0548-00
0-6397-0546-00
0-7602-1070-03
0-7502-0581-00
0-7602-1071-13
0-7602-5940-00
0-6316-0049-00
Description
Power End Complete

Parts Drawing 6316-1001-03
Extension, Crosshead
Gasket, Crosshead Door
Spring, Diaphragm S.B. Lock
1-8 X 2 Soc Hd C.S.
Gasket, Inspection Door
O-Ring (Dia. Stf. Box)
O-Ring (Dia. Stf. Box)
Seal, Single Lip Oil
Seal, Double Lip Oil
Bearing, F-1600 Pinion
Gasket, Carrier
Gasket, Carrier
Seal, Oil
Bearing, F-1600 Eccentric
Bearing, F-1600 Main
Gasket, Plate
O-Ring (Crosshead)
Gasket, Plate
Bearing, Crosshead F-1600
O-Ring (Rubber)
Spring, Stuffing Box
Spring, Lock
Filter, Oil
Gasket, Cover
Element, Filter
Gasket, Strip
Gasket, Cover F-1600 Main Bearing
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Accessibility Area
Area
Area 2
1
Group Group
I
2
3
3
3
6
3
12
2
3
9
18
18
2
2
2
2
3
2
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
4
1
19 ft.
2
3
6
3
12
8
9
27
54
54
4
8
8
6
6
4
4
9
12
6
9
9
9
2
16
2
76 ft.
8
Document number
Revision
Page
7815926
0-6316-0039-90
0-6316-0092-00
0-6316-0093-00
0-6316-0096-00
0-6316-0107-11
0-6316-0164-00
0-6316-0354-00
1551703
0-6316-0360-00
0-6316-0362-90
0-6316-0363-00
0-6316-0364-90
0-6316-0365-00
0-6316-0366-00
0-6316-0367-20
0-6316-0369-00
0-6316-0373-00
0-6397-0293-01
0-6397-0575-00
0-6397-0603-00
0-7501-0051-00
0-7503-0230-49
0-7601-2588-50
0-7602-1600-25
0-7602-1600-40
0-7602-1600-44
0-7602-1600-52
0-7602-1600-61
6908033
6908040
05499400
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001
01
6
Pump, 2S B&S Oil
Fluid End Complete

Parts Drawing 6316-1002-01
Cover, Valve Pot
Seal, Valve Pot Cover
Disc, Baffle
Bushing, Lower Valve Guide
Clamp, Piston Rod
Cover, Liner End
Guide, Lower Valve w/ Bushing
Rod, Piston
Bolt, Lock (Valve Guide)
Head, Cylinder
Ring, Alignment
Plug, Cylinder Head
Plate, Wear
Ring, Liner Lock Thread
Lock, Liner
Seal, Cylinder Head
Seal, Liner & Wear Plate
Strainer
Guide, Upper Valve
Retainer, Upper Valve Guide
Screw, Valve Guide Retainer
Assembly, Hose
Nipple, Pipe
O-Ring (Disc Manifold)
O-Ring (Strainer Cap)
O-Ring (Liner Lock)
O-Ring (Suction Flange)
O-Ring (Suction Manifold)
Seal, R-39 Ring Joint
Seal, R-44 Ring Joint
1
1
1
24
3
9
3
3
3
6
6
1
1
1
3
1
1
48
72
3
12
6
24
9
3
6
9
6
6
6
3
3
3
72
9
27
9
9
6
12
12
3
3
3
9
3
3
144
216
9
36
18
72
27
9
12
27
18
18
18
9
9
24
96
Fluid End Expendables

Liner, Mission 4
1
3
6
6
3
3
3
3
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Document number
Revision
Page
012180170
05499450
012180196
05499500*
012180253
05499550*
012180337
05499600*
012180394
05499650*
012180535
05499700*
012180618
*
07211001
060155041
061101507
055413397
015180102
015180144
015180185
015180227
015180268
015180300
015180342
6308241
0-7601-0110-54
0-7601-0110-55
H-67376-L
0-7110-0115-00
0-7602-1800-15
0-7602-1810-26
0-7602-1810-27
*
Piston, Mission 4
Liner, Mission 4
Piston, Mission 4
Liner, Mission 5
Piston, Mission 5
Liner, Mission 5
Piston, Mission 5
Liner, Mission 6
Piston, Mission 6
Liner, Mission 6
Piston, Mission 6
Liner, Mission 7
Piston, Mission 7
For HP style liner, add HP to end of part no.
Gasket, Liner (all sizes)
Valve, Mission
Seat, Mission Valve
Spring, Mission Valve
Rubbers, Pair 4
Rubbers, Pair 4
Rubbers, Pair 5
Rubbers, Pair 5
Rubbers, Pair 6
Rubbers, Pair 6
Rubbers, Pair 7
Nut, Piston
Fluid End Tools

Chaser, 1-1/4-8 Tap & Die Thread
Chaser, 1-1/2-8 Tap & Die Thread
Tap, 1-1/4-12-2B Special Taper
Tap, 1-1/2-12-2B Special Taper
Puller, Hydraulic Seat w/ Puller Head to fit API #7
seats (Specify Manufacturer of Seats)
Pump, Hand Air
Gauge, Tire Pressure 5-50 PSI
These items should be available for
commissioning
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001
01
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
3
24
24
24
24
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
16
96
96
96
96
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
64
1
1
1
1
1*
1*
1*
Document number
Revision
Page
0-7602-3010-74
0-7602-3010-67
0-7602-3010-68
0-7602-3010-58
Power End Tools

Wrench, Square Drive Torque (600 ft.-lb.
capacity)
Machine, HY-25 SL 2-1/2 Square Drive
Hydraulic Torque
Pump, Air/Hydraulic 10,000 PSI Capacity
Socket, 3-5/8 Impact w/ 2-1/2 Square Drive
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001
01
8
1
1
1
1
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Document number
Revision
Page
This page intentionally left blank.
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001
01
9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vol.
Chapter/
Section
Title
Technical Documents & Drawings
3.1
3.2

3.3
3.4
www.nov.com
Performance Data
Document Number:
D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 3
Revision:
01
Page:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vol.
Chapter/
Section
Title
3.1
www.nov.com
Document Number:
D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 3.1
Revision:
01
Page:
Document Number
Rev.
Gen Arr, FD-1600 RMBD Single MTR CM632UUT
10830401-GAD-DOS
01
Order Cpt, FD-1600 RMBD PT Citra Tubindo
10830401-ASM-DOS
01
General Assembly FD-1600 Pump
6316-1000-03-DOS
Fluid End Assembly FD-1600 Triplex Pump
6316-1002-01-DOS
Discharge Accessory Manifold Assembly
6317-0125-10-DOS
Power End Complete (DBLHelix) FD-1600
6316-1001-03-DOS
Pinion Shaft Assy (DBL Helix) FB-1600
6316-0098-20-DOS
Crankshaft Assembly, Cast FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump
6316-1001-02-DOS
Crosshead Assembly F-1600 Series Pump
6316-0183-00-DOS
Lubrication Assembly Power End (Double Helix)
6316-0227-10-DOS
External Lube System, 460V Nema, FD-1600 RMBD SGL
10702595-DOS
01
Ext. Lube Oil Pump Assembly with Magnetic & Coalescing

Filters
1262028-DOS
Liner Spray System FD-1600 w/ Integrated Tank
6316-0275-14-DOS
03
Liner Spray Pump Assembly less Nema Motor
1290448-DOS
Stroke Counter Installation FD-1600 Pump
6911-2730-80-DOS
SD-8 Suction Desurger Assembly Triplex Mud Pumps
6922-0062-00-DOS
Fluid End Expendable Servicing Crane (Less Hoist)
6316-0020-20-DOS
Tool List for F-1600 Series Triplex Mud Pumps
6316-0250-02-DOS
Drive Assy, FD-1600 RMBD Single MTR CM632UUT w/

LRG Hub
10706968-DOS
02
Driveshaft Assy, F/ Large Motor Hub, RMBD Single MTR
10696042-DOS
01
DISCHARGE ACCESSORY
MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY
1 OF 1
6317-0125-10-DOS
-DOS
-DOS
335
EXT. LUBE OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
WITH MAGNETIC & COALESCING FILTERS
1262028-DOS
240
LINER SPRAY PUMP ASSEMBLY

LESS NEMA MOTOR
1290448-DOS
-DOS
Document number: 6316-0250-02-DOS

Revision: A
TOOL LIST
FOR F-1600 SERIES TRIPLEX MUD PUMPS
REQD
PART NO.
6316-0250-02
7602-3010-59
1
1
6397-0691-00
7602-3010-09
7602-3010-22
1
1
1
1
1
1
7602-3010-05
7602-3010-48
7602-3010-07
6316-0277-00
7602-3010-63
7602-3010-61
7602-3010-65
6316-0392-00
www.nov.com
DESCRIPTION
TOOL LIST FOR F-1600 SERIES PUMPS
(CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING)
SNAP ON SOCKET
(FOR MAIN BEARING HOUSING BOLTS)
BAR, VALVE COVER
SOCKET (FOR 1-1/2 HVY. HEX NUTS)
(CYLINDER THRD. RING & BLOCK TO FRAME)
SOCKET (FOR 1-1/4 HVY. HEX NUTS)
(DISCHARGE MANIFOLD)
BAR, SLIDING
PLUG, SLIDING
8 EXTENSION
WRENCH, CYLINDER HEAD
ADAPTER
SOCKET (FOR 1 STD. HEX NUT)
(LINER THREAD RING)
WRENCH, 12 POINT BOX
(FOR VALVE GUIDE LOCK BOLT)
EXTENSION, WRENCH
(FOR PART NO. 7602-3010-65)
1
REV
MADE CHKD
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE
APPD
DATE
D
SHAFT
KEY (NOT INCLUDED)

REF: 10626952-001
DRIVE BUSHING
DRIVE SHEAVE
(NOT INCLUDED)
MMW22230-FIXED
WEAR SLEEVE
MMW22230-FLOAT
7-1/8"
REF:
GEAR COUPLING 1060G (6.0")
PART NO. 10706699-001
24-3/8"
WEAR SLEEVE
B
28-1/8"
WEAR SLEEVE
31-7/8"
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
2. THIS DRAWING REPRESENTS AN ASSEMBLY OF KITTED PARTS FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR.
THIS ASSEMBLY CONSISTS OF ALL THE SAME COMPONENTS AS
PART NO. 10639419-001 (FOR SMALL MOTOR HUB)
WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE GEAR COUPLING.
3. IDENTIFY KIT WITH PART NO. "10696042-001" AND REVISION.
4. ALL PARTS TO HAVE LONG TERM STORAGE PROTECTION.
TRIPLEX PUMPS
PRODUCT:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
TOLERANCES ARE:
END ITEM:
5. SUGGESTED VENDOR:
NATIONAL PETROLEUM OILFIELD PRODUCTS
10650 WEST LITTLE YORK ROAD
HOUSTON, TX 77041
PH: 713-466-4040
NEXT ASSY:
X.X
.1
ANGLES
.50 DEG
X.XX
.03
FRACTIONS
1/16
X.XXX .010
10639419-001
SIMILAR TO:
FINISH
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
TOL < .06
250
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
2450
WT LBS:
BREAK EDGES .02/.03
CURRENT
INITIAL
DRAWN
R. RILEY
CHECKED
R.L. PAZ
APPVD
R.L. PAZ
TOL > .06
1000
07-DEC-12
DATE
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL

INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO,
L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR SUBSIDIARIES (ALL COLLECTIVELY
REFERRED TO HEREINAFTER AS "NOV"). IT IS LOANED FOR
LIMITED PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF
NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR USE OF
THIS DESIGN OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS INFORMATION TO
OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN
CONSENT OF NOV. THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED
TO NOV UPON REQUEST OR UPON COMPLETION OF THE
USE FOR WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED HEREIN
IS THE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NOV.
TITLE:
DRIVESHAFT ASSY, F/ LARGE

MOTOR HUB, RMBD SINGLE MTR
SCALE:
RIG SOLUTIONS
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
DWG NO.
1:4
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHT:
10696042-DOS
REV:
OF
01
DRAWN IN SW
RS-MECH_C-TPL-001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vol.
Chapter/
Section
Title
3.2

www.nov.com
Document Number:
D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 3.2
Revision:
01
Page:
Document Number
Rev.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vol.
Chapter/
Section
Title
3.3
www.nov.com
Document Number:
D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 3.3
Revision:
01
Page:
Document Number
Rev.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vol.
Chapter/
Section
Title
3.4
Performance Data
Product Datasheet FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump
www.nov.com
Document Number:
D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 3.4
Revision:
01
Page:
Document Number
Rev.
FD-1600-DAS-001
01
Product Datasheet
FD-1600
Triplex Mud Pump
RIG/PLANT
ADDITIONAL CODE
SDRL CODE
TOTAL PGS
REMARKS
MAIN TAG NUMBER
DISCIPLINE
CLIENT PO NUMBER
REFERENCE
FD-1600
Triplex Mud Pump

which belongs to National-Oilwell, L.P.; it is loaned for limited
purposes only and remains the property of National-Oilwell, L.P.
express written consent of National-Oilwell, L.P. This document is
to be returned to National-Oilwell, L.P. upon request and in any
National-Oilwell, L.P.
National-Oilwell, L.P.
12950 West Little York
Houston, TX 77041
USA
Phone 713-937-5000
Fax 713-937-5050
DOCUMENT NUMBER
REV
FD-1600-DAS-001
01
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
FD-1600-DAS-001
01
2
REVISION HISTORY
01
27.02.2006
Rev
Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
Issued for implementation
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision
01
Change Description
First issue
www.nov.com
Reason for issue
SB
PG
Prepared
Checked
Approved
Document number
Revision
Page
FD-1600-DAS-001
01
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
PERFORMANCE DATA ................................................................................................... 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ......................................................................................... 5

2.1
General Dimensions ............................................................................................... 5
2.2
Specifications for the FD-1600 ............................................................................... 6
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
FD-1600-DAS-001
01
4
PERFORMANCE DATA
7
6
(178)
(171)
3423
3688
Max. Discharge Pressure, psi
(240)
(259)
(kg/cm2)
Pump Speed,
Input HP,
GPM**
GPM**
spm
HP (kW)
(LPM**)
(LPM**)
1600*
719
669
120*
(1193*)
(2721)
(2532)
1467
659
613
110
(1094)
(2494)
(2320)
1333
599
557
100
(994)
(2267)
(2108)
1200
539
502
90
(895)
(2040)
(1900)
1067
479
446
80
(796)
(1813)
(1688)
933
419
390
70
(696)
(1586)
(1476)
800
359
334
60
(597)
(1359)
(1264)
5.99
5.57
Volume/Stroke, gal. (Liters)
(22.67)
(21.08)
*Rated maximum input horsepower and speed
**Based on 90% Mechanical and 100% Volumetric Efficiency
Liner size, inches (mm)
www.nov.com
6
(165)
3981
(280)
GPM**
(LPM**)
620
(2347)
568
(2150)
517
(1957)
465
(1760)
413
(1563)
362
(1370)
310
(1173)
5.16
(19.53)
6
(152)
4665
(328)
GPM**
(LPM**)
444
(1681)
407
(1540)
370
(1400)
333
(1260)
296
(1120)
258
(977)
222
(840)
4.41
(16.69)
5
(140)
5000
(352)
GPM**
(LPM**)
529
(2002)
485
(1836)
441
(1669)
397
(1503)
353
(1336)
309
(1170)
264
(999)
3.70
(14.00)
5
(127)
5000
(352)
GPM**
(LPM**)
367
(1389)
337
(1275)
306
(1158)
275
(1041)
245
(927)
214
(810)
183
(693)
3.06
(11.58)
Document number
Revision
Page
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
2.1
General Dimensions
Figure 1: FD-1600 Triplex Pumps (7'' x 12'')

Dimension, ft in (mm)
A
6 10 (2,083)
B
5 5 (1,670)
C
6 1 (1,864)
D
7 4 (2,245)
E
2 6 (768)
F
1 5 1116 (449)
G
4 11 (1,518)
H
1 9 (552)
I
1 1 (350)
J
1 0 (311)
K
16 0 (4,877)
L
8 0 (2,438)
M
3 2 916 (979)
N
3 6 (1,076)
P
3 11 (1,207)
R
3 (921)
www.nov.com
FD-1600-DAS-001
01
5
Document number
Revision
Page
2.2
FD-1600-DAS-001
01
6
Specifications for the FD-1600

General Specifications
Type
Pressure with 7 Liner, psi (kg/cm2)
Pressure with 5 Liner, psi (kg/cm2)
Volume with 7 Liner @ 120 SPM, gpm (Liters/min)
Volume with 5 Liner @ 120 SPM, gpm (Liters/min)
Nominal HP rating @ 120 SPM, HP (KW)
Type Gear
Gear Ratio
Lubrication
Valve Pots
Valve Pot Cover
Cylinder Head
Liner Lock
Crossheard Guide
3 - cylinder Single-Action Piston

3,423 (240)
5,000 (352)
719 (2,721)
444 (1,680)
1600 (1,193)
Double Helical
4.31:1
Pressure and splash to all moving parts
Valve-over-valve, API # 7
Screw Type
Screw Type
Metal-to-Metal
Replaceable
Bearings
Main Shaft Bearings
Eccentric Bearings
Crosshead bearings
Pinion Bearings
Spherical
Straight Roller
Roller, double row,
Straight roller
Dimensions and Weight

Size, Bore and Stroke, in (mm)
Pinion Shaft Size and Keyway, in (mm)
Discharge outlet, in psi (mm kg/cm2)
Suction inlet, in (mm)
Approx. Weight, Less fluid end accessories, lbs (kg)
www.nov.com
7 x 12 (178 x 304.8)
8.5 (216) O.D.- 2 x 1 (51 x 25) keyway
5 (127 mm) 5000 psi (352 kg/cm2) API Flange
12 (305) Flange, Female pipe thread
52,478 (23,804)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vol.
Chapter/
Section
Title
Vendor Documentation
www.nov.com
Document Number:
D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 4
Revision:
01
Page:
Document Number
Rev.
Instruction and Service Manual Model CM632UUT
10876548-201-MAN
01
Installation, Care and Operating Manual LS-National

Oilwell Pulsation Dampener Type 107.132.00 SM
107.132.00
03
Operation, and Maintenance Manual Reset Relief Valve

Titan Class Type C
M-34000
Type F Flanged Pressure Gauge
Instruction and Service

Manual
Model CM632UUT
CM Series
Induction Motor Powered by a Variable
Frequency Drive
Model No. CM632UUT-150E
Part No. 10876548-201
Model No. CM632UUT-150F
Part No. 10876549-201
REFERENCE
Model CM632UUT
Induction Motor

www.nov.com

500 Industrial Blvd.
Sugar Land, TX 77478-2898
United States
Phone: +1 (281) 240-6111
Fax +1 (281) 274-0426
DOCUMENT NUMBER
REV
10876548-201-MAN
01
Document
number
Revision
Page
10876548-201-MAN
01
i
REVISION HISTORY
01
19.06.2014
Rev
Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
Initial Release
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision
01
Change Description
Initial Release
www.nov.com
Reason for issue
J.B.
N.J.
B.M.
Prepared
Checked
Approved
Document
number
Revision
Page
10876548 -201-MAN
01
ii
CM SERIES MANUAL LIST
Manual Title
Manual Number
Part 1
Instruction and Service Manual
CM SERIES
Frequency Drive
Model CM632UUT
210-CM632UUT
Part 2
Drawing and Data Package
CM SERIES
Frequency Drive
www.nov.com
10876548-201-DWG
PART 1
INDUCTION DRILLING MOTOR

INSTRUCTION AND SERVICE
MANUAL
Model CM632UUT
CM Series
Frequency Drive
Manual Cannot Change without

Prior Approval of Notified Body
REFERENCE
Model CM632UUT
Induction Motor

www.nov.com

United States
Phone: +1 (281) 240 6111
Fax +1 (281) 274-0426
DOCUMENT NUMBER
REV
210-CM632UUT
05
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
2
REVISION HISTORY
05
23.08.2012
Updated the Declaration of Conformity
S.L.M.
N.J.
B.M.
04
06.07.2012
Update the Declaration of Conformity
S.L.M.
N.J.
B.M.
03
16.09.2010
Corrections Made
S.L.M.
N.J.
B.M.
02
04.08.2010
Include Hazardous Location
S.L.M.
N.J.
B.M.
01
26.05.2010
Initial Release
S.L.M.
N.J.
B.M.
Rev
Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
Prepared
Checked
Approved
Reason for issue
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision
01
02
03
04
05
Change Description
Initial Release
Include Hazardous Location For ATEX Requirements
Corrections Made
Update the Declaration of Conformity and the Motor & ATEX Nameplate. Add Revision Log.
Changed Manual Format.
Updated the Notifying and Notified Body on the Declaration of Conformity on pg 53.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION ............................................................................. 5

1.1
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 5
1.2
Safety Information and Warnings ............................................................................ 5
1.3
General Description ................................................................................................ 9
1.4
Motor Construction ................................................................................................ 11
INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................. 15
2.1
Receiving .............................................................................................................. 15
2.2
Unpacking and Storage ......................................................................................... 15
2.3
Inspection .............................................................................................................. 16
2.4
Location ................................................................................................................ 17
2.5
Foundation ............................................................................................................ 17
2.6
Alignment .............................................................................................................. 17
START-UP PROCEDURE AND OPERATION ................................................................ 24

3.1
Pre-Operation Equipment Check .......................................................................... 24
3.2
Power Connections ............................................................................................... 25
3.3
Start-Up Procedure (Uncoupled) ........................................................................... 28
3.4
Start-Up Procedure (Coupled)............................................................................... 28
3.5
Operating Information ........................................................................................... 29
MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................................. 30
4.1
Inspection Procedure ............................................................................................ 30
4.2
Preventive Maintenance ........................................................................................ 32
4.3
Preventive Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................ 32
4.4
Cleaning the Motor ................................................................................................ 33
4.5
Drying Procedure .................................................................................................. 34
4.6
Methods of Drying ................................................................................................. 35
4.7
Maintain Record .................................................................................................... 35
4.8
Bearing Lubrication ............................................................................................... 35
4.9
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................... 39
VARIABLE REQUENCY OPERATION ........................................................................... 42

5.1
Motor Capability Descriptions General ............................................................... 42
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
4
5.2
Drive Parameters .................................................................................................. 44
5.3
Service Condition .................................................................................................. 46
HAZARDOUS LOCATION APPLICATION ..................................................................... 49

6.1
Construction .......................................................................................................... 50
6.2
Standards .............................................................................................................. 51
6.3
Certification and Declaration of Conformity ........................................................... 52
6.4
Nameplate Marking Information ......................................................................... 54
6.5
System Protection ................................................................................................. 64
6.6
Variable Frequency Operation Considerations...................................................... 66
SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................................... 67
7.1
Motor Technical Description .................................................................................. 67
7.2
Spare Parts List..................................................................................................... 71
www.nov.com
SECTION 1
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
5
INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION
1.1
Introduction
This manual contains instructions for installing, operating, maintaining and trouble
shooting of the various induction motors built by National Oilwell Varco in Sugar Land,
Texas. This section of the manual is general in scope and designed to be used with
supplementary data and attachments, which provides information that applies to a
specific model or series of motors.
1.2
Safety Information and Warnings

1.2.1
Safety Procedure
WARNING!
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE CAN CAUSE SEVERE INJURY AND/OR DEATH.
TURN OFF AND LOCK OUT POWER AT MAJOR ELECTRICAL PANEL
Dangerous voltages are present in the motor and peripheral components which can
cause serious injury, electrocution, and equipment damage. To avoid serious injury
and/or equipment damage before any other acts requiring physical contact with the
electrical or mechanical working components of this equipment are performed all
equipment must be de-energized, disconnected and isolated to prevent accidental
contact with live or rotating parts. More than one source of power may be applied to the
motor.
The successful and safe operation of motors is dependent upon proper handling,
installation, operation, and maintenance. Failure to follow certain fundamental
installation and maintenance requirements may lead to personal injury, failure or loss of
the machine, as well as damage to other property.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
6
CAUTION!
MECHANICAL RISKS: Entanglement, Drawing-in, Friction, and abrasion
of upper limbs or entanglement of clothes exist by the shaft: Motors are
to be incorporated within a system. The final installer of the system
must guard the shaft extension in accordance with the requirements of
the machinery directive.
Only qualified personnel should be involved in the inspection, maintenance, and repair
procedure. All plant safety procedures must be observed.
A qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation
of the equipment, and the hazards involved. In addition, they have the following
qualifications.
a. Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground, and tag circuits
and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
b. Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as rubber
gloves, hard hat, safety glasses or face shields, flash clothing, etc., in
accordance with established safety practices.
c. Is trained in rendering first aid.
Motor should be installed and grounded per local and national codes to reduce
the potential hazard of shock from incidental contact. Insure motor is properly
grounded before energized.
1.2.2
Warning Labels
The following WARNING LABELS appear on the motor. The meaning of each label is
further clarified to provide additional understanding and how it relates to the safe
operation of the motor.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
7
Electrocution/Electrical Shock: The warning label shown below in Figure 1 is the

universal symbol for hazardous voltage and indicates a risk of electrical shock or burn.
The system should be turned off and locked out before servicing.
Figure 1 - Electrical Shock Safety Label

High Voltage: The warning label shown below in Figure 2 is used to alert the user of
the high voltage running in the machine. The system should be turned off and locked
out before servicing.
Figure 2 - High Voltage
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
1.2.3
210-CM632UUT
05
8
Safe Lifting and Handling Information appears on the Outline Drawing

contained in this Instruction Manual. Consult the weight of the motor and locations and
method to lift the motor. Confirm the lifting apparatus are suitable for the motor weight
shown.
1.2.4
Amperes for Sizing the Power Supply Cable appears on the Outline Drawing
and Data Sheets contained in the Drawing and Data Package. The size and insulation
requirement of the supply cabling (feeding the motor) is dependent on the location and
application of the motor. All supply cables feeding the motor shall be installed and
grounded in accordance with Local, National or Agency codes governing the
application.
1.2.5
Conditions for Motors Supplied to the E.U.
1. The End User must provide the protection for the motor in accordance with the
instructions in this Manual provided by National Oilwell Varco and the motor starter
and emergency button in accordance with the requirements of the Machinery
Directive.
2. An Imperial Tool Kit is to be supplied with the motor.
3. Metric Units must appear on the motor dimensional information.
4. Depending on the installation, the End Use or Final Installer must guard the exposed
motor shaft in accordance with the requirements of the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC.
5. This motor is a component for installation in machinery as defined in the Machinery
Safety Directive 2006/42/EC. Commissioning is prohibited until conformity of the end
product with this directive has been established with regard to all local safety and
installation rules.
1.2.6
The Noise Level of the Motor appears on the Data Sheets. When the sound
level exceeds 85 dB(A), ear protection must be wore in the vicinity of the motor.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
1.2.7
210-CM632UUT
05
9
Grounding
Grounding motor frames is required to safeguard personnel from electric shock and to
protect the machine itself in the event of an insulation failure in the machine or installation.
WARNING!
FAILURE TO PROPERLY GROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAY EXPOSE
PERSONNEL TO A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS CONDITION IN WHICH SERIOUS
OR FATAL INJURY FROM ELECTRICAL SHOCK IS POSSIBLE.
Refer to Section 3.2.3 for grounding instruction details.

1.3
General Description
The motor is an alternating current squirrel cage induction motor of forced ventilated
construction designed for use with Variable Frequency Drives only. The construction of
this motor results in a totally enclosed, forced air-cooled machine (IP45) with IP54
minimum terminal boxes. *Please refer to the ATEX Certificate for proper air flow
requirement of motor rating. The motor requires a minimum of 3400 SCFM to be
provided to the inlet of the motor.
The motor is provided with openings for duct
connections for air inlet and exhaust. Ducting must remain in place for certification.
The stator and coil assembly is an integral part of the frame with the stator laminations
welded directly to the frame structure. The motor frame is equipped with removable end
frames which provide support for the bearings.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
10
Figure 3 - Basic Construction Components
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
11
Principle Components Refer to Figure 3

A 3-phase induction motor has two main parts: A stationary stator (1) and a revolving
rotor (2). The rotor is separated from the stator by an air gap (5). The stator consists of
a steel frame (3) that encloses and secures the laminated stator core (4). The stator
core is made from thin laminations stacked to form a hollow cylinder. At the air gap,
along the inner circumference of the laminations, the stator laminations have evenly
spaced slots that contain the stator winding.
The rotor is also made up of punched laminations carefully stacked to create openings
(slots) along the air gap. Copper rotor bars (6) are inserted into the slots and connected
(short circuited) at each end by copper end rings (7). Bars are swaged to the slot to
avoid movement as a counter-measure against sparking and vibration. The rotor forms
a cage and is referred to as squirrel cage rotor.
The entire rotor assembly, consisting of stacked laminations, bars, and end rings, is
secured onto the shaft (8). The shaft rotates between bearings at each end (9) and
(10).
1.4
Motor Construction
1.4.1
Stator Core
The motor stator core is constructed from thin electrical steel laminations and coated
insulated to minimize hot spots and stack losses. The steel laminations are assembled
under pressure to form the stator core. The stator core is welded to the frame structure.
Insulated stator coils constructed of copper magnet wire are inserted in the stator slots.
The stator coils and core slots are insulated with electrical insulating material. The
stator assembly is vacuum and pressure impregnated with electrical grade varnish and
baked to insure proper bonding qualities, to give high dielectric strength and maximum
moisture resistance. Stator leads are routed to the appropriate location on the motor
frame for terminal termination.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
1.4.2
210-CM632UUT
05
12
Stator Winding
The stator winding is a series of copper coils placed in the laminated stator slots core.
The winding is connected so that a 3-phase power source produces a rotating magnetic
field. This magnetic field in turn induces a rotor field that interacts with the stator field to
produce torque in the rotor.
The copper in the stator winding is insulated with materials suitable for operation at
(Class H) temperature.
The thickness and strength of the insulating material are
suitable for the voltage stresses applied to the winding during the Variable Frequency
Drive Operation.
1.4.3
Squirrel Cage Rotor
The rotor is also made up of punched laminations carefully stacked to create openings
(slots) along the air gap. Copper rotor bars are inserted into the slots and connected
(short circuited) at each end by copper end rings. Bars are swaged into the rotor slot to
avoid movement and as a counter-measure against sparking and vibration. The rotor
forms a cage and is referred to as a squirrel cage rotor.
The entire rotor assembly consists of stacked laminations, bars and end rings. All
components are secured onto the shaft. The shaft along with the rotor assembly rotates
and is supported by bearings mounted at each end. The shaft has a tapered shaft
extension for ease hub installation for coupling.
For detailed information, see the
Outline and Mounting drawing included in the Drawing and Data Package.
1.4.4
Bearings
National Oilwell Varco motors are constructed with a two bearing configuration system.
The two types of bearing styles are ball/ball or ball/cylindrical (roller bearing) which is
grease lubricated and equipped with specially constructed seals. The non drive end is
insulated and the rotating shaft assembly is supported by a deep groove ball bearing.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
13
The drive end of the rotating shaft assembly is supported by a fixed ball bearing or a
cylindrical roller bearing - see motor outline for specific bearing application.
Bearing re-lubrication is required at 3,000 hour intervals or on a periodic basis to extend
bearing life. Bearing replacement is recommended at 25,000 hours of operation. See
Preventive Maintenance Schedule for proper lubrication and factory installed
lubricant specifications.
1.4.5
Frame
The frame is fabricated of steel members welded to plate end rings and press plates.
Steel foot plates are welded to the frame assembly to provide rigid support of the motor
and maintain its alignment with the driven load. Lifting provisions are installed on the
frame to facilitate lifting the complete motor with a conventional overhead hoist. A steel
cover is welded to the frame structure to provide additional stiffness to the frame.
1.4.6
Accessories
National Oilwell Varco motors are available with accessories such as speed encoders
and other components required for motor application. The motors require a forced-air
ventilation system. Refer to the motor accessory description provided in the Drawing
and Data Package of this manual for specific information regarding the accessories and
configuration of the motor. (Motor Certification does not include accessories.)
If speed encoders are mounted on the NDE side of shaft, special precaution should
be taken to avoid circulating currents using appropriate insulated
hardware for installation.
All accessories must have certification ratings matching or more severe to maintain
motor certification.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
1.4.7
210-CM632UUT
05
14
Variable Frequency Operation
This motor is to be operated with (powered by) a Variable Frequency Drive. This motor
is designed to be operated with (powered by) a Variable Frequency Drive. The list of
approved drives is listed in the current ATEX Certificate. If there is any concerns about
any approved Variable Frequency Drive please contact the manufacture, National
Oilwell Varco, Sugar Land, Texas.
DRIVE-TYPE CAUTION
In order to maintain temperature in compliance with the
Increased Safety e label of this motor, the Variable
Frequency Drive that supplies the power to the motor must be
as designated on the ATEX certificate.
www.nov.com
SECTION 2
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
15
INSTALLATION
2.1 Receiving
The motor is skidded and secured prepared for shipment and can withstand most shocks
and rough handling incurred during transit. Before accepting shipment from the transportation
company, examine the motor carefully to determine if any damage has occurred during
shipment. Unpack the unit and carefully examine the frame and sheet metal for damage.
Inspect for the presence of moisture and make certain no foreign material such as packing,
loose fasteners or dirt have fallen into the motor during transportation and unpacking. If
transportation damage is noted, determine the extent of the damage, and immediately notify
the transportation company claims office and National Oilwell Varco in Sugar Land, Texas.
Be sure to provide complete and accurate details when reporting damage.
2.2 Unpacking and Storage
If the motor is received during cold weather, allow the unit to stabilize to room temperature
before removing the protective covering and packing material. This precaution will minimize
the condensation of moisture on the cold surfaces and the possibility of early malfunctions
resulting from wet windings or other insulating materials.
2.2.1
Unpacking
Unpack the motor with care to avoid damage to the unit. Connect an overhead crane to a
minimum of (4) lifting points provided on the motor, lift the unit from the shipping skid and
place it in its mounting location.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
16
CAUTION!
Failure to use lifting points and extreme care when moving the motor can result in
damage to the motor, other objects, or personal injury.
Avoid manhandling the motor and never apply a lifting force to structural points other than
those provided for that purpose.
2.2.2
Storage
If the motor is not to be installed in its operating location as soon as received, it should be
stored in a clean, dry area not subject to sudden changes in temperature and humidity.
Storage at normal room temperature is recommended. The motor should be covered to
protect it against dust, dirt, moisture and other airborne material while in storage. Consult
with National Oilwell Varco for storage recommendations when the motor cannot be stored
in a temperature and humidity controlled area or storage for a period of more than six
months is anticipated.
Space heaters, when provided in the motor frame, should be energized continuously
during storage of motor, but should be de-energized at time of installation and start-up.
Details of space heater power and connections may appear in the Drawing and Data
Package.
2.3
Inspection
Before installing the motor it is recommended that the unit be thoroughly inspected for
indications of damage or potential malfunctions. Carefully examine the exterior surfaces
of the motor for deep scratches, dents, damaged guards, loose or missing bolts, screws
and other attaching parts. Remove the screened or louvered covers from the ends of
the motor and inspect the rotor and stator and other internal components for loose or
damaged windings and lead wires, loosely mounted components, and the presence of
moisture or other foreign material.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
17
Remove all shipping materials such as blocks, straps, tapes, rubber packing, paper or
other material used to restrict movement of the rotor during shipment. Use low pressure
compressed air, 25 PSI maximum, to blow out all packing residue and dust from the
interior of the motor. Turn the rotor by hand to make certain it rotates smoothly and
without binding.
2.4
Location
The motor can be installed in any clean, dry, well ventilated area which allows a sufficient
unobstructed flow of coolant air and provides sufficient accessibility for operation and
maintenance of the unit. Avoid locations which would subject the motor to excessive
moisture, dust, steam, or fumes from acids, alkalies or other corrosive chemicals. If such
exposure cannot be avoided, a strict periodic inspection and maintenance schedule must
be established.
2.5
Foundation
The foundation or support for the motor must be rigid, level and of ample size and strength
to support the weight of the motor and withstand the motor foundation reaction loads. The
foundation must also be adequately designed to maintain coupling alignment between the
motor and driven load. It is very important that the foundation is designed in such a
manner as to not have any resonant operating frequencies at or near the operating speed,
or at a multiple of the operating speed of the unit.
2.6
Alignment
There are three basic types of alignment: parallel, angular, and axial. Misalignment can
be parallel, angular, axial, or any combination of the three. An explanation of each type
of misalignment follows.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
2.6.1
210-CM632UUT
05
18
Parallel
Parallel (radial) misalignment, Figure 4, is the difference in position of the center of

rotation of one shaft with respect to the center of rotation of the other shaft.
Figure 4 Parallel Misalignment (For Reference Only)
2.6.2
Angular
Angular (face) misalignment, Figure 5, is the angle one shaft centerline makes with the
other shaft centerline at the coupling connection.
Figure 5 Angular Misalignment (For Reference Only)
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
2.6.3
210-CM632UUT
05
19
Axial
Axial misalignment, Figure 6, is the relationship of the motor rotor to the motor stator.
Figure 6 Axial Misalignment

2.6.4
Alignment Procedure
There are several methods to measure the alignment of two connected shafts. Two
methods are:
(a) Two dial indicators.
(b) Dial indicator and micrometer.
2.6.4.1 Alignment Considerations
The motor and driven-load should be located and leveled on the mounting base. Care
should be taken to eliminate Soft Foot Condition.
Soft Foot is the condition where the motor does not sit flat on its base and only three of
the four mounting points support the motor. When the fourth point is clamped down the
motor frame or mounting skid is distorted causing possible vibration or erroneous
alignment information. Soft Foot can be corrected by loosening each mounting point
one at a time, measuring the relative movement with a dial indicator, and shimming
under the foot to eliminate that relative movement.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
20
The relative movement should not exceed 0.005 inch. Shims with burrs on the edges
can contribute to the soft foot condition.
2.6.4.2 Alignment Measurement
Rotate the indicators so that they are at the top location. It is suggested to zero the dial
indicator when at the top location for convenience. The coupling hub should be marked
at 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees and a stationary reference mark placed or identified on
the equipment so that when the shafts are rotated, they can be indexed through 90
degree increments. Both shafts should be rotated together.
An easy way to record the measurements is to draw two circles on paper, one for
parallel and one for angular measurements. Also, record the radius of the measurement
point for the angular (face) measurement.
Figure 7- Dial Indicator Setup

Figure 7 shows a typical dial indicator setup. Rotate the shafts one-quarter turn and
record the dial indicator measurements. Take measurements at; 90, 180, 270 and 360
(0) degrees locations. The dial indicators should read zero when returning to the top
(starting or 0 degree) location. If the indicators do not read zero, disregard the
measurements and repeat the procedure. Figure 8 and 9 shows a typical set of
measurements and their corresponding Total Indicator Readings (TIR). Once these
measurements are recorded, the relationship of the measurements to the allowable
misalignment in Table 1 can be determined by subtracting measurements in each plane
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
21
to find the Total Indicator Reading (TIR) value.
Figure 8- Typical Parallel (Radial) Measurements
Figure 9- Typical Angular (Face) Misalignment

Table 1 lists maximum allowable parallel and angular misalignment for two bearing
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO motors. After the initial measurements are taken, the
motor must be aligned and shimmed to achieve the acceptable alignment
measurements.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
22
Allowable Misalignment
Speed
Axial
(RPM)
(inch)
0 to 900
0.002
0.0005 in. / in. radius to

measurement point
0 0.067
901 to 1200
0.002

measurement point
0 0.067
1201 to 1800
0.001

measurement point
0 0.067
Table 1 - Maximum Allowable Shaft Misalignment for Two Bearing Motors

It is a good practice to first correct the parallel and angular misalignment in the
horizontal plane. Jack screws attached to the skid can be used to adjust the location in
the horizontal plane. Once corrections are made, a new set of alignment measurements
should be taken. If the alignment in the horizontal plane is within limits, then proceed
with correction in the vertical plane. The proper corrections can be determined through
careful evaluations of the measurements. Corrections for parallel and angular
misalignment may be made together. After any corrections are made in the alignment,
new measurements must be taken for all three forms of misalignment.
Once alignment is completed, it is a good practice to record measurements for future
reference.
2.6.5
Coupling
The machine must be connected to the driven equipment with flexible couplings. (pin
coupling, gear coupling)
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
23
CAUTION!
Careful alignment of machines, when using either solid (rigid) or flexible couplings, is
essential to prevent excessive vibration, hot bearings, or shaft failures.
Couplings must be properly sized to be capable of driving maximum machine torque.
Interference fits should be used between motor shaft and coupling.
www.nov.com
SECTION 3
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
24
START-UP PROCEDURE AND OPERATION
3.1
Pre-Operation Equipment Check

After the motor and control equipment is completely installed and wired, but before
operating the unit for the first time, perform the following inspections.
1. Check all interconnecting wiring against the connection diagrams supplied with
the motor.
2. Make certain no foreign objects are lodged in the motor, all guards and safety
devices are securely in place. Remove all materials not required for operation
from the vicinity of all rotating equipment.
3. Ensure that mounting hardware, covers and guards are properly installed and
securely in place.
4. Be sure that the bearings are appropriately lubricated per the bearing lubrication
instructions provided in Paragraph 4.8.
5. If the motor has been subjected to extreme dampness during shipment or
storage, it may be necessary to dry out the winding prior to placing the unit into
operation. Refer to the MAINTENANCE SECTION of this manual for procedures
for testing winding insulation resistance and procedures for drying the winding
insulation. A motor being placed into service after being subjected to very low
temperatures should be slowly warmed to prevent condensation. Space heaters
must be turned off prior to motor start up.
6. Ensure the ground connection is properly installed.
7. Ensure main power leads are properly connected per the winding diagrams
contained in the outline and mounting drawing, located in the Drawing and Data
Package. Re-install all covers prior to operating the motor.
8. Verify RTDs for monitoring, winding and bearing temperatures are functioning.
Visually inspect the motor for evidence of any damage that would interfere with
protective devices or rotation of motor.
www.nov.com
Check to ensure tightness of the motor
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
25
mounting bolts. Check bearing lubrication levels.

3.2
Power Connections
The following connections to the motor should be made and checked out prior to
startup.
Machine maximum amperes for sizing the power supply cables appear on the outline
drawing and data sheets contained in this manual.
The size and insulation
requirements of the cables depend on the location and application of the motor. The
power supply cables to the motor must be installed and grounded to the local electric
codes requirements.
Check the connections of the main power leads from the variable frequency drive to the
terminal leads at the motor. Proper spacing must be maintained. Motor leads are
marked T1-T2-T3 for a three (3) lead machine and (EU Nomenclature U, V, W).
Normally, motors are supplied as three (3) lead machines with neutral leads connected
together internally to the motor. Outline drawings and connection diagrams in this
manual will indicate how the connections are to be made. For motors fed by Variable
Frequency Drives, the neutral if present is not grounded. Ensure that the line voltage
and frequency correspond to that shown on the motor nameplate.
If machine is exposed to humidity and foreign particles it is highly recommended to

properly insulate the motor lead bus bars inside main terminal box.
Particular care must be exercised connecting the starting device phase leads to the
motor. The leads must have the proper sequence applied by the Variable Frequency
Drive to obtain the desired motor rotation. (For example, phase sequence L1-L2-L3 of
the power supply connected to motor terminals T1-T2-T3 will give clockwise rotation
facing the non-drive end of the motor). Reversing (L1) & (L3) of the power supply leads
will produce rotation in the opposite direction.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
26
Connections of main power supply cables to the motor must be in accordance with IEC
60034-8.
NOTE!
If there is any doubt about rotation and phasing, the motor can be bumped to
indicate the direction of rotation by momentarily energizing the motor.
minimum of two people should check this, one at the motor and one at the
starting device with good visual/oral communication via radio. For the purpose of
bumping the motor to determine rotation, the starting device should energize
the motor only as long as it takes to cause the motor to break-away and begin
to rotate. If the rotation is incorrect, remove power from motor and allow motor to
coast to a stop. Reverse L1 & L3 of the power supply connections to the motor to
correct the rotation.
3.2.1
Space Heaters
Space Heaters are provided in the motor frame and should be energized continuously
during motor storage. (Note: During start-up and operation of the motor, the
heaters should be de-energized.) See motor outline drawing for space heater wire
diagram and power information.
3.2.2
Winding and Bearing RTDs
The bearing housings are equipped with seals and includes provisions for re-lubrication
during operation.
Each bearing is equipped with one 100 ohm platinum resistive
temperature device for monitoring temperature. The temperature of the bearings should
be monitored during operation. The alarm point should be set at 90C and shut down
initiated at 100C.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
27
The stator of the motor is equipped with six 100 ohm platinum resistive temperature
devices (embedded between the coils of the stator) two per phase. The stator coils
embedded in the laminated core receive a Global VPI of non-hygroscopic resin. The
stator insulation system is Class H. For proper insulation protection, the RTD relays
should be set for alarm at 185C max, and shutdown at 190C max. The winding RTD
leads are internally shielded in the terminal block of motor terminal box.
3.2.3
Grounding Instructions
Grounding motor frames is required to safeguard personnel from electric shock and to
protect the machine itself in the event of an insulation failure in the machine or installation.
WARNING!
FAILURE TO PROPERLY GROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAY EXPOSE
PERSONNEL TO A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS CONDITION IN WHICH SERIOUS
OR FATAL INJURY FROM ELECTRICAL SHOCK IS POSSIBLE.
Grounding conductors must be provided between the machine frame and the supporting
structure. The purpose for this is to avoid hazardous potential voltage difference between
the machine frame and the adjacent surface on which a person may be standing while
contacting the machine surface.
Grounding of the motor and its auxiliary equipment or boxes are compulsory and must
be performed in accordance with current regulations.
The motor frame provides a
grounding pad as provision for a connection with 3/8 16 bolting.
Main connection box and auxiliary boxes provided with motor are tested and grounded,
and must not be removed.
Before installing the terminal lug on the ground cable, remove paint, rust, and oil from all
surfaces to which the cables are attached. Bolt lug securely to the surfaces and torque
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
28
the bolt or nut to 20 lb. ft. (27.12 Nm). After installation, protect the ground pad bolt,
washer, and cable lug connection from corrosion by applying a rust inhibitor on the
exposed components.
3.3
Start-Up Procedure (Uncoupled)

1. Verify correct shaft rotation; to change rotation reverse power leads as indicated in
Section 3.2.
2. Energize machine using the Variable Frequency Drive, run standard ID run and save
data, run machine for at least one hour and make sure unusual noise or vibration are
present in the machine.
3. Verify that all instrumentation are functional (Bearing and Winding RTDs, encoders
if applies, and any other instrument device provided with this unit.)
3.4
Start-Up Procedure (Coupled)

1. After rotation is verified to be correct, the motor can be started using the Variable
Frequency Drive.
2. Check the motor drive parameters full load amperes (AC amps) and confirm with the
full load current values listed in this manual. The phase currents should be balanced
within +/- 5%.
3. Temperature-monitoring equipment must be available, monitor the stator and/or
bearing RTD temperatures for safe operation. Any sudden change in temperature on
either stator RTDs or bearing RTDs is cause for shutdown. Otherwise, temperature
should gradually rise and stabilize within the 4-hour period.
4. Check the motor frame and enclosures for evidence of any excessive vibration. If
the motor frame or enclosures are vibrating excessively, the motor should be shut
down and the cause of vibration located and corrected.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
29
5. Once the motor is started, it will remain at approximately to pre-set speed, unless
voltage is lost to the main machine terminals.
The machine will trip the drive
protection if the load applied to the shaft is increased to a value outside of the
normal operating limits or the torque of the load exceeds the break down torque for
which the motor is designed.
Normally, Variable Frequency Drive will contain relays to protect the motor from
overcurrent, overtemperature, stall, and excessive torque. These relays will open,
and disconnect the motor from the electric drive when abnormal conditions occur.
Vibration detection devices may also be used to disconnect the motor during
excessive vibration.
6. If after starting the motor, a shut down and attempt to restart is required; the
Instruction Manual should be followed for the number of allowable successive starts
per hour.
3.5
Operating Information
Motor is designed to operate with a Variable Frequency Drive. Consult the Variable
Frequency Operation Section supplied with this motor that appears in Section 5 of this
manual.
www.nov.com
SECTION 4
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
30
MAINTENANCE
4.1
Inspection Procedure
Prior to beginning the inspection, the following items should be available: Inspection
light, basic hand tools and wrenches, overhead lifting equipment, electric/pneumatic
wire brush suitable for the area classification, roughing/sanding pads, safety solvent,
personal protective equipment, etc.
Inspections should be conducted by qualified
personnel.
Step 1:
Inspect exterior bolting all bolts should be present, tight and free of rust and
dirt.
Bolts should not show evidence of sparking (pitting, burned, or
blackened areas or paint powdering would be evidence of sparking). Clean

and reinspect.
Step 2:
Remove end covers and side panels inspect all mating surfaces, flange
overlaps, and areas where covers are adjacent to metal parts on motor
exterior for indications of sparking or localized heating. Clean and reinspect.
Step 3:
Inspect interior look for evidence of sparking on interior joints, bearing

brackets, bearing bolts, etc. Clean and reinspect.
Step 4:
Inspect rotor look for evidence of sparking at rotor bar to shorting ring bolts
and rotor bolts and between the rotor bars and the laminations at the edges of
the slots at the end of the core and at each air duct. Clean and reinspect.
Step 5:
www.nov.com
Inspect gaskets look for evidence of damage to gaskets, replace them if

missing, broken, deformed or hardened.
Document number
Revision
Page
Step 6:
210-CM632UUT
05
31
General inspection while motor is open, inspect interior for cleanliness, filter
conditions, insulation cracks, loose bolts or brackets, leaks, or evidence of
end-turn movement. Clean or schedule shop maintenance as needed. See
repair caution below.
Step 7:
Test station observers should view internal joints and the rotor to stator air
gap and start motor while watching for sparks. Repeat test start if needed.
Step 8:
Clean using safety solvent, wire brush and roughing/sanding pads, clean
both sides of mating surfaces of air shields and end and side covers at bolt
connection points. Be sure to clean both metal components and not just
under bolt heads. Bare metal should be showing.
REPAIR CAUTION
In order to maintain compliance with the Certified ATEX standards incorporated on
this motor, any repair must be performed by National Oilwell Varco manufacturing
facility in Sugar Land, Texas.

Sugar Land, Texas USA 77478
Phone: (281) 260-6111
Fax: (281) 240-5074
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
4.2
210-CM632UUT
05
32
Preventive Maintenance
A routine regular preventive maintenance program practiced conscientiously will ensure
peak performance, extend motor life and minimize or eliminate equipment breakdowns.
The following preventive maintenance schedule is a guide for establishing a preventive
maintenance program for motors operating under standard conditions. Specific operating
conditions should be analyzed by the equipment user and a preventive maintenance
program established accordingly.
4.3
Preventive Maintenance Schedule

Under standard operating conditions, the following maintenance and inspections should
be performed every 30 days.
1. With the motor stopped, clean the outside of the motor and its ventilation
screens, to remove dirt, dust, oil or other contaminants.
2. With the motor stopped, inspect the motor for loose or damaged windings,
cracked, burned or broken insulation, loose mounting components, loose hold
down bolts, and the presence of moisture or other foreign material.
3. With the motor stopped, inspect the area surrounding the bearings for signs of
excessive leakage of oil or grease. Lubricate the bearings in accordance with the
recommendations set forth in the bearing lubrication instructions provided in
Section 4.8 of this manual.
4. With the motor stopped, inspect the lead wires and control device wiring for
cracked or damaged insulation and loose terminals.
5. With the motor running, observe any unusual noise or vibration.
6. With the motor running, inspect the motor control and monitoring devices for
correct adjustment and operation.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
4.4
210-CM632UUT
05
33
Cleaning the Motor

Cleaning the motor is essential to long-term motor life. When the drilling motor is
removed from its machinery, accumulated dirt and oil buildup can be removed. The
external motor surfaces can be cleaned by steam cleaning. The internal motor
components should not be sprayed with a steam cleaner. To clean the motor:
1. Clean the external motor surfaces only when the drilling motor is removed from its
machinery and power is removed from the motor.
WARNING!
PERSONNEL
PERFORMING
CLEANING
PROCEDURES
MUST
WEAR
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, GLOVES, AND EYE PROTECTION. FOLLOW LOCAL

PRACTICES AND PROCEDURES FOR CLEANING.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY
RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH.

WARNING!
ALKALI AND CHLORINATED HYDROCARBON CLEANING SOLUTIONS SHOULD
NOT BE USED FOR CLEANING DRILL MOTORS DUE TO THE ADVERSE AFFECTS
ON MOTOR INSULATION.
USE OF THESE SOLUTIONS MAY CAUSE MOTOR
FAILURE OR REDUCED MOTOR LIFE.

WARNING!
DO NOT SPRAY THE INTERNAL COMPONENTS OF THE MOTOR WITH A STEAM
CLEANER.
MOISTURE CONTAMINATION MAY CAUSE MOTOR FAILURE OR
REDUCED MOTOR LIFE.

2. Cover the motor air inlet and outlet with heavy plastic and tape in place. Ensure
the interior motor components are protected from spray during cleaning.
3. Steam clean the external surfaces of the motor. Do not direct the spray at motor
openings or the plastic covers.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
34
4. When steam cleaning is complete, let excess fluid drain from the motor.
5. Remove plastic covers or protective covers and tape from the motor. Clean the
inside of the motor by using a vacuum cleaner or dry low pressure compressed
air, 25 PSI maximum, to remove any accumulation of dirt, dust or other gritty
particles. Stubborn deposits of grease, oil or similar substances on the metal
components that are located away and clear of the windings and insulating
components may be cleaned using a clean cloth moistened with a nonflammable
solvent.
WARNING!
UNDER
NO
MOISTENED
CIRCUMSTANCES
CLOTH
BE
SHOULD
ALLOWED
TO
THE
SOLVENT
CONTACT
THE
OR
SOLVENT
WINDINGS
OR
INSULATING COMPONENTS.
Deposits of grease, oil, or similar substances on the winding or insulating components
should only be removed with a clean dry shop cloth. Consult with National Oilwell
Varco in Sugar Land, Texas if the winding or insulating components are contaminated
to an extent where wiping with a cloth will not remove the contaminants. See Drying
Procedure.
4.5
Drying Procedure
If the motor has been subjected to extreme dampness during shipment, storage, or
cleaning, a procedure may be required to thoroughly dry all windings.
If the stator insulation resistance measures less than 2 megohms, the machine must be
dried out until at least the minimum recommended resistance value is obtained. The
drying-out process can be accomplished by applying either external or internal heat as
necessary to obtain an end-winding temperature of 167F (75C) by thermometer.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
4.6
210-CM632UUT
05
35
Methods of Drying
The easiest and most convenient method of drying out a motor consists of placing the
complete, or partially disassembled, machine in an oven. External heat also can be
applied by placing space heaters beneath the motor so as to obtain an even distribution
of heat along the length of the unit.
Care must be taken to provide adequate air
circulation during the drying-out process to insure a complete and thorough job.
CAUTION!
The temperature of the motor should be raised slowly to avoid building up
excessive vapor or gas pressure, which could prove harmful to the insulation. Do
not exceed a temperature rise of 18F (10C) per hour.
CAUTION!
Do not hurry the drying-out process. Never permit the temperature of the motor
to exceed the maximum allowable temperature rise marked on the name plate.
4.7
Maintain Record
It is advisable to maintain a record of the insulation resistance and humidity during
measurements for each motor. The measurements, taken at maintenance intervals, will
provide a means of detecting a gradual deterioration of the winding insulation. Such
records should list the prevailing site conditions, such as the test voltages, ambient
temperature and humidity, at the time of each test since these conditions will affect the
results.
4.8
Bearing Lubrication
4.8.1 Application
Grease lubricated anti-friction bearings (NGLI #3)
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
4.8.2
210-CM632UUT
05
36
Grease Specifications
A high quality NGLI #3 grease is recommended, with the following physical properties:
Soap Base..........Lithium
Dropping Point.............383oF
Worked Penetration Per ASTM D217...238 NGLI #3
Operating Temperature Range...-40oF to 275oF
Oxidation Inhibited..YES
Corrosion Inhibited..YES
Flash Point.415F
The use of the following grease is recommended:

Shell Oil Company - Cyprina - Product Code 504-538
4.8.3
Bearing Lubrication
Typically grease is periodically added to the bearing cavity to replenish grease

consumed by the bearing and to replace contaminated grease with fresh grease. The
frequency and amount of grease added to a bearing for each application is dependent
on the bearing size, speed, operating temperature, the grease used, seal condition,
ambient conditions etc.
The motor is factory furnished with the bearing properly prepared with the correct
amount of grease for initial operation. The bearing housing is equipped with provisions
for a grease zerk and a grease vent to facilitate the addition of grease to the bearing. At
each lubrication interval and during preventive maintenance inspections, the grease
seal area and adjacent shaft area should be inspected for signs of excessive leakage.
If excessive leakage is present the seals should be replaced and the shaft and seal
sleeves repaired or replaced as necessary.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
37
The recommendations for typical installations may need to be adjusted for specific
applications. In applications for standby use, the amount of grease may need to be
reduced to avoid over greasing. In applications of extreme temperatures or higher than
normal air born contaminates, the amount or frequency of lubrication may need to
increase. Please consult National Oilwell Varco in Sugar Land, Texas if you have
questions concerning a specific application. If over greasing occurs, the motor can
be run as long as the temperature of the bearing is closely monitored and the unit is
shut down when it reaches the alarm point specified in Paragraph 3.2.2. The bearing
temperature should always be monitored after relubrication. A slight increase in the
bearing temperature for several hours immediately after fresh grease is added is
normal.
Please consult with National Oilwell Varco in Sugar Land, Texas if you have
questions concerning over greasing or temperature fluctuations in the bearings.
Should it become necessary to remove the bearing from the motor, it should be
thoroughly inspected for wear or damage prior to re-installation, and replaced if
necessary. The seals of the bearing housing should also be inspected for wear or
damage and replaced if necessary. When re-installing the bearing, the bearing should
be hand packed with grease and the bearing housings should be packed to 1/2 to 2/3
full with grease. Care should be taken to insure that no foreign material is allowed into
the grease, bearing or bearing housing.
It is recommended that the following relubrication interval and amount be adhered to for
proper bearing operation and life.
For location or installations not re-greasing or repacking the bearings as routine
maintenance, it is recommended to replace the bearings every 25,000 hours or five
years.
Refer to Section 7 for bearing type.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
NOV Part No.
Bearing
210-CM632UUT
05
38
Grease Quantity
Interval
1030-20-0076
6330M
100 - 105 grams*
Every 3000 hours of operation or 3 months
1030-20-0080
7320
50 - 55 grams*
1030-14-0004
BC1-1330
100 - 105 grams*
10090160-001
6320
50 - 55 grams*
1030-08-0113
BB1-3039
50 55 grams*
*A typical industrial grease gun pumps approximately one gram of grease for every
stroke of the gun. Therefore 50 grams is approximately 50 shots from a standard
grease gun. This should be checked with each individual grease gun to assure the
proper amount of grease is used.
4.8.4
Bearing Operating Temperature
Monitoring of bearing temperature can provide a warning of an impending failure of a

bearing and prevent costly mechanical damage resulting from bearing failure. The
operating temperature of a bearing can vary depending on load, speed and the amount
of grease in the bearing. Monitoring of bearing temperature should focus on a sudden
increase in bearing operating temperature over temperatures which have been
observed as normal for a specific motor. A bearing should be closely monitored if its
operating temperature exceeds 210oF (99oC). The motor should be shut down and the
bearing inspected or replaced if the operating temperature of the bearing reaches 225oF
(107oC). The described limits above are to be determined by measurement of the
temperature of the bearing housing.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
4.9
210-CM632UUT
05
39
Troubleshooting
The most important item to keep a unit running with very little down time is to set up a
program for intelligently analyzing the malfunctions, and making the necessary
corrections. Although regular preventive maintenance inspections are conducted, be
alert between inspections for any signs of motor trouble. When a minor problem is
located, correct it immediately. Minor defects can result in costly repairs and down time.
Some of the more common symptoms, along with probable causes and helpful
remedies, are found in the following chart.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
40
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
Note:
Always disconnect the machine from the Power Source before

investigating a fault or performing any work on the motor.
SYMPTOM
Motor does
not start
POSSIBLE CAUSES
One phase is missing
The fuse has blown
REMEDY
Check. Reset circuit breaker or replace
fuses if open.
Over-voltage, under-voltage, or overload Check for cause of abnormal condition.

devices tripped (when protective devices Correct any deficiencies. Reset devices.
incorporated in circuit)
Check Motor Data Plate for nominal
operating values.
High motor Cooling air is too hot
temp.
Ambient Temperature is too hot
Adjust for sufficient ventilation for the

motor.
Overload
Check voltage and current to eliminate

overload.
One phase is missing

Fuse is blown
Stop running motor and check.

fault.
External blowers not working

Blower motors protection has tripped
Repair fault.
Repair
External blowers rotating in the wrong Change direction of rotation.

direction
Motor fan rotating in the wrong direction
www.nov.com
Fan motor or fan must be corrected.
Document number
Revision
Page
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE CAUSES
210-CM632UUT
05
41
REMEDY
Bearing
issues:
Vibration
Misalignment
Check and realign.
Noise
Mounting of components
Examine and correct defective mounting.
Temp. rise
Inadequate lubrication
thrust overloading
Lubricate.
Correct overload.
Increase of
the
rotational
torque
Case distortion
Seal damage or displacement
Replace bearings.
www.nov.com
SECTION 5
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
42
VARIABLE REQUENCY OPERATION

National Oilwell Varcos CM632 Series induction motors are specifically designed for Rig
Applications and Variable Frequency Drives. The loss distribution and performance has
been optimized for operation with Variable Frequency Drives. The motors capability is
described on the nameplate and in published curves.
This section of the Instruction
Manual explains the significance of the descriptions that define the capability of the motor
under variable frequency operation.
5.1 Motor Capability Descriptions General
The following diagram shows GENERAL capability ranges of a motor under variable
frequency operation. The SPECIFIC ranges are marked on the nameplate. Data sheets
and curves detailing the motors performance under Variable Frequency operation also
appear in the Drawing and Data Package.
Figure 10- Motor Performance Torque Vs Speed Curve (Reference Only)
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
43
Figure 10 shows a typical Speed-Torque Curve for rating values, please refer to data
sheets and curves for specific model number.
HORIZONTAL AXIS Speed of the motor controlled by a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
in RPM.
VERTICAL AXIS Torque of the motor Lb-ft units.
The intersection of 100% (full torque) and based speed, Point 1 Figure10 gives the rated
torque of the motor and its base speed.
Constant TORQUE SPEED RANGE (Line 2 Figure 10): The motor is capable of
continuously producing the torque equal to its rated. In this speed range, the motor flux is
kept constant by the drive; therefore, motor draws almost the same amount of current for
the same torque request at any speed.
Constant HP SPEED RANGE (Line 3 Figure 10): The motor is capable of
continuously
producing the power equal to its rated. At base speed, motor voltage reaches its
maximum. Beyond the base speed, motor voltage stays at its
maximum;
consequently,
motor flux decreases as the motor speed increases. The decreases of motor flux and the
thermal limitation defined by the rated current results the constant HP Speed Range, in
which the decreases of the torque is inversely proportional to the increase of the speed.
The speed range of constant HP is defined on the nameplate.
Reduced HP SPEED RANGE (Line 4 Figure 10): The motor cant hold the rated power
anymore, as the break down torque falls off by the square of the reduced flux. Instead, it
produces a reduced power, determined based on the breakdown torque (pull out) of the
motor at each corresponding speed.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
44
VOLTAGE: Motor voltage reaches its maximum at base speed, at speeds lower than
the base speed the motor voltage increases linearly with its speed. This is due to the
constant volts-Hz ratio controlled by the Variable Frequency Drive (VFD). Once motor
speed exceeds the base speed, motor voltage remains at its maximum, even with the
increase of the motor speed. Consequently, the volts-Hz ratio reduces with the speed
increase. As volts-Hz ratio reflects the strength of the motor field, point 1) gives the
speed beyond which the field weakening starts.
MOTOR COOLING: Motor is designed to operate with auxiliary blower at all times,
regardless of the drilling motor speed. Blower should be on when the main motor is
energized.
5.2
Drive Parameters
National Oilwell Varcos CM632 Series induction motors are specifically designed for
Rig Applications involving Variable Frequency Drive sources. The motor performance
has been optimized for a certain level of Flux present in the motor. The settings of the
Variable Frequency Drive control the Flux level and affect the temperature and
performance of the motor.
The following motor parameters when used in the Variable Frequency Drive program
will provide optimum performance to the motor.
When the motor is certified for
application in a Hazardous Area, the temperature rise and validity of the certification is
dependent on the drive providing output of the parameters shown.
The following are Drive-program parameters that affect the temperature and
performance of the motor with an explanation of the relationship. The specific Drive
parameters are located in the data sheets provided in the Drawing and Data
Package and on the nameplate.
Supply Voltage:
The 3-phase rms voltage into the Drive. This establishes the
maximum available voltage at the Voltage Level Point (Field Weaken Frequency).
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
Rated Power:
The Horsepower rating of the motor.
210-CM632UUT
05
45
Usually the units of this
parameter are in KW, which is 0.746 times the HP rating.
Voltage Level Point (Hz):
The Frequency where the maximum voltage is
supplied to the motor. Above this frequency, the voltage remains constant at rated
volts.
At frequencies higher than this parameter, the motor flux is reduced.
This
frequency parameter controls the flux level in the motor and the amount of magnetic
saturation in the motor. The No-load amps, full-load amps, slip, temperature, and power
factor are affected by this parameter.
Synchronous Speed (RPM):
The motors stator-field rotates at a speed that is
dependent on the number of poles and the applied frequency. The motor rotates very
close to this speed when uncoupled (No-load).
Nominal Speed (RPM):
When loaded, the conductors of the rotor cut the stators flux
and power is induced in the rotor. The rotor rotates slower than the stator magnetic
field, dependent on the amount of flux in the stator and the load torque applied to the
shaft. This speed is lower than the motors Synchronous speed.
Slip at Rated Load (RPM):
The difference between the synchronous speed and
the speed of rotor rotation at rated load in RPM.
Nominal Current (Amps):
The amp draw of the motor at rated voltage and
output. This value is obtained from test measurements using Current Transformers.
Magnetizing Current (Amps):
The amps drawn by the motor at no-load and rated
voltage. The motors magnetizing current (No-load amps) is affected by the voltage and
frequency applied.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
46
The magnetizing amps provide amp-turns to develop the magnetic flux in the motor.
Uncoupled or at no-load, the motor should draw the same magnetizing current to
maintain a constant flux over the range of constant Volt-per-Hertz slope.
Power Factor:
The
power
factor
parameter
defines
the
magnitudes
of
magnetizing-amps and load-amps.
Carrier Frequency:
The Carrier Frequency of the Variable Frequency Drives
PWM output affects the temperature of the motor. Higher carrier frequencies improve
the harmonic content and losses within the motor and result in lower temperatures. If a
carrier frequency is specified the value is a minimum.
Other parameters of the Drive program can be set with consideration for factors of the
Drive and the application. Limiting the motor current, torque, and power less than the
rated values will affect motor output.
5.3
Service Condition
5.3.1
General
Motors should be properly selected with respect to their service and operating
conditions. CM632 Series induction motors are designed for operation in accordance
with their ratings (as marked) under usual service conditions. While the motor may be
capable of operating under one or more unusual service condition a SPECIAL motor
may be required for some unusual conditions. Usual and unusual conditions are listed
below as the basis for evaluating proper application of the motor.
Applying a motor with service conditions other than those specified as usual may
involve some degree of hazard. The additional hazard depends upon the degree of
departure from the usual condition and the severity of the environment to which the
motor is exposed. The conditions of hazard could result from overheating, mechanical
failure, premature insulation deterioration, corrosion, fire, and explosion.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
5.3.2
210-CM632UUT
05
47
Usual Service Conditions
Unless otherwise marked, the following conditions are the basis for defining the
motors capability.
1. Grease lubricated bearings lowest ambient temperature: -20C
(minus)
2. Water cooling lowest ambient temperature: 5C
3. An altitude that does not exceed 3300 feet (1000 meters)
4. Installation on a rigid mounting surface
5. Installation in areas where motor ventilation is not compromised
5.3.3
Unusual Service Conditions
National Oilwell Varco should be consulted if any of the following unusual service
conditions exist.
A.
Exposure to:
1. Combustible, explosive, abrasive or conducting dusts
2. Lint or very dirty operating conditions where accumulation of dirt may
interfere with normal ventilation
3. Chemical fumes, flammable or explosive gases
4. Nuclear radiation
5. Steam, salt-laden air, or oil vapor
6. Damp or very dry locations, radiant heat, vermin infestation, or
atmospheres conducive to the growth of fungus
7. Abnormal shock, vibration, or mechanical loading from external sources
8. Abnormal axial or side thrust imposed on the motors shaft
Unusual Operation where motor voltage is unbalanced by more than one percent
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
C.
210-CM632UUT
05
48
Unusual Operation at speeds above the rated speed or speed marked on the
nameplate
D.
Unusual Operation in a poorly ventilated room, in a pit, or in and inclined position
E.
Unusual Operation where subjected to:

1. Torsional impact load
2. Repetitive abnormal overloads
3. Reversing or electric braking
F.
Unusual Operation with a Variable Frequency source where:

1. The settings of the Drive do not provide optimum flux levels as marked.
2. The air flow does not provide the required CFM at the motor as marked.
3. The Drive type is not as specified on the nameplate. Certification requires
the motor to be operated with the specific drive type that it was tested
with.
4. The voltage to the motor is low from low input into the drive or a drop in
the line due to length.
www.nov.com
SECTION 6
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
49
HAZARDOUS LOCATION APPLICATION
WARNING!
MOTORS FOR HAZARDOUS AREAS ARE SPECIALLY DESIGNED TO
COMPLY WITH OFFICIAL REGULATIONS CONCERNING THE RISK OF
EXPLOSION. IF IMPROPERLY USED, BADLY CONNECTED, OR
ALTERED, NO MATTER HOW MINOR, THEIR RELIABILITY COULD BE
IN DOUBT. STANDARDS RELATING TO THE CONNECTION AND USE
OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS MUST BE
TAKEN INTO CONSIDERATION, ESPECIALLY NATIONAL STANDARDS
FOR INSTALLATION. ONLY TRAINED PERSONNEL FAMILIAR WITH
THESE STANDARDS SHOULD HANDLE THIS TYPE OF APPARATUS.
WARNING!
MOTORS OPERATED FROM INVERTERS SHOULD NOT BE USED IN
ANY HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS UNLESS THE MOTOR IS
IDENTIFIED ON THE NAMEPLATE AS ACCEPTABLE FOR SUCH
OPERATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS WARNING COULD
RESULT IN AN UNSAFE INSTALLATION THAT COULD CAUSE
DAMAGE TO PROPERTY OR SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL, OR BOTH.
All external wiring to power motor or accessories mounted on the motor must be in
compliance with EN 60079-14, Explosive Atmospheres Part 14: Electrical Installation
Design, Selection and Erection.
End users must comply with the special conditions for safe use listed on ATEX
Certificate and on Declaration of Incorporation.
Conditions are:
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
1.
210-CM632UUT
05
50
This motor requires the following two measures to maintain the safe
temperatures of Increase Safety e protection for a maximum of 200C surface
temperature.
a)
Motor requires Thermal protection.
b)
Motor requires forced air during operation providing a minimum of

3400 SCFM.
2.
Do not open when energized. All components, including anti condensate heaters
must be de-energized before opening access covers or enclosure covers.
3.
Use only with Variable Frequency Drive designated on ATEX Certificate. Not
intended for across-the-line start.
4.
The responsibility for insuring safe operation lies with the end user and special
conditions for safe use on the ATEX Certificate must be followed.
5.
This is a standard motor that may require additional wiring, modifications and
accessories to be added prior to installation and use. These additional elements
are not included in this certification and the user of the certificate must ensure
that the final installation conforms to the relevant ATEX requirements.
6.1
Construction
National Oilwell Varcos CM632 Series of motors is specifically designed for Rig
Applications involving Variable Frequency Drives.
When the motor is marked with a nameplate reading Increased Safety e, the motor is
provided with a type of protection in which additional measures are applied so as to give
increased security against the possibility of excessive temperatures and of the
occurrence of arcs and sparks inside and on external parts of electrical apparatus in
normal service. The type of protection is denoted by e and the additional measures
are those required by Standard EN60079-7 Electrical Apparatus for Potentially
Explosive Atmospheres Increased Safety e.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
6.2
210-CM632UUT
05
51
Standards
This motor has been designed manufactured to the applicable requirements of NEMA
MG1.
This motor has been designed manufactured to the applicable requirements of IEC/EN
60034-1. (Rotating Electrical Machines, Part 1: Rating and Performance)
The performance and features of construction are in accordance with the requirements
set forth in the following Standards for use in a potentially explosive atmosphere.
(IEC/EN 60079-0) Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Gas Atmospheres

General Requirements.
(IEC/EN 60079-7) Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres

Increased Safety e.
(IEC/EN 60034-5) Degree of Protection Provided by the Integral Design of Rotating

Electrical Machines (IP code) - Classification.
The following other standards are incorporated into the performance and features of
construction not related to the specifics of Increased Safety e.
EN 60034-1 Rotating Electrical Machines- Part 1 Rating and Performance.
NEMA MG-1 Part 31 Definite-purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors.

IEEE Standard 303 Recommended Practice for Auxiliary Devices for Motors in Class I,
Groups A, B, C, and D Division 2 locations.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
52
This motor is non-sparking and has a defined maximum surface temperature.

Compliance with the performance and construction requirements for Increased Safety
e also enables the motor to be applied in North American areas designated Division 2.
This motor designated as Increased Safety e conforms to the guidelines listed in IEEE
Standard 1349 Guide for Application of Electric Motors in Class I, Division 2 and Class I,
Zone 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations, also conforms guidelines and codes listed on
NFPA 70 (NEC) Article 500 for Class I, Division 2 and Class I, Zone 2 Location.
6.3
Certification and Declaration of Conformity

National Oilwell Varcos CM632 Series Motor has nameplates that are marked with the
agency that certifies compliance with the standards listed. When shown on the
nameplate the motor design and performance is certified to comply with the standards
listed on the nameplate. The certifying agency may be a Third Party organization with a
listing-file or certification may be from testing performed by National Oilwell Varco.
Certification requires the motor to be tested with the specific drive type used in the final
application. The following two pages are the Declaration of Conformity that ships with
the motor and lists specific motor serial numbers.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
www.nov.com
210-CM632UUT
05
53
Document number
Revision
Page
6.4
210-CM632UUT
05
54
Nameplate Marking Information

National Oilwell Varcos CM632 Series Motor has nameplates that comply with all
requirements of NEMA MG1, IEC/EN 60034-1 and Standards for induction motors. The
motor has various markings depending on the order requirements. All induction motors
are marked with a Main Induction Motor Nameplate common to all induction motors. SEE
PHOTO. Other optional nameplates are listed and described below.
6.4.1
Induction Motor Main nameplate
The following information is shown as a sample of the Main Nameplate for the motor.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
55
Manufacturer: National Oilwell (Or after March 2005, National Oilwell Varco) is located
at 500 Industrial Blvd., Sugar Land, Texas 77478, USA.
MODEL: Each motor has a Model Number identification that defines the features and
performance. Duplicate motors share the same Model Number.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
56
SERIAL No.: Each motor has a unique number that identifies a specific motor. No two
motors have the same Serial Number. Complete traceability of manufacturing is
maintained with this identifier.
MFG YEAR: The year the motor was manufactured.
6.4.2 Variable Frequency Hazardous Location Nameplates
This motor is designated to be Group II equipment, which means it is suitable for the
appropriate explosive atmosphere(s) other than for mining applications. Equipment for
mining applications is designated as Group I.
This nameplate is for a motor designed and tested to be Increased Safety e defined
from EN 60079-7: Increased Safety e.
A type of protection in which additional measures are applied so as to give

increased security against the possibility of excessive temperatures and of the
occurrence of arcs and sparks inside and on external parts of electrical
apparatus
the
which does not produce arcs or sparks in normal service. The e denotes
type of protection and the additional measures are those required by the
Standard EN 60079-7.
The following information is shown on the Hazardous Location Nameplate for induction
motors.
When a mark does not appear in the field on the nameplate, the information Does Not
Apply.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
57
MODEL: Each motor has a Model Number identification that defines the features and
performance. Duplicate motors would share the same Model Number. This is the same
Model Number that appears on the Main Motor Nameplate.
SERIAL NO.: Each motor has a unique number that identifies a specific motor. No two
motors have the same Serial Number. Complete traceability of manufacturing is
maintained with this identifier. This is the same Serial Number that appears on the Main
Motor Nameplate.
CERTIFICATION LISTING:
FILE NUMBER: The Identification number from a Certifying Agency regarding the
motors compliance to the standards of construction and performance listed.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
58
TYPE OF PROTECTION: Comments or clarifications in the protection of the motor are

shown regarding compliance with the standards or temperature limits. Note: The motor
is a passive device that depends on proper energization and removal of power to
maintain safe temperatures. Proper application of a motor in a hazardous-location
requires proper system parameters such as pre-start purging, adequate cooling-air,
drive-programming, and overload and stall protection.
AGENCY: The Certifying Agency that has reviewed compliance with the standards of
construction and performance listed.
STANDARDS: The identification number assigned to the written specifications that

define the construction and performance requirements of the motor.
QUALIFICATIONS:
Any comments or clarifications in the application of the motor
regarding compliance with the standards or temperature limits are marked in this
location on the nameplate.
DRIVE PERFORMANCE AND SETUP:

SUPPLY VOLTAGE: The voltage input to the Variable Frequency Drive in R.M.S.
VOLTS / HZ LEVEL-POINT: This is the frequency setting of the Variable Frequency

Drive where the Volts per Hertz slope stops and becomes level. This frequency defines
the flux level, magnetization amps, and power factor performance of the motor.
NOMINAL SPEED: The speed of the motor at full-load in RPM. The Slip R.P.M. is
determined from this marking by the difference in full-load RPM and the synchronous
RPM.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
59
NOMINAL CURRENT: The amp-draw of the motor at full-load in amps R.M.S. The
amps shown are when rated voltage is applied at the motor terminals. This is the
current designated by IN equal to 1/0 P.W. amps.
NOTE: Typically, voltages lower than rated voltage reach the motor. Other motor
currents can be determined from this marking by increasing the amps by the ratio of the
voltages.
CURRENT RATIO (IA/IN): This is the ratio of the stall current IA (at rated conditions)
divided by Nominal full-load amps IN. This ratio defines the motor current in a lockedrotor (stall) condition. This marking is required by Standard EN 60079-7 for Increased
Safety e motors.
This marking is used with time (tE) to set over temperature
Protection of the motor. The drive must be set to limit the motor to this value of current
overload.
Initial Starting Current IA as defined in EN 60079-7: Highest r.m.s. value of current

absorbed by an AC motor when at rest with its armature clamped in the position of
maximum air gap when supplied at rated voltage and rated frequency. The transient
inrush is not represented. The drive must be set to limit the motor to this value during a
stall.
SAFE STALL TIME (tE): The time in seconds for an AC winding when carrying starting
current IA, to be heated up from the temperature reached in rated service and at
maximum ambient temperature to a temperature that does not exceed the limiting
(maximum surface) temperature.
At the current level IA at stall, power must be
removed from the motor before time (tE).
MAG. (NL) AMPS:
The current drawn by the motor at rated voltage and rated
frequency at the no-load (uncoupled shaft) conditions. This is the magnetization amps
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
60
of the magnetic circuit that is dependent on the voltage and frequency settings of the
Variable Frequency Drive.
POWER FACTOR: The Cosine of the angle between voltage applied and the amps
drawn by the motor. The Power Factor can be multiplied by 100 and represented by a
percentage.
TEMPERATURE PROFILE GRAPH:

Standard EN 60079-7 Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Gas Atmospheres
Increased Safety e includes a diagram of motor temperatures and the time to reach
the temperatures under conditions of 1) normal running and 2) locked rotor stall. The
standard requires that data be provided so the user can set protection to limit motor
temperatures. For clarity, National Oilwell Varcos nameplate displays the information
on the motor hazardous location nameplate as current ratio (IA/IN) and safe stall time
(tE).
CONDITION 1) NORMAL RUNNING (Rated Service)

TIME TO THERMAL STABILITY: (t1): The time in hours for the motors stator winding to
reach thermal stability at rated conditions. The total temperature shown is the allowable
temperature for a Class H insulation system.
CONDITION 2) LOCKED ROTOR STALL

SAFE STALL TIME (tE): The time in seconds for an AC winding when carrying starting
current IA, to be heated up (from the temperature reached in rated service and at
maximum ambient temperature) to a temperature that does not exceed the limiting
(maximum surface) temperature.
The drive must be set to limit the amps into the motor at stall to the value IA. At the
current limit IA. Power must be removed from the motor before time (tE).
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
61
The total temperature allowed for the Hazardous Location maximum surface
temperature is marked on the nameplate at the top of the graph as LIMITING
TEMPERATURE. The maximum surface temperature marked will not be exceeded if
power to the motor is removed before the time marked as (tE).
Intermittent Duty:
The CM632 Series motor is capable of short time overloads indicated as the
Intermittent Duty on the motors published data. The motor is suitable for high load
excursions without exceeding the surface temperatures of the rated conditions if limited
to the Duty Cycle listed.
The temperatures of the rated condition will not be exceeded if the r.m.s. current of the
Duty Cycle does not exceed rated current.
Intermittent Duty Cycles may require higher current outputs from the Variable
Frequency Drive than shown as the motors IA/IN stall ratio. To obtain higher current
levels, the allowable stall time must be reduced by the square of the higher current.
The allowable stall time is less at higher amps by the square of the ratio.
For example, if the IA/IN ratio of the motor is 1.2 PU current and the time (tE) is 30
seconds, the rotor temperature is capable of 1.8 PU current for 13 seconds.
The shorter allowable stall time of 13 seconds was calculated by the square of the ratio
1.2/1.8 times the original 30 seconds.
CE Marking: The CE marking is legally required (mandatory) for products intended for
sale or placed into service in Europe.
The marking applies to all manufacturers,
whether located within or outside of the E.U.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
62
In order to be compliant with the CE Marking requirements, a manufacturer must ensure

that the product meets all applicable Directives.
The impetus behind the CE Marking of products is to allow free movement and sales of
goods within the Union, and to eliminate country specific requirements.
Directives (laws) contain the requirements that a product must meet to be sold in the
E.U. For this motor, special documentation requirements and test requirements have
been met for compliance with E.U. Directive on Machinery Safety 98/37/EC.
Compliance is demonstrated with the marking affixed to the product, in this case, the
CE Marking appearing on the motor nameplate. Specifically, conformity with EHSR
1.5.1 has been demonstrated by compliance with the requirements of EN 60204-1
ll 2 G Ex e ll T3 Tamb. -40C to +55C
Markings:
Ex e Increased Safety (EN50019 / EN60079-7)

Group II Surface Not mining underground
Category 2 Equipment may be installed in Zone 1 or Zone 2
areas
Temperature Class T3 200C maximum surface
G-Atmosphere surrounding the motor explosive gas
6.4.3
Space Heater Nameplate
This nameplate addresses the requirements defined by NFPA 70 (National Electric

Code), CE, and IEEE Standard 303 for marking of space heaters used in hazardous
locations.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
63
AREA CLASSIFICATION: The environment the motor is suitable to be operated in.

When an area is classified as hazardous, the type of environment is defined based on
the hazardous material involved. The hazardous area classification defines the
requirements of the motor and the space heaters to be suitable for operation in that
area. The Area Classification marked on the motors nameplate must agree with the
area where it is to be operated.
If the Area Classification marking on the motor
nameplate is BLANK, the motor is not suitable for hazardous locations. It is suitable for
an area that is NOT CLASSIFIED as hazardous.
NOTE:
In order to maintain the suitability of the motor in hazardous locations,
replacement of space heaters must not exceed the original surface temperature
marked. This cautionary note also appears on the space heater nameplate.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
6.5
210-CM632UUT
05
64
System Protection
The motor provided with this manual has construction features and tested performance
required by (IEC 60079-7). Increased Safety e Electrical Apparatus. This motor is
NOT explosion proof and will NOT contain an ignition source if surfaces inside the motor
exceed permissible temperatures. This motor requires thermal protection to remove the
power source before non-permissible temperatures are reached. The motor is a passive
device that depends on proper energization and removal of power to maintain safe
temperatures. Proper application of a motor in a hazardous-location requires proper
system parameters such as pre-start purging, adequate cooling-air, drive-programming,
and use of overload and stall protection.
The application of the (IEC 60079-7) Increased Safety e designation of this motor
requires the motor temperature to not exceed the maximum temperature allowed by the
Temperature Code. In order to avoid non-permissible temperatures on surfaces of the
motor, external methods such as an inverse-time delay overload protective device are
required. The motor requires system protection.
CAGE MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION - When the motor is intended for use with a
current-dependent device to protect against non-permissible temperatures, the starting
current ratio (IA/IN) and the time (tE) marked on the motor are to be used.
The inverse-time delay overload protective device needs to 1) monitor motor current
and 2) disconnect a stalled motor within the time (tE). The protective device is to be set
using the current / delay-time characteristic curves so that the (IA/IN) starting current
ratio and time (tE) data marked on the motor.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
65
Per EN 60079-7 it is required that motors supplied with varying frequency and voltage
by a Drive (converter) be tested with the Variable Frequency Drive and certified for the
duty marked on the nameplate. Testing of the protective devices provided for the motor
are also required to be tested at final installation.
FORCED-AIR DUCTED COOLING: This motor is forced-air ventilated IC 37 as defined

per IEC/EN 60034-6 Methods of Cooling (IC Code).
The motor requires an independently powered externally mounted blower to provide

forced air through the motor to cool it.
The quantity of cooling-air at the motor is marked on the nameplate as air volume in
SCFM (Standard Cubic Feet per Minute). This is the air required into the motor opening
to maintain the maximum surface temperature listed. The density of the cooling-air is
defined to be less than an altitude of 3300 feet (1000 meters). The maximum
temperature of the cooling-air is defined to be less than the ambient temperature listed
on the Main Motor Nameplate.
Motor cooling is dependent on the air supplied to the motor. The cooling air is a System
requirement for proper application of the motor.
WARNING!
IN ORDER TO MAINTAIN COMPLIANCE WITH THE INCREASED SAFETY e
APPLICATION OF THIS MOTOR, THE DUCTED AIR FLOW PROVIDED AT THE
MOTOR MUST BE EQUAL OR GREATER THAN SHOWN ON THE NAMEPLATE.
A DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH OR OTHER MEANS TO ENSURE
REQUIRED AIR FLOW IS RECOMMENDED.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
6.6
210-CM632UUT
05
66
Variable Frequency Operation Considerations

The motor fed by a Variable Frequency Drive power source will exhibit increased
temperature as compared to a motor operated on a sine-wave due to the affects of the
harmonic frequencies produced by the drive. The amount of increase in losses and
increase in motor temperatures is dependent on the harmonic characteristics of the
drive feeding the motor and the design of the motor.
This motor has been specially designed and tested for operation with the Variable
Frequency Drive type(s) listed on the motor nameplate. The operating program of the
drive affects the temperature of the motor if it is not done properly. The parameters for
programming the Variable Frequency Drive are provided with this manual.
WARNING!
ANY
CHANGES
TO
THE
PROGRAMMING
OF
THE
VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE COULD ADVERSELY AFFECT THE TEMPERATURE

AND PROTECTION OF THE MOTOR AND INVALIDATE THE SUITABILITY
OF THE INCREASED SAFETY e APPLICATION OF THE MOTOR IN A
POTENTIALLY EXPLOSIVE GAS ATMOSPHERE.
www.nov.com
SECTION 7
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
67
SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 Motor Technical Description

7.1.1
Description
MODEL SERIES CM632UUT

7.1.2
General
This model of motor is an alternating current induction motor of open force ventilated
construction. It is a two bearing configuration.
7.1.3
Ratings
Ambient -40C to 55C
Ambient -40C to 55C
1,500 HP
1,600 HP
600/690 Volts
600/690 Volts
1.0 Service Factor
1.0 Service Factor
1,440 Amperes
1,570 Amperes
44 Hertz nominal
44 Hertz nominal
3 Phase
3 Phase
870 RPM nominal
870 RPM
Refer to the outline drawing, nameplate, motor data, and application information
provided in this manual for more specific information.
7.1.4
Motor Frame
The construction of this motor results in a totally enclosed air-over machine with a
(IP45) enclosure with. The stator and coils assembly is an integral part of the frame
with the stator laminations welded directly to the frame structure. The motor frame is
equipped with removable end frames, which provide support for the bearings.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
7.1.5
210-CM632UUT
05
68
Ventilation
This motor is designed for ducted ventilation. This type of ventilation requires external
air-flow. Air is blown into the motor through the NDE openings in the frame. Hot air is
exhausted through the drive openings. The blower must be operational and providing
the required amount of air (3400 SCFM) in order for the motor to provide rated output at
the temperatures required.
7.1.6
Bearings
This motor is of two bearing construction. The non drive end of the rotating shaft
assembly is supported by deep grove ball bearing. The drive end of the rotating field
and shaft assembly is supported by a fixed ball bearing or cylindrical bearing. The drive
end bearings are grease lubricated, BCI-1330 Type or 6330. Depending on the model
one or both of the bearings DE and NDE are electrically insulated. The bearing
housings are furnished with seals and includes provisions for refilling during operation.
Each bearing is equipped with one 100 ohm platinum resistive temperature device.
Refer to Bearing Lubrication Instructions provided in Paragraph 4.8 of this manual for
specific lubrication details.
7.1.7
Stator and Coils Assembly
The stator and coils assembly consists of coil groups embedded in slots within the
laminated steel core of the stator. The lamination material is coated with a non-organic
coating. The stator coils are of form wound construction and interconnected on the non
drive end of the stator. The stator connections are located in a side-mounted connection
box. Labeled lead cables are provided in the connection box for the customer
connections to the power source. The stator of the motor is equipped with six 100 ohm
platinum resistive temperature devices embedded between the coils of the stator.
RTDs are shielded internally to the motor.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
210-CM632UUT
05
69
The stator coils embedded in the laminated core receive a Global VPI of nonhygroscopic resin. The stator insulation system is Class H.
7.1.8
Rotating Assembly
The rotating assembly consists of specially shaped copper rotor bars connected in a
cage arrangement. The bars are shorted at each end by copper end rings.
7.1.9
Connection to Driven Load
This motor is equipped with a drive shaft for coupling the motor to the driven load. Refer
to the Motor Alignment Procedure starting with Paragraph 2.6 of this manual for specific
motor to load alignment details.
7.1.10
Area Classifications
Confirm hazardous materials are not present before starting the motor.
7.1.11
Accessories and Terminal Boxes See Outline for Locations
Auxiliary Terminal Box The auxiliary terminal box contains the connections for the
Stator and Bearing RTDs, and space heaters.
A.)
The motor is provided with Stator and Bearing Resistance Temperature

Detectors. The RTDs are 100 ohm platinum. Each RTD has three wires
brought out to a terminal strip located in a terminal box.
B.)
Space heaters for the motor are brought out separately to terminals.
Energize per nameplate data located on the terminal box. H1 (L) and H2
(N) connect to motor space heaters.
Main-Power Connections - The motor connects to the power system with leads brought
to the main-power terminals.
www.nov.com
Document number
Revision
Page
7.1.12
210-CM632UUT
05
70
Space Heaters
This motor has been provided with space heaters to prevent moisture absorption when
the machine is out of service. The space heaters are specially designed to limit surface
temperatures for suitability with the Hazardous Area application.
A wide range of
voltages can be applied to the Space Heaters as marked. The range is 120 to 240
Volts AC or DC. The motor requires 200 watts, single phase, 120 / 240 volt AC power.
The space heaters should be energized whenever the motor is not in use. This includes
motor storage and all other cases when the motor is not operating. If the motor is in a
humidity controlled environment, then the space heaters do not need to be energized.
When the motor is in storage, provision shall be made to allow adequate air circulation
for moisture removal and prevention of overheating.
7.1.13
Recommended Relay Settings

ALARM
TRIP CONTACT
(SHUTDOWN)
DE Bearing RTD
90C
100C
NDE Bearing RTD
90C
100C
RTD Winding
185C
190C
Proximity Probes
Customer
Customer
Stall Time
www.nov.com
45 Seconds
Document number
Revision
Page
7.2
210-CM632UUT
05
71
Spare Parts List

7.2.1
Recommended Spare Parts List

CM632UUT SPARE PARTS LIST
Parts May Vary By Model
Models: CM632UUTDESCRIPTION
*QTY
**NOV PART LIST
ORACLE PART NO.
Space Heaters Motor 100 Watt
6550-10-0069
10032318-003
RTD, DE/NDE Bearing Probe, 100
6550-25-0029
10021574-001
Bearing, BCI 1330 Type
1030-14-0004
10032517-016
Bearing, 6330M Type
1030-20-0076
10032508-009
Seal, DE
1555-02-0013
10032360-015
Seal, Bearing Retainer
G54417
10019326-001
Seal Lip
10511454-001
Seal Sleeve, Lip Seal
10509096-001
*QTY. Indicates original quantity supplied with motor

**NOV National Oilwell Varcos Part Number
www.nov.com
PART 2
Drawing and Data Package

Model CM632UUT
CM Series
Frequency Drive
REFERENCE
Model CM632UUT
Induction Motor

www.nov.com

United States
Phone: +1 (281) 240-6111
Fax +1 (281) 274-0426
DOCUMENT NUMBER
REV
10876548-201-DWG
01
Document number
Revision
Page
10876548-201-DWG
01
i
REVISION HISTORY
01
19.06.2014
Rev
Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
Initial Release
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision
01
Change Description
Initial Release
www.nov.com
Reason for issue
J.B.
N.J.
B.M.
Prepared
Checked
Approved
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
1
Page
DATA SHEETS
Induction Motor Data
1-5
Hazardous Location Information
2-5
Torque - Speed Performance Curve, 600 Volts
3-5
Torque - Speed Performance Curve, 690 Volts
4-5
Torque - Current Performance Curve, 600 Volts
5-5
Torque - Current Performance Curve, 690 Volts
5-5
DRAWINGS
ATEX CERTIFICATION
ii
SECTION 1
MOTOR MODEL SERIES CM632UUT

AC INDUCTION DRILLING MOTOR DATA SHEET
FOR USE WITH VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
HP
(OUTPUT)
Drive
System
(Volts)
Motor
Terminal
(Volts)
TORQUE
(Lb-Ft)
SPEED
(RPM)
CURRENT
(AMPS)
AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE
(DEGREE)
VFD DUTY (SECONDS)
1600
600
560
9659
870
1570
S1, Continuous
-40C to +55C
1600
690
640
9659
870
1500
S1, Continuous
-40C to +55C
1850
600
560
11168
870
1735
-40C to +55C
2000
600
560
12074
870
1912
S9, 120 Sec ON, 60 Off

S9, 120 Sec ON, 90 Off
-40C to +55C
Note: See page 2 of 5 for drive parameter input information.

MOTOR MODEL SERIES
APPLICATION(S)
:
:
CM632UUT
Draw Works, Mud Pump, Rotary Table and Top Drive
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE(S)
For hazardous applications refer to ATEX certificate for
approved drives.
ENCLOSURE PROTECTION
Motor Enclosure: IP45, Terminal Box: IP56
METHOD OF COOLING
Forced air blower providing 3400 SCFM min.

(Maintain min. force air requirement while motor is
running)
INSULATION
Class H
MAXIMUM ALTITUDE
3300 Ft above sea-level (or 1000m)
MAX PERMISSIBLE SPEED
See outline drawing for bearing specification application
DRIVE SUPPLY VOLTAGE
600V / 690V RMS 3-Phase 50 or 60 Hz
PHASE SEQUENCE
A, B, C (U, V, W), CW viewed from NDE
C, B, A (W, V, U), CCW viewed from NDE
95 dB(A) at 3 Ft (per IEEE 85) without blower - See note

below
SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL
Note: The sound level will exceed 85 dB(A) - ear protection must be worn while in the vicinity of the motor
when running.
STATOR RTD SETTINGS (Recommended):
185C Alarm, 190C Trip.
TITLE:
02
5/20/2013
REV.
DATE
DWN. BY: 03/22/12
BY
CHK. BY: 03/22/12
J. Portos/S. Liu B. Moats

FORM NO. 112-A
M. Carter
C. Wade
APPVL.
APVD BY: 03/22/12
N. Bannick
DATA SHEET
AC INDUCTION DRILLING MOTOR
MODEL NUMBER: CM632UUT
1600 HP RATING
REV.
DWG. NO.
10645297-DAS
SHT 1 OF 5
02
HAZARDOUS LOCATION INFORMATION

MOTOR CONSTRUCTION:
Increased Safety e in normal operation does not produce sparks,

arcs, or dangerous temperatures.
Comply with
:
:
CE Marking on the rating plate per ATEX Directive 94/9/EC

IEC/EN 60079-7: Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres Increased Safety e and IEC/EN 60079-0:
Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres General
Requirements.
Certified By:
Trac EMC & Safety. Under certification files: TRL05ATEX31082X
Qualifications:
Special conditions for safe use required.
Markings:
II 2 G Ex e II T3 Gb Tamb. - 40C to + 55C
MAX. SURFACE TEMPERATURE
200 Degree C Temperature (T3 Code)
THERMAL STABILITY - Running
3 Hours
MAX. LOCKED ROTOR SAFETY FAULT
38 Sec (tE Safe stall time)
CURRENT RATIO [ Ia / In ]
1.2 [ Start / Nominal ] 1728 A / 1440 A
SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE REQUIRED:

Thermal protection of the motor fed by a Variable Frequency Drive is based on the Torque and Amp
limiting functions of the Drive and RTDs in the stator windings of the motor. Therefore, it is
imperative that thermal sensors are monitored and is a requirement to maintain Increased Safety
e protection.
DRIVE PARAMETER INPUT INFORMATION
Drive Input Source

Control Mode
Motor Voltage
Current
Frequency
Nominal Speed
Power
600 Volts
DTC
600 V
1570 A
44 Hz
870 RPM
1600 HP
690 Volts
DTC
600 V
1570 A
44 Hz
870 RPM
1600 HP
Important Note:
1) Standard ID run is required prior to starting up the motor.
DWG. NO.
10645297-DAS
FORM NO. 112-A
REV.
SHT 2 OF 5
02
600 V OPERATION
Continuous:
1600HP
Constant Torque (*)
Constant Horsepower (*)
Reduce Power
: 0 to 870 RPM
: 870 to 1400 RPM
: 1400 to 2400 RPM
(*) Above points are witnessed and certified by the ATEX notifying body on page 2 of 5
Motor Performance Curve

Torque versus Speed
12000
11000
10000
TORQUE(LbFt)
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0
200
400
600
800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200
SPEED(RPM)
Tested Points from 0 to 2400 RPM
DWG. NO.
10645297-DAS
FORM NO. 112-A
REV.
SHT 3 OF 5
02
690 V OPERATION
Continuous:
1600HP
Constant Torque (*)
Constant Horsepower (*)
Reduce Power
: 0 to 870 RPM
: 870 to 1400 RPM
: 1400 to 2400 RPM
(*) Above points are witnessed and certified by the ATEX notifying body on page 2 of 5

Torque versus Speed
12000
11000
10000
TORQUE(LbFt)
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0
200
400
600
800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200
SPEED(RPM)
Tested Points from 0 to 2400 RPM
DWG. NO.
10645297-DAS
FORM NO. 112-A
REV.
SHT 4 OF 5
02
600V OPERATION
Torque versus Current @ 870 RPM
14000
TORQUE(LbFt)
12000
10000
8000
6000
4000
2000
0
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
1750
2000
2250
CURRENT(Amps)
690V OPERATION
Torque versus Current @ 870 RPM
14000
12000
)t 10000
f
b
L( 8000
E
U 6000
Q
R
O
T 4000
2000
0
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
1500
CURRENT(Amps)
DWG. NO.
10645297-DAS
FORM NO. 112-A
REV.
SHT 5 OF 5
02
SECTION 2
DRAWINGS 10876548-201-DWG
Title
Drawing Number
Specification, CM632UUT-150E............................................................ 10876548-201-SPC
Specification, CM632UUT-150F ............................................................ 10876549-201-SPC
Outline, AC Induction Motor (CM632)...........10506689-GAD
Motor Shaft Details and WK..................................................................... 10503859-DAD
Installation, Drive End, End Frame ............................................................... 10503856-ASM

Bill of Material .............................................................................. B/M 10503856-001
Installation, Non Drive End, End Frame ....................................................... 10504249-ASM

Installation, Bearing RTD, D.E. ................................................................................. G97288

Bill of Material ............................................................. 10010235-001 (B/M G97288)
Installation, Bearing RTD, N.D.E. ............................................................................. G97289

Bill of Material .............................................................. 10010236-001 (B/M G97289)
Installation, Connection Box ......................................................................... 10738912-ASM

Installation, Heater .................................................................................................... G97546

Nameplate, Heater.G25313
2-1
Title
Drawing Number
Nameplate, AC Motor (CM632) .................................................................... 10626766-DAD
Installation, Nameplates and Tags ........................................................................ G97379-3

Bill of Material ...........................................................10010728-001 (B/M G97379-3)
Nameplate, ATEX (CM632).10730451-DAD
Assembly, Frame and Stator Coil (632 FR).............................................................. G93277

Bill of Material ............................................................. 10022979-001 (B/M G93277)
Installation, Access Covers ....................................................................................... G97331

Installation, Exhaust......................G97125
Bill of Material10010372-001 (B/M G97125)
Installation, Pressure Switch ..10626771-ASM

Bill of Material..B/M 10626771-001
Installation, Drive HubG97318
Installation, Blower10746842-ASM
Bill of Material..B/M 10746842-001
Assembly, BlowerNo Drawing Available

Part Number.10700335-301
2-2
Printed By:ramirezrl
Printed On: Wed Aug 6 15:56:29 GMT-0500 2014
MOTOR SPECIFICATION SHEET

Description:
Model Number:
NOV Part Number:
rd
3 Party Certifications:
Paint or Primer
Specifications:
1600 HP, 690V, CM632UUT Motor equipped with 100W heater 120/240V, six
100 ohm platinum stator RTDs, One 100 ohm platinum RTD for each bearing,
max rated speed 2400RPM, ambient temperature -40C to 55C, and furnished
with the following:
Accessories:
1) Connection Box: Stainless steel mounted right side, (viewed from NDE)
IP56
2) Pressure Switch: United Electric J120K - 455
3) Blower Assembly: Furnished; see detail below.
4) Shaft / Hub: 5.65 inch tapered shaft with 10.470 inch Hub
5) Encoder: None
6) Exhaust Hood: Top mounted drive end exhaust.
CM632UUT-150E
10876548-201
ATEX
NOV Blue
050-2000-M-001
Customer
Documentation:
Standard Documentation
a. Electronic Operations Manual
b. Electronic Test Reports
Special Documentation: See Special Instructions
Manual & Reference

Drawings:
Base Motor O & M Dwg.

No. 10506689-001
User Manual: 10876548-201-Man
Special Instructions:
None
Blower Description:
Encoder Description:
4200 CFM Blower assembly with a 20HP 440\480V 3 phase 60Hz motor.
Blower assembly has weather louvers installed on air intake.
Blower Installation NOV # 10746842-001, Blower Assy. Part # 10700335-301
None
TOLERANCE EXCEPT AS NOTED

DECIMAL
.XXX .005
.XX .010
.X
.060
FINISH 125

CHK.
11/13/13
11/13/13
FORM NO. 136W-1-D
DWN.
REV
DATE
BY
NEXT ASSY
APPVL
FRACTIONAL
1/16
TIR .010
ANGULAR
1/2
H. Torres
K. Harwood
APPVL
APPVL
11/13/13
TITLE:
SPECIFICATION, DRILL MOTOR
11/13/13
S. Bao
B. Moats
FSCM NO.
SCALE
52142
SIZE
DWG. NO.
10876548-201-SPC
REV
SHT.
1 OF 1
01
THIS IS A PROPRIETARY DESIGN OF NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO REPRODUCTION OR USE OF THIS DESIGN BY OTHERS IS
PERMISSIBLE ONLY IF EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO.
TC Number: 10876548-201-SPC
Printed REV: 01
Latest REV: 01
MOTOR SPECIFICATION SHEET

Description:
Model Number:
NOV Part Number:
rd
3 Party Certifications:
Paint or Primer
Specifications:
1600 HP, 690V, CM632UUT Motor equipped with 100W heater 120/240V, six
100 ohm platinum stator RTDs, One 100 ohm platinum RTD for each bearing,
max rated speed 2400RPM, ambient temperature -40C to 55C, and furnished
with the following:
Accessories:
1) Connection Box: Stainless steel mounted left side, (viewed from NDE)
IP56
2) Pressure Switch: United Electric J120K - 455
3) Blower Assembly: Furnished; see detail below.
4) Shaft / Hub: 5.65 inch tapered shaft with 10.470 inch Hub
5) Encoder: None
6) Exhaust Hood: Top mounted drive end exhaust.
CM632UUT-150F
10876549-201
ATEX
NOV Blue
050-2000-M-001
Customer
Documentation:
Standard Documentation
a. Electronic Operations Manual
b. Electronic Test Reports
Special Documentation: See Special Instructions
Manual & Reference

Drawings:
Base Motor O & M Dwg.

No. 10506689-001
User Manual: 10876549-201-Man
Special Instructions:
None
Blower Description:
Encoder Description:
4200 CFM Blower assembly with a 20HP 440\480V 3 phase 60Hz motor.
Blower assembly has weather louvers installed on air intake.
Blower Installation NOV # 10746842-001, Blower Assy. Part # 10700335-301
None
TOLERANCE EXCEPT AS NOTED

DECIMAL
.XXX .005
.XX .010
.X
.060
FINISH 125

CHK.
11/13/13
11/13/13
FORM NO. 136W-1-D
DWN.
REV
DATE
BY
NEXT ASSY
APPVL
FRACTIONAL
1/16
TIR .010
ANGULAR
1/2
H. Torres
K. Harwood
APPVL
APPVL
11/13/13
TITLE:
SPECIFICATION, DRILL MOTOR
11/13/13
S. Bao
B. Moats
FSCM NO.
SCALE
52142
SIZE
DWG. NO.
10876549-201-SPC
REV
SHT.
1 OF 1
01
THIS IS A PROPRIETARY DESIGN OF NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO REPRODUCTION OR USE OF THIS DESIGN BY OTHERS IS
PERMISSIBLE ONLY IF EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO.
TC Number: 10876549-201-SPC
Printed REV: 01
Latest REV: 01

8
SHT 2
48 3/4
[1238.25]
SHT 2
2 1/16
[51.80]
16.75
[425.45]
20.40
[518.18]
7 5/8
[194.33]
32 3/16
[817.35]
6.12
[155.45]
18 1/4
[463.55]
2X DRILL & TAP THRU

1/4-20 UNC-2B TAP
PRESSURE SWITCH MOUNT
19.38
[492.25]
5.53
[140.40]
12.75
[323.85]
14.75
[374.65]
GROUND
WIRE
6.50
[165.10]
30.00
[762.00]
8.25
[209.55]
38.03
[965.99]
PRESSURE SWITCH
MOUNTING PAD
16.651.005
[422.940.13]
SHAFT DETAIL
SHEET 2
1/4 NPT
GREASE VENT
TYP EACH END
SHT 2
2.50 THRU
TYP (4) PLCS
31.00
[787.40]
12.75
[323.85]
NON
DRIVE END
1/4 NPT GREASE

INLET TYP EACH
END
SHT 2
58.44
[1484.38]
.22
[5.57]
14.75
[374.65]
.81
[20.56]
10 7/16
[264.56]
10X
DRILL & TAP
3/8-16 UNC-2B X 0.75
SPACED AS SHOWN.
DRIVE END
1.53
[38.76]
18.00
[457.20]
TYP
BASE MOTOR CM632UUT-130/138
36.00
[914.40]
DIMENSIONS ARE TYPICAL

FOR RIGHT OR LEFT
CONNECTION BOX POSITION
(RIGHT HAND POSITION SHOWN)
DRILL & TAP 3/4-10

UNC - 2B THRU TYP
(4) PLCS
VIEW FACING
(DRIVE END)
1.56 THRU v 3.00

0.13 DEEP (FARSIDE)
TYP (4) PLCS
B
16.50
[419.10]
TYP
33.00
[838.20]
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS:
TYPE---------------------------- CM SERIES - INCREASED SAFETY "e"
MODEL------------------------- CM632UUT-____
HP --------------------------------1500 (1119 Kw)
CONSTANT TORQUE ----- 9050 LB-FT
SOURCE ---------------------- VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (PWM)
VOLTS ------------------------- 600V/690V RMS 3-PHASE
DUTY --------------------------- CONTINUOUS
SPEED ------------------------- 870 RPM
(1400-1800 CONSTANT HP)
(1800-3000 CURVE)
MAX MOTOR SPEED LIMITED
BY BEARING CAPACITY
AMBIENT TEMP ------------ 45 OR 55 C
INSULATION ------------------ FORM WOUND CLASS-H
FORCED AIR ----------------- 4200 CFM
ROTATION -------------------- BI-DIRECTIONAL
X.XX DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL AND `.06 UNLESS NOTED
MAX SURFACE TEMP -------- 200~C

ENCLOSURE --------------------- IP44, WITH EXTERNAL FORCED AIR BLOWER / DUCT
AND AIR EXHAUST COVER.
CONNECTION BOX ------------ IP56
D.E. BEARING ------------------- ANTI-FRICTION, BALL / INSULATED (3000 RPM MAX)
WITH NO SIDE LOAD
D.E. BEARING ------------------- CYLINDRICAL, ROLLER / INSULATED (2300 RPM MAX)
WITH SIDE LOAD
N.D.E. BEARING ---------------- ANTI-FRICTION, BALL / INSULATED (3000 RPM MAX)
BEARING LUBRICATION ---- GREASE, NGLI #3 / CYPRIANA
SPACE HEATER --------------- (2) 100W - 120V / 240 AC/DC TEMP LIMITING
STATOR RTDS ----------------- (6) 2-PER PHASE (100 OHM PLATINUM)
BEARING RTDS ---------------- (2) 1-PER BEARING (100 OHM PLATINUM)
MOTOR CERTIFIED INCREASED SAFETY "e" AND ENCLOSURE RATING BASED
ON PERIPHERAL ATTACHMENTS PROVIDED BY OTHERS. SEE OPERATION AND
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR COMPLETE APPLICATION DETAILS.
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
CHK
.XXX .005
.XX
.020
.X
.060
FINISH
NON
DRIVE END
TC Number: 10506689-GAD
22.13
[561.98]
23.13
[587.38]
5.25
[133.35]
8.40
[213.45]
5
APPVL
125
C. WADE
1/16"
TIR .010
REV
DATE
BY
ANGULAR
1/2
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
DO NOT SCALE DWG.
Printed REV: 01
APPVL
CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO

PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF
9/27/2010
NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE

OR IN PART, OR USE OF THIS DESIGN OR
DISTRIBUTION OF THIS INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS
9/27/2010
B. MOATS
FRACTIONAL
TITLE:
NOT PERMITTED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN
OUTLINE AND MOUNTING,
CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.. THIS

DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NATIONAL-
OILWELL, L.P. UPON REQUEST AND IN ANY EVENT
9/27/2010
AC INDUCTION MOTOR
UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR WHICH IT WAS

LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND THE INFORMATION
(CM632UUT-130/138)
CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED HEREIN IS THE
COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.
SCALE:
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY.
POWER SOLUTIONS GROUP

500 INDUSTRIAL BLVD.
SUGARLAND, TEXAS 77478

-
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
NATIONAL- OILWELL, L.P.. IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED
H. TORRES
APPVL
DRIVE END
9/27/2010
J. KROBOT
DECIMAL
3/16
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10506689-GAD
1
SHEET:
REVISION:
of
01
Latest REV: 01
30.75
[781.05]
TYP
OPENING
OPENING
.88+.00
-.06
4.25 +0.000
-0.001
1.50
[38.10]
6.67
[169.33]
C
B
B
22.94
[582.63]
TYP
.62+.00
-.06
11.47
[291.31]
TYP
.125 DRILL
0.44 DEEP
4.850
[123.19]
GAGE LINE
7.65
[194.21]
TYP
15.38
[390.53]
TYP
5.520
[140.21]
10X
DRILL & TAP
3/8-16 UNC -2B x 0.750
SPACED AS SHOWN
6.15
[156.21]
TYP
D
5.879 A+0.001
[149.33] -0.001
.125 DRILL 1.62 DEEP

.332 DRILL X DEPTH SHOWN
60 SEAT AS SHOWN
3/8-24 UNF -2B (FLAT BOTTOM) TO
DEPTH SHOWN
(4.754 [120.74])
G +0.000
-0.002
E +0.000
-0.002
F +0.000
-0.002
H +0.000
-0.002
DETAIL B
SCALE 3/16
1.25" TAPER
PER FOOT
MOTOR N/P
ATEX N/P
SEE SHAFT
EXTENSION DETAIL
14X
DRILL & TAP
3/8-16 UNC -2B 0.750 DEEP
SPACED AS SHOWN
DRIVE END
4.16
[105.78]
TYP
8.40
[213.31]
TYP
10X
DRILL & TAP
3/8-16 UNC - 2B x .75
SPACED AS SHOWN
16.50
[419.10]
TYP
DIMENSIONS ARE TYPICAL

FOR RIGHT OR LEFT
(RIGHT HAND POSITION SHOWN)
5.62
[142.87]
TYP
12.68
[322.03]
TYP
5.50
[139.70]
TYP
OPENING
38
[965.99]
31
[787.40]
36
[915.19]
VIEW B-B
DWN
.XX
.020
.X
.060
FINISH
CHK
125
C. WADE
1/16"
TIR .010
REV
DATE
BY
ANGULAR
1/2
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
DO NOT SCALE DWG.
Printed REV: 01
9/27/2010
APPVL

9/27/2010
B. MOATS
FRACTIONAL
TITLE:

9/27/2010
AC INDUCTION MOTOR

(CM632UUT-130/138)
SCALE:
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY.


-

H. TORRES
APPVL
APPVL
9/27/2010
J. KROBOT
DECIMAL
( NON DRIVE-END)
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
SIDE VIEW
32 3/16
[817.35]
2 3/4
[69.85]
4 TYP
[102.39]
1/2 NPT FEMALE CONNECTION
1/2 NPT FEMALE CONNECTION PROVISION

FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH TYP
EACH SIDE
NON
DRIVE END
-H10.343
10.343
50 7/16
[1280.90]
.XXX .005
-G8.350
8.350
23.38
[593.85]
OPENING
DRIVE END
-F6.730
6.730
-E10.470
10.470
19.38
[492.25]
17 1/4
[437.62] 21.00
TYP
[533.40]
TYP
OPENING
OPENING
HUB OPTIONS FOR 5.25 & 5.65 TAPER
-D.134
.125
12X
1-14 UNC-2B X 2.25 DEEP
E.Q. SP ON "E" B.C.
12X
DRILL & TAP
3/8-16 UNC-2B x 0.750
SPACED AS SHOWN
-C1.500
1.625
18 1/4
[463.55]
(TOP VIEW)
4.29
[108.95]
TYP
-B1.934
2.250
.25 X 45
CHAMFER
BASE MOTOR CM632UUT-130/138
NON
DRIVE END
VIEW C-C
11.25
[285.75]
TYP
SHAFT OPTIONS
-A5.250
5.650
5.25
[133.35]
TYP
21.08
[535.42]
SHAFT
MODEL
1
2
8.34
[211.79]
TYP
4.19
[106.36]
TYP
8.38
[212.73]
TYP
5.75
[146.05]
TYP
11.50
[292.10]
TYP
8.13
[206.50]
TYP
4.07
[103.25]
TYP
.06 X 45
CHAMFER
1-8 UNC -2B 1.500 DEEP
1.125 X 90
(LIFTING PROVISION)
.25
[6.35]
3/16
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10506689-GAD
SHEET:
REVISION:
of
01
Latest REV: 01

8
55 5/16
[1404.72]
MAY VARY DEPENDING
ON BLOWER MANUFACTURER
66 9/16
[1690.81]
OPTIONAL BLOWER
AND FILTER
OPTIONAL BLOWER
AND FILTER
OPTIONAL EXHAUST HOOD

OPTIONAL BLOWER
EXTENSION ADAPTER
70 3/4
[1797.71]
MAY VARY DEPENDING
ON BLOWER MANUFACTURER
OPTIONAL
PRESSURE SWITCH
OPTIONAL ENCODER
HEATER
COVER BROKEN
BOX
OUT FOR CLARITY
OPTIONAL HUB
SEE SHEET 2
NON
DRIVE END
DRIVE END
FACING DRIVE END
RIGHT HAND
WITH BLOWER & TOP EXHAUST SHOWN
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
J. KROBOT
DECIMAL
CHK
.XXX .005
.XX
.020
.X
.060
FINISH
APPVL
125
C. WADE
1/16"
TIR .010
REV
DATE
BY
ANGULAR
1/2
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
DO NOT SCALE DWG.
Printed REV: 01
APPVL

9/27/2010

9/27/2010
B. MOATS
FRACTIONAL
TITLE:

9/27/2010
AC INDUCTION MOTOR

(CM632UUT-130/138)
SCALE:
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY.


-
H. TORRES
APPVL
9/27/2010
3/16
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10506689-GAD
1
SHEET:
REVISION:
of
01
Latest REV: 01

8
52 13/16
[1340.70]
MAY VARY DEPENDING
ON THE BLOWER MANUFACTURER
66 9/16
[1690.81]
OPIONAL BLOWER
OPTIONAL BLOWER
AND FILTER
AND FILTER
OPTIONAL
EXHAUST HOOD
OPTIONAL BLOWER
EXTENSION ADAPTER
70 3/4
[1797.71]
MAY VARY DEPENDING
ON THE BLOWER MANUFACTURER
OPTIONAL
HEATER
PRESSURE SWITCH
BOX
OPTIONAL HUB
SEE SHEET 2
OPTIONAL ENCODER COVER
NON
DRIVE END
DRIVE END
LEFT HAND
WITH BLOWER & TOP EXHAUST SHOWN
FACING DRIVE END
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
J. KROBOT
DECIMAL
CHK
.XXX .005
.XX
.020
.X
.060
FINISH
APPVL
125
C. WADE
1/16"
TIR .010
REV
DATE
BY
ANGULAR
1/2
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
DO NOT SCALE DWG.
Printed REV: 01
APPVL

9/27/2010

9/27/2010
B. MOATS
FRACTIONAL
TITLE:

9/27/2010
AC INDUCTION MOTOR

(CM632UUT-130/138)
SCALE:
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY.


-
H. TORRES
APPVL
9/27/2010
3/16
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10506689-GAD
1
SHEET:
REVISION:
of
01
Latest REV: 01
n 5.65
n 5.91
n 6.63
n 6.63
n 5.91
21.57
0.00
1.38
1.63
4.85
5.52
10.12
13.00
14.43
16.93
29.79
SHAFT
CENTER
29.96
CENTER
LINE -A-
30.06
ROTOR
CENTER
43.18
45.68
47.08
53.49
58.44
n 5.17

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
MAXIMUM MAGNETIC PULL IN POUNDS PER 0.001 INCH = 172.6
ITEM
` .020
` .060
FINISH 125
J. BLACK
6/23/2010
APPVL
FRACTIONAL
H. TORRES
6/23/2010
APPVL
WEIGHT (LB) WK (LB-FT ) CENTER GRAVITY (IN)
SHAFT
682
33.6
29.79
ROTOR ASM.
2017
2699
914.2
30.06
TOTAL
947.8
-A-
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
29.96
REV
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
APPVL
B. MOATS
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY

FORM No. 137-D
TC Number: 10503859-LAY
6/14/2010
J. KROBOT
CHK
6/15/2010
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
MUD PUMP (n5.65 TAPER SHAFT)
DWN
DECIMAL
Printed REV: 01

NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR
SUBSIDIARIES (ALL COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO
HEREINAFTER AS "NOV"). IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED
NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
USE OF THIS DESIGN OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS
INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS
DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON
REQUEST OR UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR
WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED
HEREIN IS THE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NOV.
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO

TITLE:
WK^2, CM632UUT-138C&D
SCALE:

SUGAR LAND, TEXAS 77478
1/4
PROJECTION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10503859-DAD
1
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF
REVISION:
01
Latest REV: 01
16
5
15
19
13
10
19
TYP (8) PLCS
TYP (8) PLCS
14
POSITION ITEM-2
WITH SLOT AT
12 O'CLOCK
POSITION
NOTES:
A
1. PLACE GASKET, ITEM 4, ONTO INNER BEARING CAP, ITEM 3.
USE SEALANT, ITEM 20, TO HOLD GASKET IN PLACE. NEXT
FILL BEARING CAP CAVITY 2/3 FULL WITH GREASE, ITEM 7,
THEN SLIDE ASSEMBLY ONTO SHAFT.
2. MEASURE SHAFT IN THREE LOCATIONS AROUND THE
CIRCUMFERENCE. DO THIS IN AT LEAST TWO DIFFERENT
LOCATIONS AXIALLY. RECORD MEASURED DIMENSIONS.
3. NEXT, HEAT BEARING, ITEM 6, TO 230 DEG. F (110 DEG. C). PRESS
BEARING ONTO SHAFT (WITH BEARING MODEL NUMBER FACING
OUT) UNTIL BEARING SEATS AGAINST SHOULDER OF SHAFT.
ALLOW BEARING TO COOL TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE BEFORE
PROCEEDING FURTHER.
A
4. AFTER BEARING HAS COOLED, FULLY HAND-PACK WITH GREASE, ITEM 7.
9
5. AFTER BEARING HAS BEEN PROPERLY GREASED, INSTALL END
FRAME, ITEM 1, USING AN X TIGHTENING PATTERN, TORQUE BOLTS
TO THE TORQUE VALUE SPECIFIED ON SHEET 2.
6. HEAT SLEEVE, ITEM 9, UNTIL THE SLEEVE INNER DIAMETER IS
GREATER THAN THE SHAFT DIAMETER. PLACE SLEEVE IN OVEN,
OR USE INDUCTION HEATER. DO NOT USE A DIRECT FLAME TO
17
19 12 11
18 19
20 1
HEAT SLEEVE. SLEEVE TEMPERATURE SHOULD NOT EXCEED
POSITION ITEM-3
TYP (8) PLCS
TYP (3) PLCS
300 DEG. F (149 DEG.C). CAREFULLY SLIDE SLEEVE ONTO SHAFT
SECTION A-A
WITH SLOT AT
UNTIL SLEEVE SEATS AGAINST BEARING RACE. HOLD IN POSITION
A
6 O'CLOCK POSITION A
SCALE 3/8
UNTIL IT COOLS ENOUGH TO STAY IN POSITION. ALLOW SLEEVE TO
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
6/8/2010 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
COOL TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE BEFORE PROCEEDING FURTHER.
DWN
DECIMAL
7. PRIOR TO INSTALLING THE OUTER BEARING CAP, ITEM 2, INSERT SEAL, .XXX ` .005
J. KROBOT
CHK
6/16/2010
ITEM 9, INTO BEARING CAP PER SEAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. .XX ` .020
TITLE:
.X
` .060
J. BLACK
8. AFTER SEAL HAS BEEN PROPERLY INSTALLED, MOUNT BEARING CAP
6/16/2010 INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITHFINISH 125
APPVL
INSTALLATION, END FRAME DE
OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS
ONTO END FRAME WITH GASKET, ITEM 5. TIGHTEN BOLTS
H. TORRES
(CM632)
USING AN X PATTERN PER TORQUE VALUE SPECIFIED ON SHEET 2.
FRACTIONAL
6/16/2010 WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND
APPVL
` 1/16"
9. AFTER FULLY ASSEMBLED, PUSH/PULL ON THE SHAFT AXIALLY BY
C. WADE
TIR .010
SCALE:
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
FSCM
No.
ANGULAR
HAND TO CHECK END PLAY. RECORD THE DISTANCE THAT THE
REV DATE BY APPVL
1/8
NATIONAL
OILWELL
VARCO
` 1/2
1 OF 2
52142
B
SHAFT MOVES AXIALLY.
500
INDUSTRIAL
BLVD.
NEXT ASSY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
REVISION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10. FORWARD RECORDED DATA FROM NOTES 2 AND 9 TO ENGINEERING.
N/A
01
10503856-ASM
FORM No. 137-D
TC Number: 10503856-ASM
Printed REV: 01
Latest REV: 01
TIGHTENING TORQUE VALUES FOR SAE GRADE BOLTS

GRADE 5
SIZE
B
STAINLESS STEEL
GRADE 8
TIGHTENING TORQUE (FT-LB)[N-M]
SIZE
TIGHTENING TORQUE(FT-LB)[N-M]
SIZE
#10-32
3.06 [4.15]
#10-32
4.25 [5.76]
#10-32
2.80 [3.80]
1/4-20
6.00 [8.13]
1/4-20
9.00 [12.20]
1/4-20
5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16
22.50 [30.51]
3/8-16
33.75 [45.76]
3/8-16
21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14
37.50 [50.84]
7/16-14
52.50 [71.18]
7/16-14
25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13
56.25 [76.25]
1/2-13
82.50 [111.85]
1/2-13
52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11
112.50 [152.53]
5/8-11
165.00 [223.71]
5/8-11
104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10
195.00 [264.38]
3/4-10
285.00 [386.41]
3/4-10
184.94 [250.74]
1-8
480.00 [650.79]
1-8
675.00 [915.18]
1-8
455.24 [617.22]
M4
1.92 [2.60]
M4
2.71 [3.67]
M4
1.78 [2.41]
M6
6.56 [8.89]
M6
9.26 [12.56]
M6
6.08 [8.24]
M8
15.78 [21.40]
M8
22.29 [30.22]
M8
14.68 [19.83]
M 10
31.11 [42.18]
M 10
43.92 [59.55]
M 10
28.82 [39.08]

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
J. KROBOT
CHK
6/16/2010
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
FINISH 125
J. BLACK
6/16/2010
APPVL
FRACTIONAL
H. TORRES
6/16/2010
APPVL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
6/8/2010
APPVL
C. WADE
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
N/A
Printed REV: 01


TITLE:
INSTALLATION, END FRAME DE

(CM632)
SCALE:

1/8
PROJECTION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10503856-ASM
1
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF
REVISION:
01
Latest REV: 01
1 of 1
11/11/2013
Bill of Material-Engineering
NOV Sugar Land
Instl, End Frame DE 320Fr
Part Number:
10503856-001
Legacy Number: 10503856-001
Revision:
01
Item No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Oracle No.
10008336-001
10504089-001
10004813-001
10009471-001
10009478-001
10032517-016
10009669-001
10090179-001
10090179-001
10090179-001
10001220-001
10032557-034
10032444-208
10032557-016
10032454-037
10032442-015
10032314-004
10032387-017
10032387-035
10018318-001
10005087-001
Legacy No.
G58175
10504089-001
G45660
G21806
G21814
1030-14-0004
1885-05-0013
1555-10-0019
1555-10-0019
1555-10-0019
G56491-3
7612022
3929-05-0014
1690-10-0008
3219-05-0040
2013-10-0004
1315-25-0002
1320-05-0110
1320-05-0040
1885-11-0015
1885-11-0028
Description
END FRAME, MACH DE CM632
Cap, Bearing Outer
CAP, BEARING INNER DE/NDE
GASKET, CAP INNER DE/NDE 626FR
GASKET, CAP OUTER DE/NDE 626FR
BEARING, ROLLER CYLINDERICAL
GREASE, SHELL-CYPRINA
SEAL, LIP PTF SKFE SKF
OIL DEFLECTOR DM626
WASHER, HI-COLLAR SPG LOCK 3/4
SCRW,CAP;HD HEX;THRD SZ 3/4-10IN
Superseded by 10490016-020
SCREW,CAP;3/8" DIA;5" LG;SOCKET
FHMS, #10-24 X 1/2 316SS
FITTING, GREASE 1/4 NPT
PLUG,PIPE;SZ 1/4;HEX HD;BLK
PLUG,PIPE;SKT HD;STL
LOCTITE, #242 BLUE
SEALANT, SILICONE GASKET
Reference
UOM Quantity Designator
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Pound
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
6
Each
6
Each
8
Each
8
Each
8
Each
1
Each
1
Each
3
Each
1
Each
1
16
5
15
18
13
10
18
TYP (8) PLCS
TYP (8) PLCS
14
POSITION ITEM-2
WITH SLOT AT
12 O'CLOCK
POSITION
NOTES:
1. PLACE GASKET, ITEM 4, ONTO INNER BEARING CAP, ITEM 3.

USE SEALANT, ITEM 19, TO HOLD GASKET IN PLACE. NEXT
FILL BEARING CAP CAVITY 2/3 FULL WITH GREASE, ITEM 7,
THEN SLIDE ASSEMBLY ONTO SHAFT.
2. MEASURE SHAFT IN THREE LOCATIONS AROUND THE
CIRCUMFERENCE. DO THIS IN AT LEAST TWO DIFFERENT
LOCATIONS AXIALLY. RECORD MEASURED DIMENSIONS.
3. NEXT, HEAT BEARING, ITEM 6, TO 230 DEG. F (110 DEG. C). PRESS
BEARING ONTO SHAFT (WITH BEARING MODEL NUMBER FACING
OUT) UNTIL BEARING SEATS AGAINST SHOULDER OF SHAFT.
ALLOW BEARING TO COOL TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE BEFORE
A
PROCEEDING FURTHER.
9
4. AFTER BEARING HAS COOLED, FULLY HAND-PACK WITH GREASE, ITEM 7.
5. AFTER BEARING HAS BEEN PROPERLY GREASED, INSTALL END
FRAME, ITEM 1, USING AN X TIGHTENING PATTERN, TORQUE BOLTS
TO THE TORQUE VALUE SPECIFIED ON SHEET 2.
6. HEAT SLEEVE, ITEM 9, UNTIL THE SLEEVE INNER DIAMETER IS
11 12 18
19 1
GREATER THAN THE SHAFT DIAMETER. PLACE SLEEVE IN OVEN,
OR USE INDUCTION HEATER. DO NOT USE A DIRECT FLAME TO
TYP (8) PLCS
POSITION ITEM-3
17
HEAT SLEEVE. SLEEVE TEMPERATURE SHOULD NOT EXCEED
SECTION
A-A
WITH SLOT AT
300 DEG. F (149 DEG.C). CAREFULLY SLIDE SLEEVE ONTO SHAFT
SCALE 3/8
6 O'CLOCK POSITION A
UNTIL SLEEVE SEATS AGAINST BEARING RACE. HOLD IN POSITION
A
UNTIL IT COOLS ENOUGH TO STAY IN POSITION. ALLOW SLEEVE TO
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
COOL TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE BEFORE PROCEEDING FURTHER.
DECIMAL
J. KROBOT
7. PRIOR TO INSTALLING THE OUTER BEARING CAP, ITEM 2, INSERT SEAL, .XXX ` .005
CHK
6/16/2010
ITEM 9, INTO BEARING CAP PER SEAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. .XX ` .020
TITLE:
.X
` .060
J. BLACK
8. AFTER SEAL HAS BEEN PROPERLY INSTALLED, MOUNT BEARING CAP
6/16/2010 INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITHFINISH 125
APPVL
INSTALLATION, END FRAME NDE
OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS
ONTO END FRAME WITH GASKET, ITEM 5. TIGHTEN BOLTS
H. TORRES
(CM632)
USING AN X PATTERN PER TORQUE VALUE SPECIFIED ON SHEET 2.
FRACTIONAL
6/16/2010 WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND
APPVL
` 1/16"
C. WADE
9. AFTER FULLY ASSEMBLED, PUSH/PULL ON THE SHAFT AXIALLY BY
TIR .010
SCALE:
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
FSCM
No.
ANGULAR
HAND TO CHECK END PLAY. RECORD THE DISTANCE THAT THE
REV DATE BY APPVL
1/8
NATIONAL
OILWELL
VARCO
` 1/2
1 OF 2
52142
B
SHAFT MOVES AXIALLY.
500
INDUSTRIAL
BLVD.
NEXT ASSY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
REVISION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10. FORWARD RECORDED DATA FROM NOTES 2 AND 9 TO ENGINEERING.
N/A
01
10504249-ASM
FORM No. 137-D
Printed REV: 01
Latest REV: 01

GRADE 5
SIZE
B
STAINLESS STEEL
GRADE 8
SIZE
SIZE
#10-32
3.06 [4.15]
#10-32
4.25 [5.76]
#10-32
2.80 [3.80]
1/4-20
6.00 [8.13]
1/4-20
9.00 [12.20]
1/4-20
5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16
22.50 [30.51]
3/8-16
33.75 [45.76]
3/8-16
21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14
37.50 [50.84]
7/16-14
52.50 [71.18]
7/16-14
25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13
56.25 [76.25]
1/2-13
82.50 [111.85]
1/2-13
52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11
112.50 [152.53]
5/8-11
165.00 [223.71]
5/8-11
104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10
195.00 [264.38]
3/4-10
285.00 [386.41]
3/4-10
184.94 [250.74]
1-8
480.00 [650.79]
1-8
675.00 [915.18]
1-8
455.24 [617.22]
M4
1.92 [2.60]
M4
2.71 [3.67]
M4
1.78 [2.41]
M6
6.56 [8.89]
M6
9.26 [12.56]
M6
6.08 [8.24]
M8
15.78 [21.40]
M8
22.29 [30.22]
M8
14.68 [19.83]
M 10
31.11 [42.18]
M 10
43.92 [59.55]
M 10
28.82 [39.08]

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
J. KROBOT
CHK
6/16/2010
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
FINISH 125
J. BLACK
6/16/2010
APPVL
FRACTIONAL
H. TORRES
6/16/2010
APPVL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
6/9/2010
APPVL
C. WADE
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
N/A
Printed REV: 01


TITLE:
INSTALLATION, END FRAME NDE

(CM632)
SCALE:

1/8
PROJECTION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10504249-ASM
1
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF
REVISION:
01
Latest REV: 01
1 of 1
11/11/2013
NOV Sugar Land
Instl, End Frame NDE 320Fr
Part Number:
10504249-001
Revision:
01
Item No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Oracle No.
10008338-001
10504297-001
10004814-001
10009471-001
10009478-001
10032508-009
10009669-001
10090179-001
10090179-001
10090179-001
10001220-001
10032557-034
10032444-212
10032557-016
10032454-037
10032442-015
10032314-004
10032387-017
10018318-001
10005087-001
Legacy No.
G58177
10504297-001
G45660-2
G21806
G21814
1030-20-0076
1885-05-0013
1555-10-0019
1555-10-0019
1555-10-0019
G56491-3
7612022
3929-05-0022
1690-10-0008
3219-05-0040
2013-10-0004
1315-25-0002
1320-05-0110
1885-11-0015
1885-11-0028
Description
END FRAME, MACH NDE CM632
Cap, Bearing Outer
CAP, BRG INNER DE/NDE
GASKET, CAP INNER DE/NDE 626FR
GASKET, CAP OUTER DE/NDE 626FR
BEARING,BALL;150MM ID;320 MM OD;
GREASE, SHELL-CYPRINA
OIL DEFLECTOR DM626
WASHER, HI-COLLAR SPG LOCK 3/4
Superseded by 10490016-020
SCREW,CAP;3/8" DIA;5" LG;SOCKET
FHMS, #10-24 X 1/2 316SS
FITTING, GREASE 1/4 NPT
PLUG,PIPE;SZ 1/4;HEX HD;BLK
LOCTITE, #242 BLUE
SEALANT, SILICONE GASKET
Reference
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Pound
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
6
Each
6
Each
8
Each
8
Each
8
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
TC Number: G97288:37
Printed REV: B
Latest REV: B
Printed REV: B
Latest REV: B

1 of 1
9/21/2011
NOV Sugar Land
INSTL, BEARING RTD DE
Part Number:
10010235-001
Legacy Number: G97288
Revision:
B
Item No.
1
2
3
4
6
Oracle No.
10032548-051
10032444-036
10005338-001
10012333-001
10032326-018
Legacy No.
6550-25-0040
700010611
G60803
G21649
G62017
Description
BEARING SHIELDED LEADS
SCREW, HEX HD CAP 1/4-20 X 3/4
CLIP, INS VINYL CLAD I/4DIA
MARKER, LEAD HEAT SHRINK RTD8
TERMINAL,ELECTRICAL
Printed REV: B
Reference
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
3
Latest REV: B
Printed REV: B
Latest REV: B
Printed REV: B
Latest REV: B

1 of 1
4/30/2012
NOV Sugar Land
INSTL, BEARING RTD NDE
Part Number:
10010236-001
Revision:
B
Item No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Oracle No.
10032548-051
10032444-036
10005338-001
10012326-001
10025207-001
10032326-018
Legacy No.
6550-25-0040
700010611
G60803
G21642
60P009040001
G62017
Description
BEARING SHIELDED LEADS
SCREW, HEX HD CAP 1/4-20 X 3/4
CLIP, INS VINYL CLAD I/4DIA
MARKER, LEAD HEAT SHRINK RTD7
CABLE, SHIELDED 3LD RTD
TERMINAL,ELECTRICAL
Printed REV: B
Reference
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Foot
4
Each
3
Latest REV: B
39
42
(3)
5 3/4 (1/2)
2 7/16
13
3 TYP
41
2 7/16
40
2
12
12
(6)
(3)
(3)
(6)
(3)
(3)
14
ISOMETRIC
REF ONLY
SEE NOTE 3b
ISOMETRIC
44
REF ONLY
DO NOT CHANGE OR REVISE

WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVA
FROM CERT. ENG
SUB ASSEMBLY 2
SUB ASSEMBLY 1
(PART NUMBER: 10738912-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
NOTES:
.XXX ` .005
1. NUMBERS IN ( ) DESIGNATE QUANTITY.

2. DIMENSIONS IN ( ) REFERENCE.
3a. POSITION BUS BARS (ITEM 39) IN BUS SUPPORT (ITEM 2)TO
DIMENSION SHOWN. SEAL IN PLACE USING RESIN EPOXY
(ITEM 40 AND ITEM 41) WITH A 50/50 MIX. BUILD UP APPROXIMATELY
1/8 ALL AROUND BARS.
3b. ASSEMBLE BUS BARS (ITEMS 6,7, AND 8) AND LINKS (ITEM 13 AND
ITEM 14) WITH IDENTIFICATION POSITIONED AS SHOWN.
FORM No. 137-D
DWN
DECIMAL
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
04
7/10/2014 HAB BCM
03
3/13/2014 HAB
02
1/3/2014 HAB BCM
REV
DATE
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
SR
APPVL
4/23/2013
J. VARGAS
CHK
5/6/2013
H. TORRES
5/7/2013
APPVL
K. HARWOOD
5/7/2013
APPVL
B. MOATS
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
293 LBS
Printed REV: 04


TITLE:
INSTALLATION, CONNECTION BOX

RIGHT/LEFT
SCALE:

3/16
PROJECTION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10738912-ASM
1
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 6
REVISION:
04
Latest REV: 04
CONNECT BUS BARS LINKS

(ITEM 13 & ITEM 14) TO BUS
BARS PROTRUDING FROM
FRAME/STATOR AS SHOWN
(12) (12)
36
12
11
10
24
23
22
(4)
(4)
(4)
(2)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(2.30)
(1.17)
37
22
15
(12) (12)
33
32
30
(2)
(2)
(2)
31
SECTION A-A
FRONT VIEW
NON DRIVE END
W/ COVERS REMOVED FOR CLARITY

RIGHT CONNECTION POSITION SHOWN
SECTION B-B
DRIVE END
(PART NUMBER: 10738912-001)
NOTES:
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
4. INSERT GLASTIC TUBE (ITEM 36) INTO MOUNTING HOLES OF

GLASTIC BUS SUPPORT (ITEM 10).
5. ROUTE RTD LEADS THRU CHANNEL ON BOTTOM AND CONNECT
TO TERMINAL BLOCKS (ITEM 20).
6. CHASE ALL THREADED HOLES PRIOR TO MOUNTING COVERS, ETC.
APPLY THREAD SEALANT (ITEM 3) TO STEEL FASTENERS.
7. TORQUE ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE ON SHEET 6.
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
04
7/10/2014 HAB BCM
03
3/13/2014 HAB
02
1/3/2014 HAB BCM
REV
DATE
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
SR
APPVL
4/23/2013
J. VARGAS
CHK
5/6/2013
H. TORRES
5/7/2013
APPVL
K. HARWOOD
5/7/2013
APPVL
B. MOATS
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
293 LBS
Printed REV: 04


TITLE:

RIGHT/LEFT
SCALE:

3/16
PROJECTION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10738912-ASM
1
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 6
REVISION:
04
Latest REV: 04
RTD1-R
RTD1-W
18
RTD, STATOR
PHASE A
(2)
RTD1-W
RTD2-R
RTD2-W
RTD, STATOR
PHASE B
17
19
20
43
(2)
(35) (2)
SEE
DETAIL E
RTD2-W
RTD3-R
B
RTD3-W
37
RTD, STATOR
PHASE C
11
REF
36
38
REF REF
(2)
(2)
RTD3-W
RTD4-R
RTD4-W
RTD4-W
SEE NOTE 8
RTD, STATOR
PHASE A
RTD5-R
RTD5-W
RTD5-W
RTD, STATOR
PHASE B
RTD6-R
RTD6-W
RTD, STATOR
PHASE C
RTD6-W
RTD7-R
RTD7-W
NON DRIVE END
BEARING
RTD NDE
RTD7-W
RTD8-R
A
RTD8-W
RTD8-W
SCHEMATIC
RTD TERMINAL
DETAIL D
15
22
(BEARING AND STATOR RTD'S) (2)

RTD WIRE
50
(2)
21
16
BEARING
RTD DE
SEE NOTE 10
A
(PART NUMBER: 10738912-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DETAIL E
SCALE: 6/1
TYP (24) PLCS
NOTES:
8. LEAVE A 2 FOOT SERVICE LOOP FOR RTD LEAD CABLE.
9. APPLY PUTTY TO ALL BOLTED JOINTS AND HALF LAP BUS BARS
WITH TAPE; THEN APPLY DRY VARNISH. THIS IS TO BE DONE
ONCE ALL CONNECTIONS HAVE BEEN MADE TO THE MOTORS
INTERNAL BUS BARS.
10. CRIMP FERRULE (ITEM 50) PER MP1272.
FORM No. 137-D
DRIVE END
SECTION C-C
DWN
DECIMAL
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
04
7/10/2014 HAB BCM
03
3/13/2014 HAB
02
1/3/2014 HAB BCM
REV
DATE
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
SR
APPVL
4/23/2013
J. VARGAS
CHK
5/6/2013
H. TORRES
5/7/2013
APPVL
K. HARWOOD
5/7/2013
APPVL
B. MOATS
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
293 LBS
Printed REV: 04


TITLE:

RIGHT/LEFT
SCALE:

3/16
PROJECTION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10738912-ASM
1
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 6
REVISION:
04
Latest REV: 04
29
34
(3)
(36) (36)
35
(3)
28
27
(2)
(2)
29
TOP VIEW
45
TYP TOP AND BOTTOM
(2)
(22) (22)
25
26
45
REF
A
(PART NUMBER: 10738912-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
NOTES:
DWN
DECIMAL
11. CENTER LABLES ON FRONT, TOP, AND BOTTOM COVERS AS SHOWN.
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
04
7/10/2014 HAB BCM
03
3/13/2014 HAB
02
1/3/2014 HAB BCM
REV
DATE
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
SR
APPVL
4/23/2013
J. VARGAS
CHK
5/6/2013
H. TORRES
5/7/2013
APPVL
K. HARWOOD
5/7/2013
APPVL
B. MOATS
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
293 LBS
Printed REV: 04


TITLE:

RIGHT/LEFT
SCALE:

3/16
PROJECTION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10738912-ASM
1
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 6
REVISION:
04
Latest REV: 04
ISOMETRIC VIEWS
W/ COVERS REMOVED FOR CLARITY
(PART NUMBER: 10738912-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
04
7/10/2014 HAB BCM
03
3/13/2014 HAB
02
1/3/2014 HAB BCM
REV
DATE
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
SR
APPVL
4/23/2013
J. VARGAS
CHK
5/6/2013
H. TORRES
5/7/2013
APPVL
K. HARWOOD
5/7/2013
APPVL
B. MOATS
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
293 LBS
Printed REV: 04


TITLE:

RIGHT/LEFT
SCALE:

3/16
PROJECTION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10738912-ASM
1
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 6
REVISION:
04
Latest REV: 04

GRADE 5
GRADE 8
STAINLESS STEEL
SIZE
SIZE
SIZE
#10-32
3.06 [4.15]
#10-32
4.25 [5.76]
#10-32
2.80 [3.80]
1/4-20
6.00 [8.13]
1/4-20
9.00 [12.20]
1/4-20
5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16
22.50 [30.51]
3/8-16
33.75 [45.76]
3/8-16
21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14
37.50 [50.84]
7/16-14
52.50 [71.18]
7/16-14
25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13
56.25 [76.25]
1/2-13
82.50 [111.85]
1/2-13
52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11
112.50 [152.53]
5/8-11
165.00 [223.71]
5/8-11
104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10
195.00 [264.38]
3/4-10
285.00 [386.41]
3/4-10
184.94 [250.74]
1-8
480.00 [650.79]
1-8
675.00 [915.18]
1-8
455.24 [617.22]
M4
1.92 [2.60]
M4
2.71 [3.67]
M4
1.78 [2.41]
M6
6.56 [8.89]
M6
9.26 [12.56]
M6
6.08 [8.24]
M8
15.78 [21.40]
M8
22.29 [30.22]
M8
14.68 [19.83]
M 10
31.11 [42.18]
M 10
43.92 [59.55]
M 10
28.82 [39.08]
(PART NUMBER: 10738912-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
04
7/10/2014 HAB BCM
03
3/13/2014 HAB
02
1/3/2014 HAB BCM
REV
DATE
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
SR
APPVL
4/23/2013
J. VARGAS
CHK
5/6/2013
H. TORRES
5/7/2013
APPVL
K. HARWOOD
5/7/2013
APPVL
B. MOATS
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
293 LBS
Printed REV: 04


TITLE:

RIGHT/LEFT
SCALE:

3/16
PROJECTION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10738912-ASM
1
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 6
REVISION:
04
Latest REV: 04

1 of 2
7/23/2014
NOV Sugar Land
INSTL, CONN BOX RIGHT/LEFT
Part Number:
10738912-001
Revision:
04
Item No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Oracle No.
10738907-001
10020358-001
10018324-001
10032353-010
10032444-091
10004417-001
10004418-001
10004419-001
10032444-116
10020360-001
10744859-001
10744860-001
10004420-001
10004421-001
10490361-079
10506200-001
10622232-001
10032438-040
10042030-001
10032308-007
10506026-001
10032353-015
10032444-051
10025799-001
Legacy No.
10738907-001
G12612
1885-11-0048
1690-30-0001
3919-05-0006
G56201
G56202
G56203
3919-06-0012
G12614
10744859-001
10744860-001
G56204
G56205
50004-08-C5
10506200-001
10622232-001
2411-06-0003
0000-6934-67
6176-20-0085
10506026-001
1690-30-0009
3915-06-0005
6690-60-0030
Description
CONN BOX, ASSY. RIGHT/LEFT
SUPPORT, BUS BAR
SEALANT, VIBRATITE #3 1OZ
WASHER, COMPRSSN 3/8 X .089 ZP
BUS BAR, PHASE 1
BUS BAR, PHASE 2
BUS BAR, PHASE 3
SUPPORT, BUS BAR
All-Thread, 3/8SS
Locknut, 3/8-16UNC SS
BUS BAR, LINK T1 & T3
BUS BAR, LINK T2
SCREW,CAP-HEX HD 1/4-20 X 1 GR5
Bracket, Terminal Block
Channel, Din Rail
SCREW,MACHINE;SZ #8-32 X 3/8;BTT
COVER, TERMINAL PHOENIX CONTAC
BLOCK, TERM PHONIX
Tag, Terminal RTD Only
WASHER, COMPRSSN 1/4 X 9/16 ZP
CLAMP, CABLE 3/8'' NYL .265HOLE
Printed REV: 04
UOM
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Set
Foot
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Reference
Quantity Designator
1
1
1
88
14
1
1
1
6
2
4
10
2
1
14
1
1
2
1
35
1
18
4
4
Latest REV: 04

2 of 2
7/23/2014
NOV Sugar Land
INSTL, CONN BOX RIGHT/LEFT
Part Number:
10738912-001
Revision:
04
Item No.
Oracle No.
Legacy No.
Description
25
10009434-001
G12615
GASKET, FRAME COVER CONN BOX
26
10902458-001
10902458-001 COVER, CONNECTION BOX FRONT SS
27
10009494-001
G21833
GASKET, BOTTOM COVER
28
10006338-001
G140121
COVER, CONNECTION BOX BOTTOM
29
10032444-114
3919-06-0008
30
10032326-009
6175-89-0054
TERMINAL, RING #2
31
10032300-018
6690-40-0036
CABLE;2AWG;600V;1;COPPER;GREEN
32
10032538-008
1690-01-0038
WASHER, PLAIN 3/8 SS 3/4OD
33
10032444-113
3919-06-0006
34
10013430-001
6525-58-0084
NAMEPLATE, HIGH VOLTAGE (VYL)
35
10011295-001
6525-58-0091
LABEL, HAZARDOUS VOLT WARNING
36
10032329-036
1322-30-0005
TUBING;SZ 0.390ID X 0.452
37
10515972-001
10515972-001 Gasket, Top Cover
38
10520285-001
10520285-001 Gasket, Connection Box Spacer
39
10004586-001
G56890
BUS BAR, T1
10008379-001/01.02@RSOne-RESIN,
40
EPOXY 1885-02-0010
VERSAMID 140 x 1RESIN, EPOXY VERSAMID 140
41
10008380-001
1885-02-0011
RESIN, EPOXY EPON 826
42
10019142-001
6690-12-0066
SLEEVE,ELECTRICAL;HEATSHRINK TUB
43
10025374-001
6176-32-0008
CLAMP, CHANNEL TERM BLOCK
44
10019137-001
6690-12-0054
SLEEVE,ELECTRICAL;HEATSHRINK TUB
45
10032388-001
1320-05-0111
PLUG, PIPE 3/4 SKT HD SS
50
10942172-001
10942172-001 Ferrule, Non-Insulated
Printed REV: 04
UOM
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Foot
Each
Each
Each
Each
Foot
Each
Each
Each
Gallon
Gallon
Foot
Each
Foot
Each
Each
Reference
Quantity Designator
1
1
2
2
58
2
1
2
14
3
3
4 PIECES @ 10" LG
3
1
1
3
1
1
1
2
1
2
24
Latest REV: 04
SEE SHEET 3
FOR LEAD
CONNECTIONS
MOUNTING HARWARE
SUPPLIED WITH T-BOX
3
2
REF
10
11
12
(10) (10)
B
(2 3/4)
SEE NOTE 7
SEE DETAIL A
SEE NOTE 11
ISOMETRIC
5
REF ONLY
NOTES:
1. SLEEVE HEATER CABLE WITH 0.387 I.D. SLEEVING
6
(ITEM 9) FROM HEATER CABLE GLAND TO PLATE (ITEM 2).
2. ROUTE HEATER LEADS AS SHOWN INTO
HEATER AUXILIARY BOX.
3. FULLY TIGHTEN ALL SCREWS TERMINALS AND
TERMINALTION POINTS INCLUDED WITH HEATER.
8 7
4. TORQUE ALL STEEL FASTENERS PER TABLE ON
SHEET 4.
DETAIL A
5. PRE-ASSEMBLE (ITEMS 5,6 & 7) AS SHOWN ON DETAIL A.
A
SCALE 7/16
6. FILL WITH PACKING FIBER (COMES WITH ITEM 8) AFTER
RUNNING HEATER WIRES THROUGH.
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
7. TIGHTEN ELBOW PIPE (ITEM 7) INTO NIPPLE ON PLATE DECIMAL
.XXX ` .005
(ITEM 6) UNTIL DISTANCE FROM COVER (ITEM 2)
C
11/26/2013
.XX ` .020
TO CENTER OF HUB (ITEM 5) AND ELBOW (ITEM 7)
.X
` .060
IS 2-3/4 INCHES.
B
1/20/2011
FINISH 125
8. APPLY THREAD SEALANT (ITEM 12) TO BOLTS
FRACTIONAL
PRIOR TO MOUNTING COVER PLATE TO FRAME.
A
10/17/2010
` 1/16"
9. SEE OUTLINE FOR HEATER LOCATION.
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV
DATE
FORM No. 137-D
REF
REF
13
SEE NOTE 8
PRE ASSEMBLE
SEE NOTE 5
SEE SHEET 3
FOR LEAD CONNECTIONS
A
(PART NUMBER: 10010679-001)

DWN
12/5/2007
Seitz Mike
12/13/2007
CHK
HAT
RIH
JCD
BCM
JK
HT
BY
APPVL
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
B.KROBOT
12/13/2007
APPVL
H.PHAM
12/13/2007
APPVL
B.ISOM
FSCM No.

52142
NEXT ASSY
17.66 LBS
Printed REV: C

TITLE:
INSTALLATION,
HEATER (1) 100W
SCALE:

1/4
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G97546
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
1 OF 4
REVISION:
Latest REV: C
CENTER HEATER
ON PLATE AS SHOWN
(9.13)
(2.26)
13
1
(3.63)
(17.50)
6
SEE NOTE 5
ISOMETRIC
SEE NOTE 1
HEATER MOUNTING
REF ONLY
2
A
A
DWN
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DECIMAL
Seitz Mike
12/13/2007
CHK
.XXX ` .005
.XX
` .020
.X
` .060
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
11/26/2013 HAT
RIH
1/20/2011 JCD
BCM
10/17/2010
JK
HT
REV
DATE
BY
APPVL
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
12/5/2007
B.KROBOT
12/13/2007
APPVL
H.PHAM
12/13/2007
APPVL
B.ISOM
FSCM No.

52142
NEXT ASSY
17.66 LBS
Printed REV: C

TITLE:
INSTALLATION,
HEATER (1) 100W
SCALE:

(PART NUMBER: 10010679-001)
1/4
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G97546
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
2 OF 4
REVISION:
Latest REV: C
(1) LEAD- BROWN

(1) LEAD- BLUE
(1) LEAD- GREEN
HEATER BOX
NOTES:
10. BROWN AND BLUE LEADS TO BE CONNECTED ON
OPPOSITE SIDE FROM TERMINAL BLOCK LABELS.
DETAIL B
BROWN INLINE LABEL 1, BLUE INLINE LABEL 2.
LEAD CONNECTIONS
GREEN, TOP OR BOTTOM GROUND CONNECTION.
A
11. SEAL THE ELBOW (ITEM 7) USING SEALING COMPOUND (ITEM 8) PER MP-1261.
DWN
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DECIMAL
Seitz Mike
12/13/2007
CHK
.XXX ` .005
.XX
` .020
.X
` .060
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
11/26/2013 HAT
RIH
1/20/2011 JCD
BCM
10/17/2010
JK
HT
REV
DATE
BY
APPVL
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
12/5/2007
B.KROBOT
12/13/2007
APPVL
H.PHAM
12/13/2007
APPVL
B.ISOM
FSCM No.

52142
NEXT ASSY
17.66 LBS
Printed REV: C
WITH COVER REMOVED

TITLE:
INSTALLATION,
HEATER (1) 100W
SCALE:

A
(PART NUMBER: 10010679-001)
1/4
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G97546
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
3 OF 4
REVISION:
Latest REV: C

GRADE 5
SIZE
STAINLESS STEEL
GRADE 8
SIZE
SIZE
#10-32
3.06 [4.15]
#10-32
4.25 [5.76]
#10-32
2.80 [3.80]
1/4-20
6.00 [8.13]
1/4-20
9.00 [12.20]
1/4-20
5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16
22.50 [30.51]
3/8-16
33.75 [45.76]
3/8-16
21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14
37.50 [50.84]
7/16-14
52.50 [71.18]
7/16-14
25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13
56.25 [76.25]
1/2-13
82.50 [111.85]
1/2-13
52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11
112.50 [152.53]
5/8-11
165.00 [223.71]
5/8-11
104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10
195.00 [264.38]
3/4-10
285.00 [386.41]
3/4-10
184.94 [250.74]
M4
1.92 [2.60]
M4
2.71 [3.67]
M4
1.78 [2.41]
M6
6.56 [8.89]
M6
9.26 [12.56]
M6
6.08 [8.24]
M8
15.78 [21.40]
M8
22.29 [30.22]
M8
14.68 [19.83]
M 10
31.11 [42.18]
M 10
43.92 [59.55]
M 10
28.82 [39.08]
A
(PART NUMBER: 10010679-001)

DWN
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DECIMAL
Seitz Mike
12/13/2007
CHK
.XXX ` .005
.XX
` .020
.X
` .060
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
11/26/2013 HAT
RIH
1/20/2011 JCD
BCM
10/17/2010
JK
HT
REV
DATE
BY
APPVL
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
12/5/2007
B.KROBOT
12/13/2007
APPVL
H.PHAM
12/13/2007
APPVL
B.ISOM
FSCM No.

52142
NEXT ASSY
17.66 LBS
Printed REV: C

TITLE:
INSTALLATION,
HEATER (1) 100W
SCALE:

1/4
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G97546
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
4 OF 4
REVISION:
Latest REV: C

1 of 1
12/19/2013
NOV Sugar Land
INSTL, HEATER CAGE MOTOR
Part Number:
10010679-001
Revision:
C
Item No.
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Oracle No.
10032318-003
10006322-001
10003350-001
10009946-001
10032382-012
10032377-021
10005636-001
10019180-001
10490016-020
10032444-091
10018324-001
10515973-001
Legacy No.
6550-10-0069
G140073
G55738-3
1225-07-0016
1313-39-0069
1322-05-0051
1885-02-0015
G91960387
50906-C
3919-05-0006
1885-11-0048
10515973-001
Description
HEATER, SELF LIMITING
COVER, HEATER MOUNTING
BOX, TERMINAL MOD HEATERS
HUB, ENTRY 3/4 INCREASE SAFETY
NIPPLE,PIPE;SZ 3/4 X CLOSE SCH40
ELBW,PIPE;3/4IN;NPT;SEAL
COMPOUND, SEALING POUCH
SLEEVE,ELECTRICAL
LOCKWASHER, SPLIT, 3/8" DIA
Gasket, Top Cover
Printed REV: C
UOM
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Foot
Each
Each
Each
Each
Reference
Quantity Designator
1
1
1
1
2
1
.2
1
10
10
.05
1
Latest REV: C
Printed REV: C
Latest REV: C
Printed REV: C
Latest REV: C
TC Number: 10626766-DAD
Printed REV: 03
Latest REV: 03
Printed REV: 03
Latest REV: 03
SHT 2
2 3
REF REF
SHT 2
(8) (2)
SEE NOTE 5
5 3/8 TYP
7/8 TYP
4
(4)
2
REF REF
(5) (6)
2
REF
1/4
1/4
N.D.E.
D.E.
4
(4)
N.D.E.
4
(4)
NOTES:
A
D.E.
RIGHT HAND BOX MOUNTING SHOWN
1. NUMBERS IN ( ) DESIGNATE QUANITY.

SEE TOP LEVEL MOTOR BOM
2. DIMENSIONS IN ( ) ARE REFERENCE.
FOR CONNECTION BOX LOCATION
3. LOCATE LABELS & TAGS (ITEMS 1, 2, 3, & 7) AS SHOWN.
LEFT HAND BOX MOUNTING MIRROR IMAGE
CENTER LABLES (ITEMS 2 & 3) ON COVERS AS SHOWN.
A
MARK HOLE LOCATIONS FOR "NOV" PLATE (ITEM 1) AND GROUND NAMEPLATE (ITEM 7).
(PART
NUMBER:
10010728-001)
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DRILL #37 DIAMETER HOLES, TYPICAL (4) PLACES, AND INSTALL
D 10/23/2013 HAT BCM
CONFIDENTAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO
DECIMAL
NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED
Seitz Mike
WITH DRIVE SCREWS (ITEM 4).
.XXX ` .005
NATIONAL-OILWELL, LP.REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE
CHK
9/26/2008
4. PRIOR TO INSTALLING MOTOR NAMEPLATE, STAMP MOTOR SERIAL .XX ` .020
C 9/24/2013 HAT BCM
TITLE:
.X
` .060
B. KROBOT
NUMBER ON FRAME UNDER NAMEPLATE LOCATION. ALSO
9/26/2008 CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.THIS
FINISH 125
APPVL
INSTALLATION,
B 5/21/2013 HAT BCM
DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NATIONALSTAMP MOTOR SERIAL NUMBER ON DRIVE & NON DRIVE FEET.
J. MCGUANE
NAMEPLATE & TAGS
5. LOCATE MOTOR, ATEX, & HEATER PLATE AS SHOWN. SEE
FRACTIONAL
9/26/2008 LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND THE INFORMATION
APPVL
A
BCM
CONTAINED
AND
REPRESENTED
HEREIN
IS
THE
HAT
4/19/2013
` 1/16"
TOP MOTOR BOM TO DETERMINE CORRECT ORIENTATION
B. MOATS
TIR .010
PROJECTION:
SCALE:
SIZE:
SHEET:
FSCM
No.
ANGULAR
BASED UPON LEFT OR RIGHT CONNECTION BOX MOUNTING.
REV DATE BY APPVL
1/8
POWER
SOLUTIONS
GROUP
` 1/2
1 OF 3
52142
B
MARK HOLE LOCATIONS AND DRILL #37 DIAMETER HOLES
500
INDUSTRIAL
BLVD.
NEXT ASSY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
REVISION:
DRAWING NUMBER:
TYPICAL (12) PLACES AND INSTALL WITH DRIVE SCREWS (ITEM 4).
N/A = LBS
D
G97379-3
FORM No. 137-D
TC Number: G97379-3:37
Printed REV: D
Latest REV: D
5 3/8
TYP
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION,
STAMP MODEL, SERIAL NUMBER,
AND YEAR ONTO NAMEPLATE
PER SALES OR WORK ORDER
7/8 TYP
6
(2)
SEE NOTE 6
1/4
B
4
(4)
B
1/4
SEE NOTE 5
4
(4)
1/4
REFER TO
TOP LEVEL
BILL OF MATERIAL
IF REQUIRED
A
VIEW A-A (TOP VIEW)
REF REF
10/23/2013 HAT BCM
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
9/24/2013 HAT
5/21/2013 HAT BCM
4/19/2013 HAT BCM
BCM
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
SCALE: 3/8

DECIMAL
6. LOCATE NAMEPLATE (ITEM 5) CENTERED ABOVE MOTOR &

ATEX NAMEPLATE. MARK HOLE LOCATIONS &
DRILL #37 DIA THRU TYPICAL (2) PLACES & INSTALL
NAMEPLATE WITH DRIVE SCREWS (ITEM 6).
7. DIMENSIONS ARE APPROXIMATE.
8. IDENTIFY PART WITH PART NUMBER & REVISION,
(EX:1XXXXXXX-XXX/REVXX) USING THE APPROPRIATE TAG..
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, STAMP

SERIAL NUMBER ON NAMEPLATE
PER SALES OR WORK ORDER
DETAIL B
A
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
NOTES:
4
(2)
APPVL
DWN
7/13/2008
Seitz Mike
CHK
9/26/2008
B. KROBOT
9/26/2008
APPVL
J. MCGUANE
9/26/2008
APPVL
B. MOATS
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
N/A = LBS
Printed REV: D

CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.THIS
DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NATIONALOILWELL, L.P. UPON REQUEST AND IN ANY EVENT

TITLE:
INSTALLATION,
NAMEPLATE & TAGS
SCALE:

(PART NUMBER: 10010728-001)
1/8
DRAWING NUMBER:
G97379-3
1
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 3
REVISION:
D
Latest REV: D
1/2
1/2
4
(4)
4
(4)
ISOMETRIC
DRIVE END
REF ONLY

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DECIMAL
10/23/2013 HAT BCM
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
9/24/2013 HAT
5/21/2013 HAT BCM
4/19/2013 HAT BCM
BCM
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
APPVL
DWN
7/13/2008
Seitz Mike
CHK
9/26/2008
B. KROBOT
9/26/2008
APPVL
J. MCGUANE
9/26/2008
APPVL
B. MOATS
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
N/A = LBS
Printed REV: D

CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.THIS
DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NATIONALOILWELL, L.P. UPON REQUEST AND IN ANY EVENT

TITLE:
INSTALLATION,
NAMEPLATE & TAGS
SCALE:

(PART NUMBER: 10010728-001)
1/8
DRAWING NUMBER:
G97379-3
1
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 3
REVISION:
D
Latest REV: D

1 of 1
10/25/2013
NOV Sugar Land
INSTL, NAMEPLATE & TAGS
Part Number:
10010728-001
Legacy Number: G97379-3
Revision:
D
Item No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Oracle No.
10013471-001
10859965-001
10859963-001
10032453-001
10666074-001
10490351-043
10013306-001
Legacy No.
G20190
10859965-001
10859963-001
1060-10-0002
10666074-001
53301-4-8-SS
54322
Description
NAMEPLATE, NOV LOGO
Tag, Danger/Hazardous Voltage
Tag, Danger/Hazardous Voltage
SCREW, DR 4 X 1/4 TY U SS
UHF NAMEPLATE, RIGMS-RFID
SCREW,DRIVE-TYPE U
NAMEPLATE, GROUND
Printed REV: D
UOM
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Reference
Quantity Designator
2
6
5
32
1
2
4
Latest REV: D
0518
ll 2 G Ex e ll T3 Gb Tamb. -40 to +55 C
Printed REV: 02
Latest REV: 02
0518
ll 2 G Ex e ll T3 Gb Tamb. -40 to +55 C
Printed REV: 02
Latest REV: 02
(36.50)
(11.18)
1/4
WELD (4) PLCS

095-105-2
2.88
TYP
(18.25)
1
(7.44)
(3.63)
SEE NOTE 5
A
CONNECTION END
DRIVE END
SECTION A-A
NOTE:
SEE SHT 2 FOR "T1" / "T3" BUS BAR MOUNTING
SEE SHT 3 FOR "T2" BUS BAR MOUNTING
NOTE:
RIGHT HAND POSITION SHOWN
MIRROR IMAGE ABOUT VERTICAL CENTERLINE
FOR LEFT HAND POSITION
CONNECTION END
SEE TOP LEVEL OF BOM FOR CONNECTION BOX

POSITION
RIGHT CONNECTION BOX POSITION SHOWN

A
NOTES:
1. NUMBERS IN ( ) DESIGNATE QUANTITY.

3. REMOVE EXCESS VARNISH FROM STATOR CORE AND RTD LEADS.
PRIOR TO INSERTION OF STATOR, INSPECT FRAME STATOR BORE
AND O.D. OF STATOR. IF NECESSARY HEAT FRAME PRIOR TO
STATOR INSERTION.
4. INSERT STATOR CORE (ITEM 2) INTO FRAME (ITEM 1) FROM
CONNECTION END AND PRESS TO SHOULDER IN FRAME.
CENTER LEADS ON STATOR CORE AT 12 O'CLOCK.
5. TACK WELD STATOR SUPPORT TO FRAME BARS WHERE ACCESSIBLE.
(PART NUMBER: 10022979-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
.XX
.X
3/3/2008
Seitz Mike
CHK
4/18/2008
.XXX ` .005
` .020
` .060
FINISH 125
L. SPANGLE
4/18/2008
APPVL
FRACTIONAL
B. MOATS
4/17/2008
APPVL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
06
12/9/2023 HAT BCM
REV
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
DO NOT CHANGE OR REVISE

WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL
FROM CERT. ENG
APPVL
B. ISOM
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
4771 LBS
Printed REV: 06


TITLE:
ASSEMBLY, FRAME/STATOR & CORE

(632 FRAME)
SCALE:

3/16
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G93277
1
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 5
REVISION:
06
Latest REV: 06
SHT 4
SHT 4
T2
7 16 18
(12) (12) (12) (24)
(2)
18 16 15 13 12 11 8
B
T3
16 15 12 11 10 8
(2) (4) (4) (8)

T1
CONNECTION END
DRIVE END
SECTION B-B
CONNECT LEADS MARKED "1" & "6" TO "T1"

("T1" & "T3" BUS BARS)
NOTES: (Cont.)
6. MOUNT BUS LINKS (ITEM 13 AND ITEM 14) TO BUS ASSEMBLY USING
HARDWARE (ITEMS 8,11, AND 12), HAND TIGHTEN ONLY. MOUNT BUS
BARS (ITEM 7) TO BUS LINKS USING HARDWARE (ITEMS 8,11, AND 12)
AND HAND TIGHTEN ONLY. USE COPPER SHIM STOCK IF REQUIRED.
POSITION AND INSTALL INSULATORS (ITEM 4 AND ITEM 6) USING
HARDWARE (ITEMS 3, 5, 8, AND 9) SEE SHEET #4.
7. CONNECT ALL LEAD LUGS (ITEM 10) TO BUS BARS USING HARDWARE
(ITEMS 8, 11, AND 12).
8. TIGHTEN ALL BUS BAR HARDWARE AND APPLY PUTTY (ITEM 15) TO
BOLTED JOINTS. HALF LAP BUS BARS WITH TAPE (ITEM 16) THEN APPLY
AIR VARNISH (ITEM 18). TORQUE BOLTS PER CHART ON SHEET 5.
A
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
.XX
.X
3/3/2008
Seitz Mike
CHK
4/18/2008
.XXX ` .005
` .020
` .060
FINISH 125
L. SPANGLE
4/18/2008
APPVL
FRACTIONAL
B. MOATS
4/17/2008
APPVL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
06
12/9/2023 HAT BCM
REV
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
(PART NUMBER: 10022979-001)
APPVL
B. ISOM
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
4771 LBS
Printed REV: 06


TITLE:

(632 FRAME)
SCALE:

3/16
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G93277
1
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 5
REVISION:
06
Latest REV: 06
16 15 12 11 10 8
(6) (6) (6) (12)
7 16 18
18 16 15 14 12 11 8
(1) (2) (2) (4)
T3
T2
T1
CONNECTION END
DRIVE END
SECTION C-C
C
("T2" BUS BAR)
(PART NUMBER: 10022979-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
Seitz Mike
CHK
4/18/2008
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
FINISH 125
L. SPANGLE
4/18/2008
APPVL
FRACTIONAL
B. MOATS
4/17/2008
APPVL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
06
12/9/2023 HAT BCM
REV
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
3/3/2008
APPVL
B. ISOM
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
4771 LBS
Printed REV: 06


TITLE:

(632 FRAME)
SCALE:

3/16
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G93277
1
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 5
REVISION:
06
Latest REV: 06
(2) (2)
DETAIL E
VIEW D-D
CONNECTION END
DRIVE END
(PART NUMBER: 10022979-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
Seitz Mike
CHK
4/18/2008
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
FINISH 125
L. SPANGLE
4/18/2008
APPVL
FRACTIONAL
B. MOATS
4/17/2008
APPVL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
06
12/9/2023 HAT BCM
REV
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
3/3/2008
APPVL
B. ISOM
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
4771 LBS
Printed REV: 06


TITLE:

(632 FRAME)
SCALE:

3/16
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G93277
1
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 5
REVISION:
06
Latest REV: 06

GRADE 5
SIZE
B
STAINLESS STEEL
GRADE 8
SIZE
SIZE
#10-32
3.06 [4.15]
#10-32
4.25 [5.76]
#10-32
2.80 [3.80]
1/4-20
6.00 [8.13]
1/4-20
9.00 [12.20]
1/4-20
5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16
22.50 [30.51]
3/8-16
33.75 [45.76]
3/8-16
21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14
37.50 [50.84]
7/16-14
52.50 [71.18]
7/16-14
25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13
56.25 [76.25]
1/2-13
82.50 [111.85]
1/2-13
52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11
112.50 [152.53]
5/8-11
165.00 [223.71]
5/8-11
104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10
195.00 [264.38]
3/4-10
285.00 [386.41]
3/4-10
184.94 [250.74]
M4
1.92 [2.60]
M4
2.71 [3.67]
M4
1.78 [2.41]
M6
6.56 [8.89]
M6
9.26 [12.56]
M6
6.08 [8.24]
M8
15.78 [21.40]
M8
22.29 [30.22]
M8
14.68 [19.83]
M 10
31.11 [42.18]
M 10
43.92 [59.55]
M 10
28.82 [39.08]
(PART NUMBER: 10022979-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
Seitz Mike
CHK
4/18/2008
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
FINISH 125
L. SPANGLE
4/18/2008
APPVL
FRACTIONAL
B. MOATS
4/17/2008
APPVL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
06
12/9/2023 HAT BCM
REV
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
3/3/2008
APPVL
B. ISOM
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
4771 LBS
Printed REV: 06


TITLE:

(632 FRAME)
SCALE:

3/16
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G93277
1
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 5
REVISION:
06
Latest REV: 06

1 of 1
12/19/2013
NOV Sugar Land
ASSY, FRAME STTR&COIL
Part Number:
10022979-001
Revision:
06
Item No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Oracle No.
10019932-001
10019810-001
10032267-003
10010952-001
10003220-001
10010953-001
10004416-001
10032353-010
10032444-113
10025319-001
10032444-116
10567492-001
10009748-001
10004592-001
10008383-001
10020897-001
10018324-001
10032356-004
Legacy No.
G83335
G82501
1640-02-0018
1825-01-0014
1640-02-0025
1825-01-0015
G56200
1690-30-0001
3919-06-0006
6175-87-0063
3919-06-0012
1420-13-0004
G56898
G56899
1885-11-0017
1885-10-0046
1885-11-0048
1885-06-0008
Description
FRAME, MACHINING 632FR
STA&COIL, 632FR
STUD, ALL THD 3/8-16 X 3/4'' LG
INSULATOR,ELECTRICAL
BOLT,STUD;SZ 3/8-16 X 1-1/4
INSULATOR,ELECTRICAL
BUS BAR, T1,T2 & T3
WASHER, COMPRSSN 3/8 X .089 ZP
TERM, RING #1/0 3/8H
LOCKNUT, HEX 3/8-16UNC-2B STL
BAR;BUS SUPPORT T1/T3
BAR, BUS SUPPORT T2
SEALANT, DUCT COMPOUND #1 BAG
TAPE, SILICONE RUB .020TK RED
PAINT, SPRAY CLR VARNISH #600
Printed REV: 06
Reference
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
2
Each
2
Each
3
Each
49
Each
1
Each
18
Each
24
Each
24
Each
2
Each
1
Pound
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Latest REV: 06
15
(10) (10)
12
(14) (14)
DE
14
NDE
(10) (10)
OPPISITE SIDE OF
AUXILIARY RTD BOX
13
(12) (12)
OPPISITE SIDE OF
MAIN CONNECTION BOX
ISOMETRIC
REF ONLY
(2)
DE
NDE
(EBS: 10010116-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
.XXX ` .005
` .020
` .060
NOTES:
.XX
.X
1. APPLY THREAD SEALANT, ITEM 10, TO HARDWARE

BEFORE ASSEMBLY.
2. TORQUE ALL STEEL FASTENERS PER TABLE ON SHEET 2.
FINISH 125
C
B
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV
9/20/2010
JK
HT
8/13/2010 JCD BCM

10/24/2006 TB
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BI
APPVL
DOBROWOLSKI
CHK
5/9/2006
R. RAMIREZ
5/9/2006
APPVL
M. SEITZ
5/9/2006
APPVL
B. ISOM
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY

FORM No. 137-D
5/5/2006
Printed REV: C


TITLE:
INSTALLATION, ACCESS COVERS

SCALE:

3/32
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G97331
1
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF
REVISION:
C
Latest REV: C

GRADE 5
SIZE
B
STAINLESS STEEL
GRADE 8
SIZE
SIZE
#10-32
3.06 [4.15]
#10-32
4.25 [5.76]
#10-32
2.80 [3.80]
1/4-20
6.00 [8.13]
1/4-20
9.00 [12.20]
1/4-20
5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16
22.50 [30.51]
3/8-16
33.75 [45.76]
3/8-16
21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14
37.50 [50.84]
7/16-14
52.50 [71.18]
7/16-14
25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13
56.25 [76.25]
1/2-13
82.50 [111.85]
1/2-13
52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11
112.50 [152.53]
5/8-11
165.00 [223.71]
5/8-11
104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10
195.00 [264.38]
3/4-10
285.00 [386.41]
3/4-10
184.94 [250.74]
1-8
480.00 [650.79]
1-8
675.00 [915.18]
1-8
455.24 [617.22]
M4
1.92 [2.60]
M4
2.71 [3.67]
M4
1.78 [2.41]
M6
6.56 [8.89]
M6
9.26 [12.56]
M6
6.08 [8.24]
M8
15.78 [21.40]
M8
22.29 [30.22]
M8
14.68 [19.83]
M 10
31.11 [42.18]
M 10
43.92 [59.55]
M 10
28.82 [39.08]
(EBS: 10010116-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
9/20/2010
JK
HT
FINISH 125
B
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV
8/13/2010 JCD BCM

10/24/2006 TB
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BI
APPVL
DOBROWOLSKI
CHK
5/9/2006
R. RAMIREZ
5/9/2006
APPVL
M. SEITZ
5/9/2006
APPVL
B. ISOM
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY

FORM No. 137-D
5/5/2006
Printed REV: C


TITLE:
INSTALLATION, ACCESS COVERS

SCALE:

3/32
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G97331
1
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF
REVISION:
C
Latest REV: C

1of1
11/8/2013
BillofMaterialEngineering
NOVSugarLand
INSTL,COVERASSY
PartNumber:
10010116001
LegacyNumber: G97331
Revision:
C
ItemNo.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
12
13
14
15
OracleNo.
10006561001
10006563001
10006565001
10032388002
10006616001
10032444091
10032560028
10018324001
10515971001
10515972001
10515973001
10515974001
LegacyNo.
G48357
G48358
G48359
1320051018
G48674
3919050006
7600024
1885110048
10515971001
10515972001
10515973001
10515974001
Description
COVER,TOPNDE
COVER,SIDE628FR
COVER,TOPDE
PLUG,PIPE;SZ1/2;SKTHD;SS
COVER,RTDBOXOPENING
SCRW,CAP;HDHEX;THRDSZ3/816IN
Supersededby10490015131
SEALANT,VIBRATITE#31OZ
Gasket,TopCover
Gasket,TopCover
Gasket,TopCover
Gasket,TopCover
Printed REV: C
Reference
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
2
Each
1
Each
46
Each
46
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Each
1
Latest REV: C
(6 11/16)
(40 3/4)
(1 1/2)
(REF)
FRAME
(13 1/4)
(10) (10)
17 5/8
(47 1/2)
DRIVE END
NON DRIVE END
VIEW FACING DRIVE END
(EBS: 10010372-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
Seitz Mike
CHK
1/8/2007
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
1/4/2007
` .020
` .060
NOTES:
FINISH 125
R.RAMIREZ
1/4/2007
APPVL
1.
2.
3.
4.
FRACTIONAL
A.CARDIEL
1/4/2007
APPVL
NUMBER IN ( ) DESIGNATES QUANTITY.

DIMENSIONS IN ( ) ARE REFERENCE.
TORQUE ALL STEEL FASTENERS PER TABLE ON SHEET #2.
APPLY SMALL AMOUNT OF SEALANT (ITEM-5) TO ALL SCREW
THREADS PRIOR TO INSERTION.
FORM No. 137-D
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV
5/13/2010 JCD
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
N.B.
APPVL
B.ISOM
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
LBS
Printed REV: A


TITLE:
INSTALLATION, HOOD (DRIVE END)

SCALE:

1/8
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G97125
1
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF
REVISION:
A
Latest REV: A

GRADE 5
SIZE
B
STAINLESS STEEL
GRADE 8
SIZE
SIZE
#10-32
3.06 [4.15]
#10-32
4.25 [5.76]
#10-32
2.80 [3.80]
1/4-20
6.00 [8.13]
1/4-20
9.00 [12.20]
1/4-20
5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16
22.50 [30.51]
3/8-16
33.75 [45.76]
3/8-16
21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14
37.50 [50.84]
7/16-14
52.50 [71.18]
7/16-14
25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13
56.25 [76.25]
1/2-13
82.50 [111.85]
1/2-13
52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11
112.50 [152.53]
5/8-11
165.00 [223.71]
5/8-11
104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10
195.00 [264.38]
3/4-10
285.00 [386.41]
3/4-10
184.94 [250.74]
1-8
480.00 [650.79]
1-8
675.00 [915.18]
1-8
455.24 [617.22]
M4
1.92 [2.60]
M4
2.71 [3.67]
M4
1.78 [2.41]
M6
6.56 [8.89]
M6
9.26 [12.56]
M6
6.08 [8.24]
M8
15.78 [21.40]
M8
22.29 [30.22]
M8
14.68 [19.83]
M 10
31.11 [42.18]
M 10
43.92 [59.55]
M 10
28.82 [39.08]
(EBS: 10010372-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
Seitz Mike
CHK
1/8/2007
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
FINISH 125
R.RAMIREZ
1/4/2007
APPVL
FRACTIONAL
A.CARDIEL
1/4/2007
APPVL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV
5/13/2010 JCD
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
1/4/2007
N.B.
APPVL
B.ISOM
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
LBS
Printed REV: A


TITLE:
INSTALLATION, HOOD (DRIVE END)

SCALE:

1/8
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G97125
1
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF
REVISION:
A
Latest REV: A

1of1
11/8/2013
BillofMaterialEngineering
NOVSugarLand
INSTL,AIREXHAUSTTOP
PartNumber:
10010372001
LegacyNumber: G97125
Revision:
A
ItemNo.
1
2
3
4
5
OracleNo.
10007011001
10032444091
10032557016
10005087001
10018318001
LegacyNo.
G57391
3919050006
1690100008
1885110028
1885110015
Description
HOOD,AIRDUCTEXHAUSTTOP
SCRW,CAP;HDHEX;THRDSZ3/816IN
Supersededby10490016020
SEALANT,SILICONEGASKET
LOCTITE,#242BLUE
Printed REV: A
Reference
Each
1
Each
10
Each
10
Each
1
Each
1
Latest REV: A
Printed REV: 02
Latest REV: 02
Printed REV: 02
Latest REV: 02
Printed REV: 02
Latest REV: 02

1 of 1
11/27/2012
NOV Sugar Land
Instl, Pressure Switch
Part Number:
10626771-001
Revision:
02
Item No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Oracle No.
10501947-001
10032557-014
10032454-017
10032368-004
10032377-020
10032352-002
10032509-007
10009842-001
10032304-012
10018324-001
10032377-025
Legacy No.
10501947-001
50904-C
3215-05-0004
1322-03-0088
1321-07-0004
1321-09-0037
G21614
G31438
6690-60-0035
1885-11-0048
G21615
Description
Switch, Pressure
WASHER, LOCK-REGULAR 1/4 CAD
SCREW,CAP;1/4" DIA;1/2" LG;SOCKE
BUSHING,PIPE;REDUCER;SZ 1/2M TO
ELBOW,PIPE;SZ 90 1/8NPTM-#4;90;N
FITTING;SZ 1/8NPTM-#4;SZ NPTM;SZ
FITTING, #4JIC #4 HOSE
HOSE;PUSH-LOK;BUNA-N;blue
CLAMP, VYL COAT 1/2''SZ 3/8STUD
ELBOW,PIPE;SZ 90 SWVL #4JIC-#4;9
Printed REV: 02
Reference
Each
1
Each
4
Each
4
Each
2
Each
2
Each
2
Each
2
Foot
8
Each
3
Each
1
Each
2
Latest REV: 02
ITEM QTY UOM ITEM NUMBER

1
1
EA 10026682-001
2
(4.850)
GAGE LINE
(4.850)
GAGE LINE
Parts List
DOCUMENT NO.
MATERIAL / DESCRIPTION
G56528
SHEAVE, DRIVE HUB (TAPERED)
PER BOM (REF) SHAFT, MACHINING
REF
REF
n(5.650)
n(5.650)
GAGE LINE
GAGE LINE
SECTION A-A
VIEW A
HUB ARRANGEMENT
SECTION B-B
VIEW B
HUB ARRANGEMENT
(EBS: 10010350-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
5/29/2006
DECIMAL
Seitz Mike
CHK
7/28/2006
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
R.RAMIREZ
7/31/2006
APPVL
FINISH 125
NOTES:
1. MOUNT HUB PER MANUFACTURING PROCEDURE MP-1247.
2. TAPER ON SHAFT AND HUB: 1.25 IN/FT.
8/3/2010
JB
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV
3/12/2007 MAS
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
FORM No. 137-D
BLD
BI
APPVL
A.CARDIEL
7/31/2006
APPVL
B.ISOM
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY
N/A = LBS
Printed REV: B


TITLE:
INSTALLATION, DRIVE HUB

(TAPERED)
FOR 5.65" DIAMETER SHAFT
SCALE:

5/16
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
G97318
1
PROJECTION:
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF
REVISION:
B
Latest REV: B
(17 3/8)
SEE NOTE 6
(14) (14)
B
(19 1/2)
5
(14) (14)
8
TOP COVER GASKET
(2)
DRIVE END
SEE NOTE 5
(2)
NON DRIVE END
DRIVE END
ISOMETRIC
NOTES:
A
1. NUMBERS IN ( ) DESIGNATES QUANTITY.

3. TORQUE ALL STEEL FASTENERS PER TABLE ON SHEET 2.
4. APPLY SMALL AMOUNT OF SEALANT (ITEM 9) TO ALL SCREW
THREADS PRIOR TO INSERTION.
5. REMOVE TOP COVER, NON DRIVE END (10006561-001) PRIOR TO
INSTALLING BLOWER ASSEMBLY.
6. SEE TOP LEVEL MOTOR SPECIFICATION FOR BLOWER
ASSEMBLY PART NUMBER.
7. IDENTIFY PART WITH PART NUMBER & REVISION,
(EX:1XXXXXXX-XXX/REVXX) USING THE APPROPRIATE TAG.
REF ONLY
TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
5/13/2013
H. TASSEW
CHK
5/13/2013
.XXX ` .005
03
7/7/2014 HAB BCM
02
6/14/2013 HAT BCM
REV
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
APPVL
DOBROWOLSKI
5/13/2013
APPVL
K. HARWOOD
5/13/2013
APPVL
B. MOATS
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY

FORM No. 137-D
(PART NUMBER: 10746842-001)
Printed REV: 03


TITLE:
INSTALLATION, BLOWER
20HP
SCALE:

5/64
PROJECTION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10746842-ASM
1
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 2
REVISION:
03
Latest REV: 03

GRADE 5
GRADE 8
STAINLESS STEEL
SIZE
SIZE
SIZE
#10-32
3.06 [4.15]
#10-32
4.25 [5.76]
#10-32
2.80 [3.80]
1/4-20
6.00 [8.13]
1/4-20
9.00 [12.20]
1/4-20
5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16
22.50 [30.51]
3/8-16
33.75 [45.76]
3/8-16
21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14
37.50 [50.84]
7/16-14
52.50 [71.18]
7/16-14
25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13
56.25 [76.25]
1/2-13
82.50 [111.85]
1/2-13
52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11
112.50 [152.53]
5/8-11
165.00 [223.71]
5/8-11
104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10
195.00 [264.38]
3/4-10
285.00 [386.41]
3/4-10
184.94 [250.74]
1-8
480.00 [650.79]
1-8
675.00 [915.18]
1-8
455.24 [617.22]
M4
1.92 [2.60]
M4
2.71 [3.67]
M4
1.78 [2.41]
M6
6.56 [8.89]
M6
9.26 [12.56]
M6
6.08 [8.24]
M8
15.78 [21.40]
M8
22.29 [30.22]
M8
14.68 [19.83]
M 10
31.11 [42.18]
M 10
43.92 [59.55]
M 10
28.82 [39.08]
(PART NUMBER: 10746842-001)

TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DWN
DECIMAL
H. TASSEW
CHK
5/13/2013
.XXX ` .005
.XX
.X
` .020
` .060
FINISH 125
FRACTIONAL
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
03
7/7/2014 HAB BCM
02
6/14/2013 HAT BCM
REV
DATE
BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
APPVL
DOBROWOLSKI
5/13/2013
APPVL
K. HARWOOD
5/13/2013
APPVL
B. MOATS
FSCM No.
52142
NEXT ASSY

FORM No. 137-D
5/13/2013
Printed REV: 03


TITLE:
INSTALLATION, BLOWER
20HP
SCALE:

5/64
PROJECTION:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
10746842-ASM
1
SIZE:
SHEET:
OF 2
REVISION:
03
Latest REV: 03

1 of 1
7/31/2014
NOV Sugar Land
Instl, Blower
Part Number:
10746842-001
Revision:
03
Item No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Oracle No.
10532115-001
10532114-001
10490361-594
10032557-018
10490361-340
10490016-020
10032387-018
10032388-007
10018324-001
Legacy No.
10532115-001
10532114-001
50008-08-C5
50908-C
50006-08-C5
50906-C
1320-05-0115
1322-23-0004
1885-11-0048
Reference
Description
Fabrication, Blower Adapter
Each
1
Gasket
Each
1
Screw, Cap;Hex Head;0.500-13 UNC-2A;L 1 in;Fully
Each Threaded
14
WASHER, LOCK
Each
14
SCREW,HEX HD CAP 3/8-16X1 GR5
Each
14
LOCKWASHER, SPLIT, 3/8" DIA
Each
1
PLUG,PIPE;SOLID;SZ 3/4;HEX;ZP
Each
4
PLUG, 1/2 SQ HD SS
Each
2
Each
1
Printed REV: 03
Latest REV: 03
SECTION 3
Installation, Care and

Operating Manual
LS-National Oilwell Pulsation Dampener
Type 107.132.00 SM
RIG/PLANT
ADDITIONAL CODE
SDRL CODE
TOTAL PGS
REMARKS
MAIN TAG NUMBER
DISCIPLINE
CLIENT PO NUMBER
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
2
REVISION HISTORY
01
Oct. 13,2005
Issued
Li Jun Zhang Jian
Wang YuanZ
02
July 26,2006
Required by Designer
Li Jun Zhang Jian
Wang YuanZ
03
July,3,2007
Required by NOV
Li Jun Wang YingHua Wang YuanZ
Rev
Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
Reason for issue
Prepared
Checked
Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision
02
03a
03b
03c
Change Description
The metric screws of the charging connector ,the presure gauge and the charging valve
were changed into inch.
Page 6,10 ---Change torque
Page 9.12,16---Change valve guard, pressure gage,caution tag and charging valve per
NOV requirement.
Part list been changed accordingly
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
3
PREFACE
LS-NOV makes no warranties of any kind, expressed or implied; including any warranty of
mechanical fitness for any particular purpose that the work performed pursuant to this
manual will be free from defects in workmanship or material.
LS-NOV retains for itself all proprietary rights in and to all designs, engineering details, data
and procedures set forth herein. This manual is intended for the sole use of LS-NOV
customers and they shall strictly control copying of same, as this manual and all copies
thereof may be recalled by LS-NOV at any time.
This manual makes recommendations only. The customer is at all times responsible for
actual disassembly, inspection, re-assembly and testing of the pulsation dampener body.
The customer is also solely responsible for providing competent and qualified persons;
equipment and facilities to perform such operations; and for workmanship and safety.
If at any time the customer is unable to understand the recommendations made in this
manual or is unable to follow those recommendations, they should consult the nearest LSNOV location.
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
4
Contents
PREFACE.................................................................................................................................... 3
1
INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................ 5
1.1 Mounting ................................................................................................................... 6
1.2
Precharging (NITROGEN ONLY) ........................................................................... 6
DISASSEMBLY ................................................................................................................ 8
2.1
Disassembly Procedure.......................................................................................... 8
2.2
Cleaning and Inspection Procedure........................................................................ 9
ASSEMBLY .................................................................................................................... 10
3.1
Bottom Plate Gasket Installation........................................................................... 10
3.2
Bottom Plate Installation ....................................................................................... 10
3.3
Diaphragm Installation .......................................................................................... 10
3.4
Stabilizer Installation............................................................................................. 10
3.5
Cover Plate Installation......................................................................................... 11
3.6
Installation of Charging Valve ............................................................................... 11
3.7
Installation of Pressure Gauge ............................................................................. 11
3.8
Pressurize Pulsation Dampener ........................................................................... 12
MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 13
4.1
Precharge ............................................................................................................. 13
4.2
Low Precharge Effects.......................................................................................... 13
4.3
High Precharge Effects......................................................................................... 13
PRECHARGE ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................... 13

5.1
Precharge Low...................................................................................................... 13
5.2
Precharge High..................................................................................................... 14
PARTS ............................................................................................................................ 15
6.1
Pulsation Dampener Parts List (See Figure 6-1) .................................................. 15
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
5
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Do not attempt to precharge pulsation dampener prior to mounting the unit into
the pump piping system.
The LS-NOV Pulsation Dampener should be mounted in the vertical position (refer to Figure
1-1 for mounting options) with the mating flange connection at the bottom. The discharge
dampener should be mounted as close as possible to the discharge port of the pump. If
possible, it is advantageous that the dampener be mounted in such a way that the fluid
stream is directed towards the fluid opening.
Horizontal Discharge
Dampener
Figure 1-1. Mounting Options
www.lsnoi.com
Vertical Discharge
Dampener
Document number
Revision
Page
Nitrogen Bottle
Charging Valve Hose Assy.
107.132.00SM
03
6
Charging Valve.
Figure 1-2. Precharge Hookup

1.1 Mounting
1.1.1 Install stud bolts in the replaceable bottom plate.
1.1.2 Position dampener on gasket and mating flange so that the space between flange and
bottom connection is totally equal around the circumference.
1.1.3 Install one lubricated nut on each stud and tighten one turn at a time until dampener is
firmly in place. Assure that space between dampener and flange is equal.
1.1.4 Cross tighten nuts to the proper torque (appro. 1012 lb-ft or 1372 N.m).
1.2
Precharging (NITROGEN ONLY)
The correct precharge is vital for maximizing efficiency of the pulsation dampener. Generally,
precharge pressure is based on the average operating pressure of the system, but precharge can
be affected by other system parameters; for these applications, consult qualified LS-NOV
personnel for correct precharging instructions.
WARNING: ALWAYS PRECHARGE WITH ZERO PRESSURE ON THE SYSTEM AND ALWAYS
PRECHARGE WITH NITROGEN.
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
7
1.2.1 General Precharging Instructions

1.2.1.1 The pressure gauge is located under the valve guard and is exposed by removing the
valve guard.
1.2.1.2 Before precharging the dampener make sure all cover stud nuts are tightened evenly and
charging valve and pressure gauge seal nuts are firmly seated on the dampener.
1.2.1.3 Precharging is accomplished by connecting one end of the charging hose assembly to a
standard commercially available NITROGEN bottle and the other end to the charging
valve located at the top of the pulsation dampener.
1.2.1.4 Precharge from a standard commercially available nitrogen bottle equipped with a
pressure regulator.
1.2.1.5 For those applications where higher precharge pressures are required, a gas booster
pump is available.
1.2.1.6 Open bottle regulator valve until recommended precharge pressure shows on regulator
gauge.
1.2.1.7 Slowly open charging valve on dampener. Allow pressure to increase in the dampener
until dampener pressure gauge reads the specified precharge
1.2.1.8 Close the charging valve and tighten. Then, close regulator valve at nitrogen bottle.
Remove charging hose, replace dust plug in charging valve.
1.2.2 Precharge Recommendations

For normal operating conditions, set the precharge pressure at 50 to 70 percent of the average
operating discharge pressure not to exceed 5000 PSI350kg/cm. The precharge pressure can
be as low as 30 percent or as high as 75 percent of system operating pressure. However, these
precharge settings may shorten diaphragm life.
1.2.3 Leak Detection

Apply leak detection fluid at all connections around valve, pressure gauge, cover, body contact
surfaces, and studs. Observe carefully for bubbles that indicate leaks. If any indications are found,
check system for loose connections and retighten. Allow the nitrogen gas in the dampener to
come to ambient conditions (approximately one-half hour) and recheck the precharge pressure.
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
8
Adjust the precharge pressure as required. After precharge pressure has stabilized at specified
pressure, close valves, remove charging hose. Dampener is now ready for operation.
DISASSEMBLY
2.1
Disassembly Procedure
Refer to Figure 2-1.

2.1.1 Shut down pumps and remove system pressure from dampener.
2.1.2 Open charging valve and bleed off all precharge pressure. CAUTION: System and vessel
pressure must be at zero PSI before removing charging valve and pressure gauge or
loosening cover or flange bolts.
2.1.3 Remove pressure gauge from cover.
2.1.4 Check for system fluid in gauge and valve ports.
2.1.5 Loosen all cover stud nuts, but do not remove. Make sure the cover plate is not pushing
upwards against nuts. This would indicate that pressure has not been completely removed
from dampener.
2.1.6 After all pressure is removed from dampener, remove nuts from studs.
2.1.7 If dampener is equipped with a stabilizer, remove cap screw, lock washer and stabilizer
plate. Remove stabilizer so the diaphragm may be folded and removed from the body.
2.1.8 Pull neck portion of diaphragm loose from one side of dampener. Push bottom of
diaphragm down, fold diaphragm or place bar between dampener body and diaphragm
below the diaphragm mid-section to assist folding and removal of diaphragm from body.
2.1.9 If the bottom plate is to be removed for replacement or inspection, follow the procedure
below:
a. Verify cover is attached and all stud nuts are snug.
b. Remove all flange and stud nuts at bottom connection.
c. Remove dampener from flange connection. Set stud nuts and gaskets aside and save
for reinstallation.
d. Remove dirt and debris from bottom plate opening.
e. Remove socket head cap screws that hold bottom plate in place. Set aside and
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
9
save.
f. Remove bottom plate from dampener. Remove gasket and inspect for damage.
Set aside and save if reusable. Replace if damaged.
g. Inspect bottom plate for excessive pitting, corrosion or wear. If these conditions
exist, consult your nearest LS-NOV representative for corrective action.
2.2
2.2.1
Cleaning and Inspection Procedure

Flush diaphragm body, clean and remove scale and other foreign material.
2.2.2 Inspect inside of dampener body for excessive pitting. Corrosion or wear. If these
conditions exist, consult your nearest LS-NOV representative.
2.2.3 Mild pitting or scaling can be removed with application of light duty emery cloth. Inside of
dampener must be free of burrs and debris.
Figure 2-1. Typical 107.132.00 Pulsation Dampener Disassembly
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
10
ASSEMBLY
All metal surfaces of the cover plate, body, and bottom plate which come into contact with the
diaphragm must be cleaned carefully before reassembly. Scrape and wire brush all surfaces and
completely remove any foreign matter, rust or scale. Refer to Figure 3-1 while following the
procedure below.
3.1
Bottom Plate Gasket Installation
3.1.1 Place bottom plate gasket in groove of bottom plate.
3.2
Bottom Plate Installation
3.2.1 Insert bottom plate into body taking care not to pinch gasket and align counter bore holes
with tapped holes in body. Install socket head cap screws and tighten evenly until bottom
plate is snug against body. Torque cap screws to appro. 650 lb-ft or 882 N.m.
3.3
Diaphragm Installation
3.3.1 Apply a light coat of a general lubricant (castor oil or equivalent) on diaphragm to aid in
installation.
3.3.2 Pull up on neck of diaphragm while pushing diaphragm insert area down.
3.3.3 Take the new diaphragm in the at rest position and roll one side toward the other forming a
crude football shape. A thin belt or strap may be helpful in holding this shape.
3.3.4 Apply lubricant to the folded diaphragm and insert it long ways into the body of the
dampener as far as possible (the diaphragm should go over half way into the dampener
body).
3.3.5 Fold the remainder of the diaphragm into the vessel and allow it to open inside the body.
3.3.6 Position the diaphragm within the neck of the vessel.
3.4
Stabilizer Installation
3.4.1 When stabilizer is used, temporarily install hex screw into insert.
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
11
3.4.2 Break vacuum at neck by pulling diaphragm slightly away from sealing area.
3.4.3 Pull up on hex nut so diaphragm bottom moves up near neck opening.
3.4.4 Re-seat diaphragm neck, remove hex screw, and install stabilizer.
3.4.5 Fold stabilizer with edge down and insert into diaphragm opening.
3.4.6 Assemble stabilizer plate, lock washer, and hex screw through stabilizer and fasten to
diaphragm by attaching hex screw to threaded insert.
3.4.7 Tighten securely with socket wrench.
NOTE: Make certain that the neck portion of the diaphragm and cover plate is clean and free
of any debris, rust, or scale. Coat with a light lubricant prior to installation of cover plate to the
body.
3.5
Cover Plate Installation
3.5.1 Install cover plate, studs, and lubricated nuts. Cross tighten by hand or wrench, a few turns
at a time, until cover is firmly seated on the dampener body. Cross tighten to the
appropriate torque (~2000lb-ft or 2700N.m).
3.6
Installation of Charging Valve
3.6.1 Back thread seal nut on valve and thread valve into tapped hole.
3.6.2 Tighten to 20 5 lb-ft or 27 7 N.m torque
3.6.3 If the valve is not facing in the proper direction, take the following steps:
a. Rotate forward if less than a 1/2 turn is required to position valve in proper direction.
b. Rotate backward if the previous step is not possible until the valve is positioned in the
proper direction (. turn maximum).
c. After valve is in position, tighten seal nut to 20 5 lb-ft or 27 7 N.m torque.
3.7
Installation of Pressure Gauge
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
12
3.7.1 Install pressure gauge so that the face is positioned in such a manner that it will be visible
through the valve guard opening.
3.7.2 Back thread seal nut on valve and thread valve into tapped hole.
3.7.3 Tighten to 20 5 ft-lb or 27 7 N.m torque.
3.7.4 If the gauge is not facing in the proper direction, take the following steps:
a. Rotate forward if less than a 1/2 turn is required to position gauge in proper direction
b. Rotate backward if the previous step is not possible until the gauge is positioned in
the proper direction (1/2 turn maximum).
c. After gauge is in position, tighten seal nut to 20 5 lb-ft or 27 7 N.m torque.
3.8
Pressurize Pulsation Dampener
Use precharge instructions in Section 1. Attach valve guard, and the pulsation dampener is
now ready for use.
Figure 3-1. Typical Pulsation Dampener-Assembly
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
13
MAINTENANCE
4.1
Precharge
4.1.1 When properly installed and pre-charged, the pulsation dampener is virtually maintenance
free.
4.1.2 The vessel should be checked periodically for proper precharge and leaks. Unless
conditions such as ambient temperature, operating conditions, or operating temperatures
change, checking every six months should be sufficient.
4.2
Low Precharge Effects
4.2.1 If the pre-charge pressure is TOO LOW, the pulsation dampener will fill with excess fluid,
thus losing some of the working volume of the gas and reducing dampener efficiency.
4.2.2 Additionally, excessive flexing of the diaphragm may cause premature rubber failure at the
neck or equator of the diaphragm.
4.3
High Precharge Effects
4.3.1 If the pre-charge is TOO HIGH, the diaphragm insert will rest on the bottom of the
dampener, closing off the fluid inlet.
4.3.2 Until the system pressure exceeds the precharge pressure, no dampening will take place.
4.3.3 During the time the precharge pressure is nearly equal with the system pressure, the
diaphragm will bounce on and off the inlet opening which could effect the service life of the
diaphragm.
PRECHARGE ADJUSTMENTS
5.1
Precharge Low
5.1.1 Original precharge may have been to low.

5.1.2 Ambient temperature may have decreased.
5.1.3 Check charging valve for leaks.
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
14
a. Apply leak detection fluid to threads and valve openings.

b. Tighten loose threads, close valve stem, or replace valve if stem does not close.
5.1.4 Check pressure gauge for leaks.
a. Apply leak detection fluid to threads, face, and back cover.
b. Tighten loose threads. Replace gauge if leaks continue.
5.1.5 Check for leaks between cover and body.
a. Apply leak detection fluid to studs and cover-body contact surfaces.
b. Tighten stud nuts. If leaks persist, remove cover and clean mating surfaces.
Reassemble and repeat leak test.
5.1.6 Check Diaphragm (if all the above fail to find the leak). If the dampener will not hold
precharge pressure, it may be due to nitrogen leaks through the diaphragm. Check for
evidence of fluid at either charging valve or pressure gauge port hole. CAUTION: Make
sure dampener pressure is at zero psi before removing charging valve or pressure
gauge. If fluid is present, replace diaphragm. See Disassembly and Assembly
sections.
5.2
Precharge High
5.2.1 Original precharge may have been too high.

5.2.2 Ambient temperature may have increased. Release pressure.
5.2.3 Diaphragm may be trapping pressure (system fluid) when pump is shut down. This will be
indicated by a higher than normal pressure reading on the gauge, which is usually of a
different value, each time the pump is shut down. This condition usually occurs when the
fluid is highly viscous. Installation of a diaphragm stabilizer should cure this condition.
CAUTION: If it is determined that any items need to be replaced or dampener cover
removed, PLEASE FOLLOW THE DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES.
www.lsnoi.com
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
15
PARTS
6.1
Pulsation Dampener Parts List (See Figure 6-1)
Item
No.
Description
Part No.
Qty.
Body
107.132.01
Diaphragm
107.130.01.00-1
Diaphragm Stabilizer
107.130.02
Stabilizer Plate
107.130.04
Stabilizer Screw 1"-8UNC-2A
107.130.05
Washer
GB93-87
17
NUT,HEX HEAD,COVER PLATE
107.132.05
12
18
Stud Bolt, Cover Plate
107.132.06
12
20
O-Ring
D4-4-66
21
Cap Screw, Bottom Plate M33x2-2A
107.132.07
22
Bottom Plate
107.132.08
23
Nut M33x2-2A
107.132.09
24
Bolt
107.132.10
26
Cover Plate
107.132.13
27
Valve Guard
107.132.30.00
28
Pressuregauge,0~6000psi(40mpa)
1/4"NPT
7806202
29
Charging Valve
7500905
30
Tag, Caution
107.132.12
www.lsnoi.com
27
M48x3-2A
140x5.7
M33x2-2A
Document number
Revision
Page
107.132.00SM
03
16
Figure 6-1. Typical Pulsation Dampener - Cutaway for Part Identification
www.lsnoi.com
Operation, and Maintenance

Manual
Reset Relief Valve
Titan Class Type C

M-34000
Address: NOV Valve Group
9700 West Gulf Bank
Houston TX 77040
Phone #: 281 272 7700
Installation and Operation Manual

Reset Relief Valve C 34000
Foreword
This manual is published as a guide for the normal operation of your NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO equipment.
Because of many factors which contribute to the function or malfunction of this machinery, and not having complete
knowledge of each factor or combination of factors, we cannot detail all facets of this subject. We must therefore
confine the scope of this presentation and when situations encountered are not fully encompassed by complete,
understandable instructions, these situations must be referred to the manufacturer.
The dimension and tolerances specified in this publication are those desirable for the most efficient operations of the
equipment. When components become worn or when new parts are introduced into a worn unit, it may not be possible
or economically feasible to reestablish such strict alignment and correct all dimensional deviations.
Improvements in design, engineering, materials, production methods, etc., may necessitate changes in these
products and result in inconsistencies between the content of this publication and the physical equipment. We reserve
the right to make these changes without incurring any liability or obligation beyond that which is stipulated in the
purchase contract.
The pictures, photographs, charts, diagrams, drawings, verbal contents and specifications are not to be construed
as giving rise to any warranty on the part of NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO. NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO makes no
warranty either expressed or implied beyond that which is stipulated in the purchase contract.
! CAUTION ! CAUTION ! CAUTION !

EXERCISE SAFETY IN ALL PERFORMANCES: DO NOT IGNORE ANY WARNINGS, USE ONLY APPROVED
METHODS, MATERIALS AND TOOLS. DO NOT PERMIT ANY FUNCTION OF QUESTIONABLE SAFETY;
ACCIDENTS ARE CAUSED BY UNSAFE ACTS AND UNSAFE CONDITIONS. SAFETY IS YOUR BUSINESS AND
YOU ARE INVOLVED.
! WARNING ! WARNING ! WARNING !

BEFORE PERFORMING ANY SERVICE FUNCTION, BE CERTAIN THAT THE UNIT IS SEPARATED FROM ITS
POWER SOURCE OR THAT THE POWER SOURCE IS LOCKED-OUT TO PREVENT ANY FORM OF ENERGY
FROM ENTERING THE EQUIPMENT. THIS WOULD INCLUDE ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL ENERGY INTO OR
FROM THE PRIME MOVER(S), PNEUMATIC ENERGY FROM THE COMPRESSOR/AIR SYSTEM, ETC.

FAILURE TO OBSERVE THE WARNINGS AND NOTES OF CAUTION IN THIS PUBLICATION CAN RESULT IN
PROPERTY DAMAGE, SERIOUS BODILY INJURY, OR DEATH.

DO NOT PROCEED WITH INSTALLATION UNTIL THE INSTALLER HAS READ THE MANUAL IN ITS ENTIRETY.
Copyright 2007 National Oilwell Varco, all rights reserved.
1
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com

Publication date: August 7, 2007
All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
All rights reserved. This publication is the property of, and contains information proprietary to National Oilwell Varco. No
part of this publication may be reproduced or copied in any form, or by any means, including electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of National Oilwell Varco.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Warranty
National Oilwell Varco (NOV) warrants that, for a period of one year from the date of delivery equipment of manufacture,
the Equipment shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service, and provided the
Equipment is used and maintained in accordance with instructions supplied. This is a sole and exclusive warranty. If a
defect in the Equipment appears within one year from the date of shipment, and Purchaser has given written notice of
such defect within thirty days from the discovery thereof, NOV will repair or replace the part, at its option, by shipping a
similar part FOB shipping point or, at its option, refund an equitable portion of the purchase price. NOV may require the
return, to a designated location, of the defective part, transportation prepaid to establish Purchaser's claim. No
allowance will be made for repairs undertaken without NOVs written consent or approval. This warranty applies only to
equipment manufactured by NOV. Warranties on equipment manufactured by others, if any, are assigned to Purchaser
by NOV (without recourse) at time of delivery. Any description of Equipment, drawings, specifications, and any samples,
models, bulletins, or similar material, used in connection with this sale are for the sole purpose of identifying the
Equipment and are not to be construed as an express warranty that the Equipment will conform to such description. Any
field advisory or installation support is advisory only. The foregoing warranties are in lieu of all other warranties, whether
oral, written, express, implied or statutory. Implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose will
not apply. NOV's warranty obligations and purchaser's remedies there under are solely and exclusively as stated herein.
Purchaser's sole and exclusive remedy, whether based upon warranty, contract or tort, including negligence, will be to
proceed under this warranty. All liability of NOV shall terminate one year from the date of delivery of the Equipment.
Intended audience
Conventions
Notes, cautions, and warnings
Notes
Cautions
Warnings
Illustrations
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
Safety requirements
Personnel training
Recommended tools
Genera system safety practices
Replacing components
Maintenance
Proper use of equipment
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
Intended audience
This manual is intended for use by field engineering, installation, operation and repair personnel. Every effort has been
made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained herein. National Oilwell Varco company (NOV), will not be
held liable for errors in this material, or for consequences arising from misuse of this material.
Conventions
2
www.nov.com
MANUAL: M-34000

Notes, cautions, and warnings

Notes, cautions, and warnings appear throughout this manual to provide you with additional information, and to advise
you to take specific action to protect personnel from potential injury or lethal conditions. They may also inform you of
actions necessary to prevent equipment damage or conditions that may void your warranty.
Please pay close attention to these advisories.
Notes
The note symbol indicates that additional information is provided about the current topic.
Cautions
The caution symbol indicates potential risk of damage to equipment or injury to personnel. Follow instructions explicitly
and take extreme care.
A caution symbol may also indicate a condition that voids your equipment warranty.
Warnings
The warning symbol indicates a definite risk of equipment damage or danger to personnel. Failure to observe and follow
proper procedures is likely to result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant property loss or significant
equipment damage.
Illustrations
Figures provide a graphical representation of equipment components or screen snapshots for use in identifying parts or
establishing nomenclature, and may or may not be drawn to scale. For more specific component information pertinent to
your rig configuration, see the technical drawings included with your National Oilwell Varco documentation.
Safety requirements
Safety requirements
Personnel training
NOV equipment is installed and operated in a controlled drilling rig environment involving hazardous operations and
situations. Proper service and repair is important for safe and reliable operation. Operation and service procedures
provided by NOV manuals are the recommended methods of performing those operations. Figures provide a graphical
representation of equipment components or screen snapshots for use in identifying parts or establishing nomenclature,
and may or may not be drawn to scale. For more specific component information pertinent to your rig configuration, see
the technical drawings included with your National Oilwell Varco documentation.
All personnel performing installation, operation, repair or maintenance procedures on the equipment, or those in the
vicinity of the equipment, should be trained on shop safety, tool operation, and maintenance. Contact the NOV Valve
training department for more information about equipment operation and maintenance training.
Recommended tools
Service operations may require the use of tools designed specifically for the purpose described. When stated, use only
these tools.
General system safety practices
Avoid performing maintenance or repairs while the equipment is in operation.
Wear proper protective equipment during equipment installation, operation, maintenance, assembly/disassembly or
repair. Local codes may apply. Please consult them prior to performing any operation. The presence of a NOV Valve
representative at the site does not relieve the owner/ operator of responsibility to follow published installation, operation,
and maintenance instructions.
Replacing components
Verify that all components are tagged and labeled during disassembly and reassembly of equipment.
3
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com

Replace failed or damaged components with NOV genuine certified parts. Failure to do so could result in equipment
damage or personal injury.
Maintenance
Equipment must be maintained on a regular and routine basis. See the Maintenance and Repair chapter of this manual
for maintenance recommendations.
Proper use of equipment
NOV equipment is designed for specific functions and applications, and should be used only for its intended purpose.
Introduction
Features
2-1
Introduction
A pressure relief valve is a self operating valve that is installed in a process system to protect against over
pressurization of the system. The NOV Reset Relief Valve is designed to keep pressure from exceeding a preset valve,
which will in turn protect the liners and other internal components of a typical mud pump.
There are a wide variety of valve designs, but most valves of this type incorporate one or more helical compression
springs which are used to maintain constant force acting on the backside of a piston, causing the valve to be normally
closed. When the force exerted by the process stream (i.e. fluid pressure) against the piston is greater than the constant
force exerted by the spring, the valve "trips" open (the piston moves to its fully open position) and allows process fluid to
exit the valve and pass through a discharge line to a mud tank or pit. This valve actually utilizes a balance beam
whereby the piston force acts on a short moment arm while the spring force acts on a longer moment arm.
The NOV Titan Class "C" Valve utilizes the 34000 series part number. Various dash numbers may be added to indicate
the type of piping adapters supplied with the valve or any other auxiliary items. Please refer to the bill of material and
drawing sections to determine the complete valve assembly number.
Features
Unlike its predecessor, which utilized an elastomeric cushion ring, the Titan Class C valve incorporates a pressure
balance chamber, similar to the original RX valve. The opening movements of NOV's patented piston ports (U.S. Patent
5,715,861) are hydraulically cushioned by throttling fluid from the balance chamber to the discharge side of the valve.
The butt weld flanges or 3-1502 unions provide excellent connection integrity.
There is no load bearing threaded connections exposed to the flow media (such as line pipe threads).
The 4-bolt inlet and discharge flanges allow for easy access to the body and internal parts.
The entire valve can be replaced with all adjacent piping in place.
The valve is 100% adjustable to provide any relief pressure setting within the particular pressure range of the valve.
The relieving pressure set point may be altered easily by turning a single adjusting nut; adjustment may be made while
pressure is in the valve however, is limited to increasing the setting only.
The accuracy of the relief valve is not affected by continuous pressure surges or vibration.
The valve is easily reset by operating a single lever; no replacement shear pins are required and little, if any, down time
is encountered in resetting the valve.
Once properly calibrated, the accuracy of the valve is maintained over numerous valve trips.
The valve may be manually discharged at any time, regardless of line pressure, by striking the release button provided
on the valve.
The open or set position of the valve piston is indicated by the position of the release button. When the button is
away from the side of the bonnet, the valve is set. When the button is adjacent to the side of the bonnet, the valve is
open.
The valves internal linkage is fully enclosed and protected from debris and corrosion.
The release shaft retainer has been redesigned for greater safety.
Inspection
Installation
3-1
4
www.nov.com
MANUAL: M-34000

Storage
Recommended procedure for extended storage
3-4
Inspection
Installation
Prior to setting up and operating a new Reset Relief Valve, inspect the goods as received from the shipping company. A
claim for damage or loss should be reported immediately to the carrier and to the Valve Division. Also, check the bill of
lading for any separately shipped items, including manuals and CDs. Once it is confirmed the order has been received
complete in undamaged condition, installation may begin.
The Titan C Reset Relief Valve may be installed in any position but it is generally easier to operate and maintain with
the bonnet in a vertical position together with a horizontal discharge line. The valve is outfitted with (A) a pair of 6-bolt
butt weld flanges (one on the inlet and one on the outlet) that have to be fitted, tacked, welded, and stress relieved in
accordance with ASME Section IX and/or ASME B31.1 specifications PRIOR to bolting the valve in place for operation
or (B) adapter flanges which go from a 6-bolt pattern (to match the body) to 3-1502 male and female union connections.
Material certificates for these components are available and (for the butt weld components) include heat treating times
and temperatures which may be used to write a proper weld procedure for valve installation (WPS or PQR). Due to the
service encountered and pressure rating of this equipment, the integrity of all welding, which may be required for the
installation of this valve, should be volumetrically inspected 100% using appropriate X-ray procedures. Assemblies
including component parts with butt weld ends requiring welding must follow the same procedures described above. The
dimensions of the window required for valve installation are shown in the assembly drawing. It is recommended that
the pipe I.D. be no smaller than that of a 3 Schedule XXH pipe (2.300 I.D.) for the upstream and downstream piping.
Figure 3-1 exhibits the correct setup of the upstream and downstream piping. A 3 degree minimum downward slope
must be maintained on piping.

NEVER ATTEMPT TO MAKE UP OR BRAKE OUT UNION CONNECTIONS WITH ANY INTERNAL PRESSURE IN
THE VALVE. REPLACE ALL WORN OR DAMAGED UNION COMPONENTS WITH ORIGINAL NOV PARTS.
The dimensions of the window required for valve installation are shown in the assembly drawing. It is recommended
that the pipe I.D. be no smaller than that of a 3 Schedule XXH pipe (2.300 I.D.) for the upstream and downstream
piping. Figure 3-1 exhibits the correct setup of the upstream and downstream piping. A 3 degree minimum downward
slope must be maintained on piping.
Note:
Sufficient size piping and schedule are required for operating conditions including containing working pressure, handling
cyclic nature of the pump pressures, and staying within the erosional velocity limits of the pipe for the expected
discharge fluid volumes of drilling mud and the related fluid velocity within the pipe.
The discharge line should slope gradually downwards from the valve outlet to the mud pit or holding tank. This insures
any fluid remaining in the line will self-drain.

IN FREEZING ENVIRONMENTS, FLUID REMAINING IN THE DISCHARGE LINE COULD FREEZE AND PREVENT
DISCHARGE FROM THE VALVE. THIS COULD BE DETRIMENTAL TO THE VALVE, PIPING AND PUMP.
Due to thrust loads at the time of discharge, adjacent piping for a relief valve installation requires all piping be properly
braced, anchored and supported to prevent unnecessarily high stresses from damaging the valve or any adjacent
connectors.
5
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com


AVOID MOUTING THE VALVE ON A TALL RISER UNLESS THE RISER IS WELL BRACED, ANCHORED AND
SUPPORTED. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD CAUSE SEPERATION OF PIPING AND/OR CONNECTIONS AT THE
TIME OF DISCHARGE, WHICH COULD LEAD TO SERIOUS INJURIES.
Figure 3-1. Recommended downstream setup
Note:
Refer to the Parts and Drawings Section when item numbers are referenced.
Standard butt weld hubs normally supplied with this valve when requested (p/n 31953), are for mating up with 3-1/2SCH. XXH (4.000 O.D. x 2.728 I.D.) piping. Torque the (6) flange bolts (item 50) gradually in a crossing pattern so that
the adjacent sealing faces of the flange and body remain parallel. This will also prevent flange separation and the
resulting flange-to-body seal failure. The adjusting nut (item 32) moves the upper spring retainer (item 34) thereby
increasing or decreasing the amount of spring compression and thus spring force against the arm of the crank. The
correct position of the adjusting nut is shown by an indicator (item 33) mounted on the upper spring retainer and the
calibration plate (item 36) mounted adjacent to the indicator on the bonnet cover (item 29). It is generally undesirable to
bring a mud pump on-line with the valve at an abnormally low pressure setting. Such a practice could cause inadvertent
opening of the valve. Always verify the pressure setting by examining the indicator and calibration plate prior to placing
the valve in service. In some operating conditions, the valve may appear to discharge at a lower (or higher) pressure
than indicated by the valve setting. This phenomenon may sometimes result from (1) a lag between the actual system
pressure and the pressure gauge reading, especially for gauges with dampening devices, (2) pressure pulsations,
especially when inadequate or poorly operating pulsation dampeners are installed, (3) inaccurate or improperly
calibrated gauges, or (4) an improperly maintained valve. The release of drilling mud, especially at high pressures, can
be very destructive to internal valve parts. Operators are advised to always try to isolate and shut down a pump as
quickly as possible when the relief valve for that pump discharges. Doing so can help to increase the life of the valve
and its internal parts.
6
www.nov.com
MANUAL: M-34000

Note:
Back pressure on the valve (usually due to hydrostatic head pressure from a column of fluid in the discharge line) is
usually undesirable. However, due to the balanced design of the Titan B, back pressures less than 100 psig will have
little if any affect on the operational accuracy of the valve

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RESET THE VALVE WHILE THE PUMP IS IN OPERATION.
Storage
Recommended procedure for extended storage
Relief Valve should be stored inside a cool, controlled environment.
Valve should be stored in an upright position, protecting the piston and internal parts.
Internal parts should stay lubricated with synthetic grease, Mobil SHC 220, Mobilith or equal.
If the valve is in storage more than 6-15 months, the valve should be disassembled, the bonnet pulled and the piston
cap seal and o-ring inspected and changed. Clear all debris from internal parts, lubricated with recommended lubricant.
For assembly procedures, see Section 6.
If additional information is needed, please contact your sales representative or call the location shown on the cover of
this manual.
Field Setting Procedure

Valve Calibration
The zero setting
The Span setting
Hydrostatic Pressure Testing (in plant only)
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
Field Setting Procedure

Valve Calibration
The valve adjusting nut (item 32) should be tightened (rotated clockwise looking at the top of the bonnet) to increase the
compression on the load springs and thus increase the setting indicated by the calibration plate. Likewise, the nut should
be loosened to lower the set pressure. Going from a higher setting to a lower setting with pressure on the valve could
inadvertently cause the valve to trip. Increasing the set point with pressure on the valve is generally not a problem.
Although all NOV Reset Relief Valves are calibrated at the factory, because of the variety of mud types, it is important to
verify the operating characteristics of the valve in a particular system and with the mud being used to determine if any
additional adjustments are needed. Please refer to the section on valve calibration in this section.
The valve should be bench tested on a regular basis to verify proper calibration and accuracy. As mentioned, NOV can
provide a complete portable test unit for a modest price. For calibration purposes, an accurate test gauge should be
used (usually plus or minus 1/4% of the full scale reading). The gauge should be connected so that it indicates pressure
in the lower end of the valve. If any gauge with a built-in dampening device is used, the line pressure should be built up
slowly to allow for the actual system pressure and gauge pressure to stabilize. If possible, the system pressure should
be built up slowly and gradually with little or no pressure pulsations. Remove the adjusting nut (item 32), upper spring
retainer (item 34), two load springs (item 37), four socket head cap screws (item 50) and the bonnet cover (item 29) so
that the lower spring retainer can be lifted and turned. Drive out the Spirol Pin (item 40) from the back side (bonnet
side) of the lower spring retainer. Replace the bonnet cover using new NOV socket head cap screws. Replace the
remaining components.
The zero setting:
Adjust the valve to its minimum pressure setting as indicated by the calibration plate and indicator. Operate the reset
lever to set the valve (close the piston). Slowly increase internal pressure until the valve operates (trips), noting the
7
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com

gauge pressure indicated. If the valve tripped before the gauge reached the pressure indicated on the calibration plate,
the valve
Zero setting is low (too little initial spring compression). In order to correct the zero setting, the two flats on the lower
end of the load screw (item 38) will be used to change the initial compression on the load springs. If the valve tripped
early, more initial spring compression is required and vice versa. Use a 3/8 open end wrench to tighten the load screw
further into the lower spring retainer if the valve tripped early. Looking down on the upper face of the lower spring
retainer, a clockwise rotation of the wrench will drive the load screw farther into the lower spring retainer. The amount of
change will vary somewhat between valves but a half turn of the load screw should cause approximately a 50 psig
(higher or lower depending on the direction of rotation) change in the tripping pressure of the valve. Because it will be
locked in place by the 1/4 Spirol pin upon successful completion of the calibration procedure, the load screw may only
be adjusted in half-turn increments (with the flats on the load screw left perpendicular to the lower spring retainer). Once
the zero setting is close, it is time to check the span or upper setting.
The Span setting:
Hydrostatic Pressure testing (in plant only)
Tighten the adjusting nut until the indicator points precisely to the highest setting on the calibration plate. Reset the valve
and slowly increase internal pressure until the valve trips. Note the pressure on the gauge at this point. For example,
lets assume that we are working with a typical 1500-5000 PSI valve assembly. If the valve initially tripped at 1400 PSI
for the zero setting and then tripped at say 4900 PSI for the span setting, it is possible to bring both values closer to
the desired setting. In other words, by going back to the zero setting and increasing the initial spring compression, the
valve may be made to trip at exactly 1500 PSI or plus 100 PSI. As such, we will expect the valve to trip at an
additional 100 PSI on the high end (span setting), very close to the desired 5000 PSI. We will rerun the span procedure
to confirm. However, if the valve trips at 1700 PSI at the low end and at 5300 PSI at the high end, you can not perform
the basic calibration procedure to make the valve more accurate. If we increase the initial spring compression, when
testing the high setting, to make the valve trip right at 1500 PSI we could expect the valve to trip at around 8600 PSI
which would be totally unacceptable. In short, both settings (low and high) may be either increased or decreased but
they may not be moved closer together or farther apart. Valves which do not calibrate properly may have one or more
faulty load springs, a worn upper link pin (which most often causes erratic valve behavior), excessive seal friction due to
corrosion, a faulty main crank, or binding linkage. If the operator is unable to achieve satisfactory performance from the
valve after following normal calibration procedures, contact the factory. If the valve is within acceptable tolerances at
both the low and high set points, secure the load screw with the Spirol pin (item 40) by driving it into the lower spring
retainer (against the bonnet) until the end is flush with the outboard side of the lower spring retainer. If the valve is not
within acceptable tolerances, replace the load springs or look for mechanical problems. Repeat this entire procedure
after reworking valve.
For Titan Class C valves, any in-plant or customer-witness hydrostatic pressure testing will be limited to the following
maximum values: 5000 PSIG WORKING PRESSURE, 7500 PSIG TEST PRESSURE Acceptable Tolerance, Set Point
vs. Actual Valve Trip Pressure
Pressure Range 1500-5000, psig Acceptable Tolerance +200 psig
If the valve is within acceptable tolerances at both the low and high set points, secure the load screw with the Spirol pin
(item 40) by driving it into the lower spring retainer (against the bonnet) until the end is flush with the outboard side of
the lower spring retainer. If the valve is not within acceptable tolerances, replace the load springs or look for mechanical
problems. Repeat this entire procedure after reworking valve.
Hydrostatic Pressure testing (in plant only)
For Titan Class C valves, any in-plant or customer-witness hydrostatic pressure testing will be limited to the following
maximum values: 5,000 PSIG WORKING PRESSURE 7,500 PSIG TEST PRESSURE
(Test pressure applies to the sub-assembly: valve body with sub, seat insert, and related seals only.) With the valve in
the set position and springs compressed for maximum pressure setting, slowly increase internal pressure to that of
working pressure, hold hydrostatic pressure for 3 minutes and check for leakage, bleed pressure to zero. Re-pressurize
valve to the specified pressure required and hold for 15 minutes. Check for leakage. If no leakage is observed outside
the valve and if no apparent leakage is visible from monitoring the gauge, the test is successful. Bleed pressure to zero.
Test is complete.
Reset Relief Valve Troubleshooting Guide
5-1
8
www.nov.com
MANUAL: M-34000

Reset Relief Valve Troubleshooting Guide

NOV Reset Relief Valves are fairly easy to operate and are reliable and stable when properly used and maintained. The
success and performance of the valves rely on links inside that connect the piston to the bonnet. The links must be in a
straight line (3O off center) for the valves to hold pressure. Once the joint is out of line, the links retract (due to exceeding
set pressure) and the valve trips. Valves must be reset in a straight line to work properly. When pushing the handle
forward to reset the valve, a lever inside the reset crank pushes the links into alignment. There is a stop inside the valve
when the links are in the correct position, the links will be straight and the piston will be down. When the valve is fully
reset, the reset button on the backside of the bonnet sticks out approximately 3/8 inch. When the reset relief valve seals
are new, more effort to reset the valve may be required. New seals are stiff and tight.
Troubleshooting Problem Solution
If the valve cannot be fully reset even when using an extension wrench check the pump to see if its turned off and there
is no back pressure on valve. Check for foreign substance in the valve thats blocking the piston from resetting. Make
sure the reset crank handle pin is tight. Check if the crank is not bent; also check if the inner stem seal is installed
properly and has not rolled up on piston stem, preventing the valve from resetting. Sometimes the pressure activated
lower piston seal may be swollen preventing the valve from resetting; in this case, drain all the fluid out and replace the
lower piston seal. This seal can be used again when it shrinks back to original shape after drying for few minutes. If the
valve does not hold pressure, check piston seal for wear and insure links are fully reset (the reset button should be
extended 3/8 inch). Check piston and body for wear. If the valve calibration has changed, replace the load springs if they
are shorter than 7 inches. Inspect links and link pins for wear or bent. Follow calibration procedures.
If valve is leaking on outside between bonnet and body remove stem bushing seals.
If fluid is leaking through discharge side remove the flange/discharge line on valve outlet side and clean the inside of the
valve from the discharge side. Use a flashlight and check for fluid leaks.
If the fluid is leaking from bottom i.e. between piston cap and insert, turn off the pump and drain all the fluid from the
valve body, push the reset button in and reset the valve 2-3 times. If the valve is still leaking, replace the lower piston
cap seals.
If fluid is leaking from top, remove the bonnet assemble and replace the upper piston shoulder seal. Before reinstalling the bonnet assembly, check the inner valves of the body for rust, pitting or scarring.
The inner surface where the seal seats must be clean and smooth or the valve will leak. If there is more than
surface/superficial rust proceeds to send the valve body to NOV facility for further evaluation.
If you have any more problems contact NOV service guys or NOV facility for repair.
Assembly / Disassembly Procedures

Lower Piston Disassembly
Bonnet & Linkage Disassembly
Lower Body Disassembly
Lower Body Assembly
Bonnet and Linkage Assembly
Body Flange/Adapter Assembly
6-1
6-2
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-7
Assembly / Disassembly Procedures

Lower Piston Disassembly
Note:
Replacement of the lower piston seal ring (item 7) or any of its associated components requires that the bonnet
assembly first be removed from the body.
The steps required to accomplish this task are as follows:
Danger Failure to safely bleed off internal pressure prior to bonnet or flange removal could cause serious
bodily injury or even death.
1. After removing ALL internal pressure from the body, loosen all four bonnet socket head cap screws (item 54) about 3
turns. Pull up on the bonnet until the bonnet flange is again in contact with the face of the screws. Verify that the stem
9
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com

bushing seal (item 14) has disengaged its respective seal bore in the body. Only then the (4) cap screws may be
completely removed from the body along with the bonnet sub-assembly.
2. Clean the upper bores of the body with a soft cloth. Verify that the seal bores in the upper end of the body are free of
marks, scratches, dings, and corrosion prior to reinstalling a cleaned up or rebuilt bonnet assembly. Also, clean and
inspect the seat insert (item 2) in the lower end of the body. DO NOT attempt to repair a leaking valve by merely
replacing the lower piston seal when the seat insert is also damaged.
3. holding the bonnet firmly loosen and remove the piston cap (item 4) from the piston body (item 3). Remove the
outboard seal retainer (item 8), the lower piston seal (item 7) and the inboard seal retainer (item 8) from the piston body.
Inspect the piston cap face seal (item 11) for damage and replace as required.
Replace item 7, (Never reuse the lower piston seal (item 7)) along with two of item 8 if necessary, and reassemble the
lower end of the piston. Note the orientation of all components for correct assembly of the piston.
4. Inspect the outer stem bushing seal (item 14) for damage and replace if required. Verify that the piston slides freely in
and out of the stem bushing. If not, there could be damage to the inner stem bushing seal (item 10) or excessive
corrosion on the internal bore of the stem bushing (item 6). Correcting this problem will require complete removal of the
piston sub-assembly from the bonnet. See the "Bonnet & Linkage Disassembly"
5. Verify that the piston shoulder seal (item 9) is in good condition. If not, it will require replacement. Again, correcting
this problem will require complete removal of the piston sub-assembly from the bonnet. See the "Bonnet & Linkage
Disassembly"
6. Using high quality synthetic grease, lubricate the upper end of the body as well as the lower and upper end of the
piston, particularly all sealing elements.
7. Again, contingent upon the inspection performed in step 2, the bonnet sub-assembly may be reinserted into the body.
Lubricate the threads and collars of four NEW cap screws (item 54) with a nickel base anti-seize compound and using a
crossing pattern, torque the screws to specification, see the "Torque Chart"

NEVER REUSE BONNET CAP SCREWS (ITEM 54).
Bonnet & Linkage Disassembly

Note:
This procedure assumes that the bonnet sub-assembly has been safely removed from the body following the procedure
in step 1 of "Lower Piston Disassembly"
1. Completely remove the adjusting nut (item 32) and lift off and remove the upper spring retainer (item 34) and the two
load springs (item 37). Check the load springs for yielding. If either spring is less than 7.00 in overall length, replace
both springs and re-calibrate the valve.
2. If the adjusting stud (item 35) must be replaced, punch out the Spirol Pin (item 40) in the bonnet cover and
unscrew the stud. Note the amount of stud protruding from the cover so that the replacement part may be reinstalled
properly as before.
3. Remove and discard the four cover cap screws (item 50) from the bonnet cover (item 29), lift off and remove the
cover.
4. If the reset roller (item 31) must be replaced, punch out the 1/8 Spirol Pin (item 44) and slide the roller from the reset
crank. Replace the roller with a new one and install a new pin.
10
www.nov.com
MANUAL: M-34000

5. If the reset crank (item 30) or the reset handle (item 16) must be replaced, punch out the 5/16 Spirol Pin (item 24).
Slide the reset handle off of the reset crank, remove the shaft seal o-ring (item 43) and pull the reset crank out of the
bonnet cover.
6. If the cover bearing (not ballooned) is damaged, it may be pressed out of the bonnet cover (with the proper tooling)
and replaced with a new one.
7. Remove the spring guide rod (item 28) along with the reset spring (item 23) and the keeper (item 27) from the bonnet.
8. Using a pair of needle nose pliers, carefully remove the two clock or linkage springs (item 25). Examine both springs
for damage. The tabs which hold the spring in place (one on the inside and one on the outside) should be in alignment
with each other. If the outer tab is more than 30 degrees out of alignment with the inner tab, replace both springs with
new NOV parts.
9. With the remaining bonnet assembly resting above the piston (item 3) which is to be positioned firmly on a flat
surface, rotate the upper link (item 21) into a horizontal position (as if the valve had tripped). Punch out the 1/8 pin
(item 19) in upper link. Note: Pulling back on the release button and locking it in the retracted position with a small block
(or other item which may be used temporarily as a spacer) during this operation will keep the inboard end of the release
shaft (item 45) from interfering with the removal of the pin (item 19). Remove the top crank pin (item 26).
10. If the crank (item 22) must be removed, lift lower spring retainer and turn it so that the diameter pin can be driven
out from side adjacent to the bonnet. Rotate the load screw (item 38) CCW to remove it from the lower spring retainer
(item 39). Lift the load screw up through the crank for complete removal from the bonnet. Punch out the 1/8 pin (item
44) from the crank to remove the crank pivot pin (item 41). The crank may now be lifted out and completely removed
from the bonnet.
11. If required, the bearing (item 15a) may be removed from bonnet (item 15) with a 19/32 punch. Again, this is a
somewhat tedious task and replacement of the bonnet sub-assembly is generally the better choice.
12. If it is necessary to remove the release shaft (item 45), hold the inboard end from rotating with a drift pin while
rotating the release button (item 47) CCW. With the release button removed, push the release shaft inboard until it
clears the notches in the release shaft retainer (item 46). A large slotted screw driver may be used to loosen and remove
the release shaft retainer (item 46). Now the release shaft and release shaft spring may be easily removed from the
bonnet.
13. The piston along with the linkage may now be carefully pulled out of the lower end of the bonnet.
14. Disassemble upper link and lower links by punching out four 1/8 pins (item 19) and removing the two link pins (item
18).
15. Remove the stem bushing by sliding it off of the small end of the piston. Inspect both the bushing outer seal (item
14) and the bushing inner seal (item 10) for wear or damage. Clean and inspect both glands for damage or corrosion.
16. If required, the bearing (item 21a) may be removed from upper link (item 21) with a 15/32 punch. Again, this is a
somewhat tedious task and replacement of the upper link sub-assembly is generally the better choice.
Note
Usually, while the valve is completely disassembled, it is always a good practice to replace any and all worn, damaged,
or otherwise questionable parts.
17. Check lower links for straightness and/or ovaling of the link pin holes. Check straightness by laying a straight edge
against the end flat on each side of the link. If either link is distorted, always replace both lower linksnever just one.
Check the small pads on one side of each lower link for damage from contacting the pad on the main crank. It is
important to note the position and orientation of the pads on both lower links. These pads MUST be placed in the same
11
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com

position during assembly (the pad end of the lower link is to be farthest away from the bonnet flange while both pads are
to face towards the release shaft button).
18. Check all link pins and crank pins for straightness. If a pin is not straight or shows signs of wear, it should be
replaced. A worn pin may show cracks or dings in the surface or may no longer be perfectly straight and or round.
19. Check all pressed-in bushings. If a bushing is loose, has chipped or otherwise damaged edges, or is wallowed out, it
should be replaced with a new NOV part.
20. Check the outside diameter of the piston and all sealing surfaces for signs of wear, corrosion, or other damage that
might impair the effectiveness of a new seal.
Lower Body Disassembly
1. Removal of the sub (item 5) can be difficult at times. It will require using the special sub wrench listed in the tool
section. We will assume that the valve assembly has been removed from the line and that the bonnet/piston assembly
has been removed from the valve.
2. If the valve was supplied with butt weld flanges and the body is out of the line, the 6-bolt flange will have already been
disconnected. If the valve was supplied with 1502 connections (see section 8), the inlet adapter will need to be removed.
Using a 12-point socket or box end wrench, loosen and remove all 6 flange cap screws from the valve inlet.
3. Carefully remove the inlet flange adapter from the body and set aside. Clean and inspect the union components for
damage. Clean and inspect the face seal groove for damage or corrosion and inspect the seal.
4. It is best to carefully anchor the body when removing the sub. This may be done by using a minimum of 2 bonnet cap
screws to bolt the body to a work table. Holes will have to be drilled in the table to match the bonnet bolt pattern. Flip the
body upside down (bonnet end down) and attach it to the work table using discarded bonnet cap screws or place the
body (in a similar position) securely in a large vice.
5. Insert the lugs of the sub wrench into the sub. Looking at the inlet of the body, rotate the sub counter clockwise to
loosen and remove the sub from the body. In some cases, applying penetrating oil or similar substance to the sub may
help with its removal from the body.
6. Clean the sub (item 5) and inspect it for damage, especially in the threaded area, the radial seal groove, and the
sealing faces on the inboard and outboard ends.
7. Remove the seat insert (item 2) from the body along with the insert face seal (item 13). Carefully clean and inspect
the insert for damage, especially the internal seal surface (I.D.) and the face seal groove.
8. Clean and inspect the lower valve body internals, especially the threads and the seal bore for the sub seal (item 12).
Lower Body Assembly
Use the procedure described in "Lower Body Disassembly" on page 6-4 for mounting and holding the valve body while
working on the lower end of the valve.
1. If the body (item 1), sub (item 5), seat insert (item 2) are all cleaned and free of damage, they may be reassembled.
Always use new sealing elements when reassembling this valve.
2. Use a nickel base anti-seize compound to lubricate the threads and sealing surfaces of the lower end of the body
prior to assembly. Also lubricate the threads and inboard face and radial sealing surfaces of the sub prior to assembly.
3. Install a new sub seal (item 12) into its groove in the sub. Install a new seat insert face seal (item 13) into its groove in
the insert. As mentioned in step 1, with the bonnet side of the valve body facing downwards, place the seat insert into
the lower body cavity, face seal side up. Verify that the insert shoulder is fully seated against the step in the body.
12
www.nov.com
MANUAL: M-34000

4. Place the sub into the lower body cavity, threaded end last. Make up the sub into the body by hand. If this is not
possible, check the body and sub for thread damage. Continue making up the sub until it bumps against the seat insert.
5. Using the pipe wrench, torque the sub to 800-1000 ft.-lbs. protect the outboard sealing face of the sub when flipping
the body over for bonnet assembly.
Bonnet and Linkage Assembly

1. Lubricate and install new seals (items 10 and 14) in the stem bushing (item 6). Note that the inner seal (item 10)
MUST be installed with the seal lip energizer facing the large end of the stem bushing. Failure to install this seal properly
could cause the seal to leak and fail. Place the stem bushing sub-assembly aside. Do not proceed with bonnet and
linkage assembly, unless all parts have been cleaned, inspected, and are found in good condition. Do not reuse Spirol
pins
2. Assemble the piston body (item 3) with items 4, 7, 8 (2x), 9, and 11. Place the face seal (item 11) into its gland in the
piston cap (item 4). Place the first seal retainer (item 8) over the nose of the lower end of the piston as shown in the
assembly drawing. Carefully place the piston seal (item 7) over the nose of the lower end of the piston and against the
first seat retainer. Place the second seal retainer (item 8) over the piston seal. Screw the piston cap (item 4) into the
lower end of the piston. Be sure that the face seal (item 11) remains fully in its groove during make up. Torque the cap
to 80-100 ft.-lbs. install a (lubricated) shoulder seal (item 9) into its gland on the upper end of the piston. Again,
orientation of this seal is critical. The spring energizer MUST be oriented towards the upper end of the piston as shown.
The piston sub-assembly is now complete. Take care not to damage piston seals (items 7 and 9) during assembly.
3. Slide the stem bushing sub-assembly (from step 1) over the lubricated end of the piston, large end first. Carefully slide
the bushing down towards the big end of the piston, as far as it will go. Do not force.
4. Assemble the two lower links (item 20) to the upper end of the piston with the first link pin (item 18). Orientation of
both links is critical. The links should have side bosses facing the same direction (away from the piston centerline). The
link bosses should also be oriented away from (not adjacent to) the bushing in the piston. Secure links with two 1/8
Spirol Pins (item 19).
5. Assemble the thick end of the upper link (item 21) between the upper end of the lower links with the second link pin
(item 18) and again secure with two 1/8 Spirol pins (item 19). Upper and lower links should fit snugly with the link pins
but both link pins should turn freely in their respective bushings.
6. Slide the release shaft (item 45) into its respective hole in the side of the bonnet (big end first). Slide the release shaft
spring (item 48) over the threaded end of the release shaft. Slide the release shaft retainer (item 46) over the release
shaft, notched end last. Apply several drops of non-permanent thread locking compound to the threads of the release
shaft retainer prior to making it up fully into the bonnet. With no other components yet attached to the bonnet, the
release shaft may be pushed towards the middle of the bonnet to allow for use of a large slotted screw driver to make up
the release shaft retainer.
7. Push the release shaft towards the outboard side of the release shaft hole in the bonnet so that the threaded section
protrudes from the bonnet. Screw the release shaft button on to the release shaft. Use a few drops of non-permanent
thread locking compound to secure the release shaft button. Alternatively, the threaded end of the release shaft may be
pined with a center punch to prevent inadvertent loosening of the release shaft button.
8. Place the crank assembly (item 22), with its two bushings, into the cavity in the top of the bonnet. Slide the middle
section of the crank over the bushing in the top of the bonnet. Align the small end of the crank over the hole for the load
screw. Align the crank assembly hole with the bonnet bushing and insert the crank pivot pin (item 41). Note that the
transverse hole in the crank pivot pin must be oriented with respect to the matching hole in one side of the crank
assembly. Rotate and slide the crank pivot pin so that the transverse hole is in line with its respective hole in the crank
assembly. Drive the Spirol pin (item 44) through the hole to secure the crank assembly. The end of the pin should be
flush with the outer surface of the crank as shown in the assembly drawing.
13
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com

9. Insert the linkage (attached to the piston) through the bottom of the bonnet with side bosses of lower links facing
release shaft hole. Again, orientation of the bosses on the lower links is CRITICAL to proper valve operation. Align the
hole in the upper end of the upper link with its respective hole in the crank assembly. Slide the top crank pin through the
hole.
10. With the lower end of the piston resting on a flat surface, steady the bonnet while rotating the top crank pin with
respect to the upper link. When the transverse slot in the top crank pin is aligned with the hole through the upper link,
place a 7/64 drift through the upper link to hold both members in place. Now allow the bonnet to move downwards and
the upper link to move to the near horizontal position until the parts rest against each other. (The piston is now basically
in the tripped position). Carefully remove the drift and, without disturbing the related parts, drive one 1/8 Spirol pin
through the hole in the upper link. Tap the pin carefully until it passes the top crank pin.
11. Lay the bonnet assembly on its side with the piston extended in the set position. Both lower links should be against
the side of the bonnet. Place one linkage (or clock) spring (item 25) over each end of the top crank pin. The inner tab
of the spring should slide into the slot in both ends of the top crank pin. Use a pair of needle nose pliers to grab the outer
tab of the spring to wind it tighter approximately 90 degrees and slip it into the slot in the crank. The short crook or
bend in the very end of the outer end of the spring should face towards the release shaft button. Press against the
outboard side of the spring to assure that it is fully against the side of the crank and fully engaging both slots.
12. Insert the load screw (item 38), threaded end first, through the hole in the crank assembly and out through the lower
side of the bonnet.
13. Drive a 1/4 Spirol pin (item 40) about 1/4 to 3/8 into one side of the lower spring retainer (item 39), just to hold it in
place. With the spring guide nubs facing upwards and the Spirol pin facing away from the bonnet, make the load screw
up into the lower spring retainer. The end of the load screw should protrude from the lower side of the lower spring
retainer by about 1/4.
14. Slide the reset roller (item 31) over the small end of the Z or reset crank (item 30) and secure it with one 1/8 Spirol
pin (item 44). Insert the large end of the reset crank through its respective hole in the bonnet cover from the inside.
Place the weather seal o-ring (item 43) over the reset crank shaft from outside the bonnet cover.
15. Place the reset handle (item 16) over the reset crank shaft with the large chamfer facing the o-ring (and cover). Align
the hole in the reset crank with the hole in the handle and secure both parts with a 5/16 spirol pin (item 24).
16. Screw the adjusting stud (item 35) into the bonnet cover (milled notch end first) until the end is flush with inside
surface of the cover. Rotate the stud in or out slightly to allow the notch to align with the hole through the end of the
cover. Secure the stud by driving one spirol pin (item 40) through the cover until the outer end is flush with the outer
surface of the cover.
17. Place reset spring (item 23) over the spring guide rod (item 28) and insert one end of the rod into the shallow hole
(or divot) inside of the bonnet. Rotate the reset crank to allow the spring keeper (item 27) to be inserted into its hole in
the reset crank (from the outboard side). Position the cover (item 29) over the bonnet, tilt it back to view the keeper, and
guide the keeper over the end of the spring guide rod prior to placing the cover fully against the top of the bonnet.
Secure the bonnet cover using only New NOV cap screws lubricated with a nickel base never seize compound. Tighten
all four screws in a crossing pattern according to the "Torque Chart" on page 16
18. Set both load springs (item 37) on the lower spring retainer (item 39) and place upper spring retainer (item 34) over
the top of the adjusting stud and allow it to move downwards until it engages both springs. Screw the locknut (item 32)
on the adjusting stud until a minimum amount of compression is placed on the springs to hold them in place.
19. Orient the reset handle so that it is opposite the discharge side of the valve body. After lubricating the body bores
and piston seals stab the piston carefully into the upper end of the body. Press downwards on the bonnet until the
bonnet flange mates with the body. Secure the bonnet using only New NOV cap screws lubricated with a nickel base
never seize compound. Tighten all four screws in a crossing pattern according to the torque shown in "Torque Chart" on
page 16. The valve is now ready for calibrating.
14
www.nov.com
MANUAL: M-34000

Body Flange/Adapter Assembly

1. Adapter flanges, 6-bolt x 3-1/2-XXH butt-weld, 6-bolt x 3-1502 female, or 6-bolt x 3-1502 male may be attached to
or removed from the body of the RX valve assembly. When attaching these flanges, it is important to first install the
flange face seal (item 53) into its face groove in the flange. It is also important to make up all six 12-point flange cap
screws (item 51) with their respective helical lock washers (item 52) to the hand tight position prior to applying torque.
Torque all six cap screws in each flange little by little in a crossing pattern so that the flange face does not become
cocked with respect to the face of the mating body. Cocking of the flange will lead to early failure (blow our or extrusion)
of the flange face seal. Torque all twelve screws (6 on the inlet flange and 6 on the outlet flange) to the torque
prescribed in the "Torque Chart" on page 16.
2. On assemblies with the 3-1502 union connections, care must be taken to protect the threads and sealing surfaces of
these unions at all times when the valve is removed from the line. Using worn or damaged union parts can cause
failures which could lead to serious bodily injury. Union hammer nuts should always engage their mating parts using
hand force. Never try to start a thread using a hammer. After the union is mostly made up by hand, it may be tightened
using a hammer. Usually, a 4 to 8 pound hammer is sufficient. Three to four blows on the nut member after initial
rotation has ceased should suffice to achieve the proper preload. Correct calibration - The relief pressure indicator
should accurately indicate the actual relief pressure. When the valve has been completely torn down and reassembled,
it will be necessary to re-calibrate the valve, even if no new components have been installed. Binding or interference
between parts, any and all moving parts, especially parts associated with the linkage assembly, will cause the valve to
operate improperly.
34000 Series Titan Class C Valve Assembly Table

Assembly
P/N
Item
No
Special
Parts
34000-01
36
37
111342
20805-03
34000-02
36
37
34000-03
36
37
Pressure
Range
Connection
Outlet
3 SCH XXH BUTWELD
750 - 2500 PSI
Inlet
3 SCH XXH
BUTWELD
111342
20805-04
3 SCH XXH
BUTWELD
3 SCH XXH BUTWELD
1500 - 5000 PSI
31591
20805-03
3 SCH XXH
BUTWELD
3 SCH XXH BUTWELD
400 - 1500 PSI
Complete Bonnet Assembly Kits Assembly

P/N
Pressure Range
34011
34012
34013
750-2500 PSI
1500-5000 PSI
400-1500 PSI
Seal Kit Assembly

P/N
Pressure Range
34005
All (3) Pressure Ranges
15
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com

Maintenance
Torque
Inspection
Tools Required
Replacement Seal Kit
Bushings
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
Maintenance
The Titan Class B Reset Relief Valve has been designed to require a minimum amount of maintenance. The
recommended maintenance for the valves involves removing the bonnet assembly (refer valve disassembly procedure)
every 2-4 weeks and flushing out the valve body and cleaning any debris. Then you would need to apply grease to the
inner walls of the valve body where the upper shoulder seal on the piston seals and also apply grease through the
grease fitting on the bonnet assembly itself until it is completely full of grease (from the factory it should be full of
grease). The grease will act as a rust inhibitor and this will protect against the corrosion. Flange screws, bonnet
retaining screws, and cover retaining screws should be checked for proper torque periodically. Please refer to the torque
chart.
Note:
Recommended Lubricant P/N 2560 Upper Bonnet Assembly Parts (Top Works): Maxi Glide Teflon Gel Lubricant or
Equal P/N 3015 Piston, Body I.D. and Seals: Synthetic Lubricant Grease or Equal.
Torque Chart
Size. Part No.
1/2-13 SH Cap
204044-10-14
5/8- 11 SH Cap
063150-10-15
1-8 12-pt. Cap
111676
Quantity Where Used
Torque, Ft.-lbs--N-m
(4)
Cover
(4)
Bonnet
(8)
Flange Adapters
85+9
115+12.2
169+17
229+23
420+31.5
569.5+42.7
Due to the variations in pulsation dampening from rig to rig and the resulting effect on component fatigue life, it is
recommended that the 1/2 and 5/8 socket head cap screws not be reused but rather replaced with new cap screws
when servicing the valve. Verification of the valve accuracy should be done on a regular basis. After all, this is a piece of
safety equipment and it should be operated and maintained accordingly. It is recommended that the valve be calibrated
every 6 months as a minimum. For calibrating the valve in the field, NOV may provide a portable manual pump with a
proper test gauge (1/4% full scale) to aid the operator (reference part number 32590). If a pressure gauge with a built-in
dampening device is used, the line pressure should be built up slowly to allow the actual system pressure and gauge
pressure to stabilize. If possible, the line pressure should be built up slowly and gradually with little or no pressure
pulsations.
Inspection
To inspect visually, with no pressure in the valve, reset button pushed in, remove (4) Bonnet Bolts. Pull Top Work up
vertically; inspect piston seal and the body ID. Wash any debris from the body and re-lube body and piston.
Reassemble. Valve is ready for reset.
Tools Required
1.3/32 to 7/64 inch diameter x 1 inch (min.) long straight shank punch (for items 19 and 44) To perform service work on
the Titan Class B Reset Relief Valve, the following tools will be required: To inspect visually, with no pressure in the
16
www.nov.com
MANUAL: M-34000

valve, reset button pushed in, remove (4) Bonnet Bolts. Pull Top Work up vertically; inspect piston seal and the body ID.
Wash any debris from the body and re-lube body and piston. Reassemble. Valve is ready for reset.
2. 7/32 to 15/64 inch diameter x 1-3/4 inch (min.) long straight shank punch (for item 40)
3. 1/4 to 19/64 inch diameter x 1-3/8 inch (min.) long straight shank punch (for item 24)
4. Small hammer
5. 3/8 inch hex Allen or internal hex wrench (for item 50)
6. 1/2 inch hex Allen or internal hex wrench (for item 54)
7. 3/8 open end wrench (for item 38)
8. Large slotted screwdriver (for item 38)
9. 1-1/4 6pt. or 12 pt. box end or socket wrench (for item 32)
10. Needle nose pliers (for item 25)
11. 1-12 pt. socket and torque wrench (for item 51)
12. Sub wrench assembly, NOV p/n 31873 (for item 5)
13. Release Shaft Retainer Spanner, use large slotted screw driver (for item 46) 14. 15/16 open end wrench or open
end adjustable wrench (for item 4) 15. O-ring pick
In addition to these tools, a supply of new NOV spare parts should be available and on hand in order to speed the repair
process.
Replacement Seal Kit for P/N 34005
Item
Qty
Part No
32501-2
31914
10
31909
11
702640-03-20
12
02640-24-31
13
32519
14
43
1
1
702640-23-01
702640-21-01
53
702640-23-71
Spirol Pins
The minimum number of Spirol Pins required for complete replacement of all pins in the valve is shown on the bill of
materials and in the chart below:
Item
Qty
Part No
Basic Size
19
20712-02
1/8 x 5/8
24
20712-13
5/16 x 1-3/8
40
20712-04
1/4 x 1-1/2
44
20712-03
1/8 x 7/8
NOTE
Refer to the Drawings and Parts List at the end of this manual for NOV part numbers and usage.
The bushings shown in the chart below are not specifically ballooned on the assembly drawing but they are called out
on the bill of material under the main item in the sub-assembly where they are used.
17
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com

Bushings
Item
Qty
Part No
3a
13229-10
Basic Size I.D. x O.D. x

Length
3/8 x 1/2 x 23/32
15a
13229-08
1/2 x 5/8 x 1/2
21a
13229-13
3/8 x 1/2 x 5/8
22a
13229-13
3/8 x 1/2 x 5/8
29a
13229-12
3/4 x 7/8 x 1-1/8
Unitized connector assemblies

Titan Class C W/3 XXH Butt-weld Connections Drawing
Titan Class C W/3 XXH Butt-weld Connections Parts List
Class Type CW/3-1502 Connection Drawing
Class Type CW/3-1502 Connection Parts List
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
Unitized connector assemblies

Item
Description
Flange 1002 Female

Connector
Detachable Nut
Nitrite Seal Ring
Male Half (Butt Weld Prep
Piece)
2
3
4
Part
No.
31892
31881
31884
31880
Figure 8-1-1. 1002 - Hammer Union, Part No. 31893 (Flange 1002 Female)
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Flange 1002 Male Connector
Detachable Nut
Nitrile Seal Ring
Female Half (Butt Weld Prep
Piece)
Retainer Segments (3 ea.
included)
Retainer Ring
5
6
Part
No.
31891
31881
31884
31871
31926
31927
Item
Description
1
2
3
4
Flange 1002 Female Connector

Detachable Nut
Nitrite Seal Ring
Male Half (Butt Weld Prep
Piece)
Part
No.
31930
31925
31884
31931
18
www.nov.com
MANUAL: M-34000

Item
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
Flange 1002 Male Connector

Detachable Nut
Nitrile Seal Ring
Female Half (Butt Weld Prep Piece)
Retainer Segments (3 ea. included)
Retainer Ring
Part
No.
31929
31925
31884
31932
31926
31927
Titan Class C W/3 XXH Butt-weld Connections Drawing
19
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com

Titan Class C W/3 XXH Butt-weld Connections Parts List
ITEM
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
QTY
34001
BODY, MACHINE 3"

TITAN C
SEAT, INSERT,TITAN
PISTON BODY, SUBASSY., TITAN

BUSHING, F/ PISTON
1
1
CAP, FOR PISTON
SUB, M2 / TITAN
CLASS
STEM BUSHING
SEAL, PISTON,
LOWER
SEAL, RETAINER
SEAL, UPPER PISTON

(SHOULDER)
SEAL,STEM BUSHING,
INNER(VITON)
O-RING, PISTON
CAP,FACE SEAL
O-RING, SUB TO
BODY
SEAL, FACE
(F/INSERT)
O-RING, STEM
BUSHING OUTER
BONNET, SUBASSY,TITAN C
BUSHING, BONNET
32524
2
3
33003-01
3a
13229-10
3250002/M2
31948/M2
31900
6
7
32501-2
32512
31914
10
31909
11
70264003-20
70264024-31
3251
12
13
14
15
70264023-01
34020
15a
13229-08
16
30377
17
32025-2
SPARES
1
*
1
1
23545
HANDLE, RESET,
MACHINED
NAMEPLATE,F/
BONNET (SMALL)
PIN, LOWER LINK
18
19
20712-02
PIN, SPIROL
20
20786
LINK, LOWER
21
31977
UPPER LINK SUBASSY.
20
www.nov.com
MANUAL: M-34000

ITEM
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
QTY
13229-13
38161
BUSHING F/ UPPER
LINK
CRANK, SUB-ASSY.
21a
SPARES
22
13229-13
BUSHING, F/ CRANK
22a
23
30391
24
20712-13
SPRING, RESET
CRANK
PIN, SPIROL
25
20791
SPRING, LINKAGE
26
31975
TOP CRANK PIN
27
30380
KEEPER, SPRING
30387
ROD, SPRING GUIDE
38159
COVER, SUB-ASSY.
13229
BUSHING, F/ COVER
30373
RESET CRANK
30388
20798
ROLLER, RESET
CRANK
NUT, AJUSTING,
SELF-LOCKING
INDICATOR, SET
PRESSURE
RETAINER, UPPER
SPRING
STUD, ADJUSTING
30389
SEE CHART CAL.

PLATE
SEE CHART SPRING,
LOAD
SCREW, LOAD
20712-04
RETAINER, LOWER
SPRING
PIN, SPIROL
30381
PIN, CRANK PIVOT
5929-02
FITTING, ALEMITE,
1/4 MALE NPT
O-RING, RESET
HANDLE
PIN, SPIROL
28
29
29a
30
31
5953-34
32
30379
33
30385
34
1
1
1
1
35
36
37
2
1
38
30382
39
40
41
42
43
70264021-01
20712-03
1
2
44
21
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com

ITEM
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
QTY
30397
SHAFT, RELEASE
32052
RETAINER,
THREADED RELEASE
BUTTON, RELEASE
SPRING, RELEASE
BUTTON
SCREW U-DRIVE
1
16
SCREW, SH CAP,
CAPSCREW, FERRY
HEAD 1
LOCK WASHER 1
O-RING, FLANGE
SCREW, SH CAP, 5/8
NAMEPLATE, F/RRV
COVER (LARGE)
NAMEPLATE,TITAN
CLASS
FLANGE, WELD NECK
F/3"-C
SPARES
45
46
47
30396
48
31868
49
111656
50
51
20404410-14
111676
52
111680
53
55
70264023-71
06315010-15
32025-1
56
32025-3
57
31852
54
1
2
22
www.nov.com
MANUAL: M-34000
Class Type CW/3-1502 Connection Drawing

Class Type CW/3-1502 Connection Parts List
ITEM
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
3a
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
15a
16
17
18
19
20
21
21a
22
22a
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
29a
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
34001
32524
33003-01
13229-10
32500-02/M2
31948/M2
31900 S
32501-2
32512
31914
31909
702640-03-20
702640-24-31
32519
34020
13229-08
30377
32025-2
23545
20712-02
20786
31977
13229-10
38161
13229-13
30391
20712-13
20791
31975
30380
30387
38159
13229-12
30373
30388
5953-34
30379
30385
20798
BODY, MACHINE 3" TITAN C

SEAT, INSERT, TITAN
PISTON BODY, SUB-ASSY., TITAN
BUSHING, F/ PISTON
CAP, FOR PISTON
SUB, M2 / TITAN CLASS
TEM BUSHING
SEAL, PISTON, LOWER
SEAL, RETAINER
SEAL, UPPER PISTON (SHOULDER)
SEAL, STEM BUSHING, INNER (VITON)
O-RING, PISTON CAP, FACE SEAL
O-RING, SUB TO BODY
SEAL, FACE (F/INSERT)
BONNET, SUB-ASSY, TITAN C
BUSHING, BONNET
HANDLE, RESET, MACHINED
NAMEPLATE,F/ BONNET (SMALL)
PIN, LOWER LINK
PIN, SPIROL
LINK, LOWER
UPPER LINK SUB-ASSY.
BUSHING F/ UPPER LINK
CRANK, SUB-ASSY.
BUSHING, F/ CRANK
SPRING, RESET CRANK
PIN, SPIROL
SPRING, LINKAGE
TOP CRANK PIN
KEEPER, SPRING
ROD, SPRING GUIDE
COVER, SUB-ASSY.
BUSHING, F/ COVER
RESET CRANK
ROLLER, RESET CRANK
NUT, AJUSTING, SELF-LOCKING
INDICATOR, SET PRESSURE
RETAINER, UPPER SPRING
STUD, ADJUSTING
SEE CHART CAL. PLATE
SEE CHART SPRING, LOAD
QTY
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
5
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
SPARES
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Class Type CW/3-1502 Connection Parts List (Continue)
ITEM
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
30389
30382
20712-04
30381
5929-02
702640-21-01
0712-03
30397
32052
30396
31868
111656
204044-10-14
111676
111680
702640-23-71
063150-10-15
32025-1
32025-3
31930 1502
31929 1502
31884
31925
31931
31932
31926
31927
SCREW, LOAD
RETAINER, LOWER SPRING
PIN, SPIROL
PIN, CRANK PIVOT
FITTING, ALEMITE, 1/4 MALE NPT
O-RING, RESET HANDLE
PIN, SPIROL
SHAFT, RELEASE
RETAINER, THREADED RELEASE SFT.
BUTTON, RELEASE
SPRING, RELEASE BUTTON
SCREW U-DRIVE
SCREW, SH CAP,
CAPSCREW, FERRY HEAD 1
LOCK WASHER 1
O-RING, FLANGE
SCREW, SH CAP, 5/8 4
NAMEPLATE, F/RRV COVER (LARGE)
NAMEPLATE,TITAN CLASS
FEMALE FLG CONNECTOR
MALE FLG CONNECTOR
SEAL RING, F/1002 & 1502 UNIONS
NUT, DETACHABLE 3 1502
SUB, 3 1502/1002 MALE X 3 XXH BW
SUB, 3 1502 FEMALE X 3 XXH BW
SEGMENTS (3-PC) SET
RETAINER RING 10/1502
QTY
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
16
4
8
8
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
SPARES
National Oilwell Varco Brands

Advanced Wirecloth
Aktro
Alberta Instrument
Albins Enterprises
AmClyde
Baylor
Best Flow Products
BLM
Bowen
Brandt
Cabot
Cardwell
Chimo Equipment
Continental Emsco
Cooper
Crestex
Custom Die & Insert
DELCO
Corporate
Dreco
Headquarters
DSS (Drilling Support Services)
Eastern Oil Tools
Elmar
7909 Parkwood Circle
EMD (Electro Motive Division)
Drive
Fibercast
Houston, Texas 77036
Fidmash
United States
Phone: +1 713 375 3700 Flanagan Ironworks
Phone: +1 1 888 262 8645 Franks
Gardner Denver (Hoisting)
Gator Hawk
Gregory
Griffith
HALCO
Harrisburg
Hepburn
HITEC
Houston Scientific
Hydra Rig
Ideco
IPS (Integrated Power Systems)
IRI International
Koomey
Kremco
LOIS ALLIS
Lucker
M&W
M/D Totco
Mathey
MATTCO
McElroy Marine Machinery
Miller Oilfield
Mission
Molde
Mono
Monoflo
National
National Oilwell
Norson
Oil Tools Solutions
Oilwell
Omega Pumps
Pacific Inspection
PCE
Peck-O-Matic
PEP
Procon As
Quality Tubing
Rebound Rig
Retsco
RMI (Rig Manufacturing International)
Roberds Johnson
ROSS HILL
Rucker
Russell Subservice
Sauerman
Shaffer
Shearer
Skytop Brewster
Smith Fiberglass
Specialty
SSR
Stlprodukter
Star Fiberglass
Tech Power
TEM (Tulsa Equipment Manufacturing)
Texas Oil Tools
TS&M
Tuboscope
Turner Oilfield Service
UNIFLEX
Unit (Cranes)
Universal
USF (Utility Steel Fabricators)
Varco
Vector
Versatech
Western Oilfield Engineering
Wheatley Gaso
Wildcat Services
Wilson
Woolley
Downhole Solutions
Drilling Solutions
Engineering and Project Management

Solutions
Lifting and Handling Solutions
Production Solutions
Supply Chain Solutions
Tubular and Corrosion Control

Solutions
Well Service and Completion Solutions
www.nov.com

FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump User Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump User Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

User Manual

FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump

National Oilwell Varco References:

Reason for Issue

Section Not Applicable

Installation, Operation & Maintenance

Spare Parts List

Technical Documents & Drawings

General / Mechanical Drawings

System / Process Diagrams

Section Not Applicable

Section Not Applicable

Installation, Operation & Maintenance

Spare Parts List

D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 2.1

Technical Specification Pre-Shipment And Storage

Commissioning Procedure, FB / FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump

Product Information Bulletin Triplex Mud Pump

Product Information Bulletin Triplex Mud Pumps Power

Procedure The Use of and Application of Safety Wire for

Design Specification Design Torque Standard

General Lubrication Bulletin General Lubrication Bulletin

Client Document Number

Triplex Mud Pump

This document contains proprietary and confidential information

National Oilwell Varco

Reason for issue

MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION PRIOR TO PAINT .................................. 4

MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION AFTER PAINT ........................................ 5

STORAGE AT MANUFACTURING PLANT OR FINAL DESTINATION .......................... 6

STORAGE PREPARATIONS FOR MAIN DRIVE MOTORS. ........................................... 6

START-UP AFTER STORAGE ........................................................................................ 7

CONTACT DETAILS FOR NOTED CORROSION PREVENTATIVE MATERIALS ......... 7

MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION PRIOR TO PAINT

MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION AFTER PAINT

STORAGE AT MANUFACTURING PLANT OR FINAL DESTINATION

STORAGE PREPARATIONS FOR MAIN DRIVE MOTORS.

PRESERVATION PROCEDURE WHEN STORAGE EXCEEDS SIX (6) MONTHS OF

Replace plastic sheeting.

START-UP AFTER STORAGE

CONTACT DETAILS FOR NOTED CORROSION PREVENTATIVE MATERIALS

ADDITIONAL SERVICING INFORMATION IS

COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE, FB/FD-1600

DOCUMENT OR DRAWING NO.

National Oilwell Varco

11000 Corporate Centre Drive

Commissioning Procedure, FB/FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump

DOCUMENT OR DRAWING NO.

COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE, FB/FD-1600

Part II. Commissioning Procedures

DOCUMENT OR DRAWING NO.

COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE, FB/FD-1600

INITIAL STARTUP PROCEDURES

PART I. PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES:

Power End of Pump:

Reservoir Capacity: 100 US Gallons (379 Liters)

Megger test the motors.

DOCUMENT OR DRAWING NO.

COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE, FB/FD-1600

3. Auxiliary A/C Electric Motors:

Megger test the motors.

4. Instrumentation (if equipped):

5. Liner Wash System:

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___

___ _ _ ___